updated for version 7.3.787

Problem: With 'relativenumber' set it is not possible to see the absolute line number. Solution: For the cursor line show the absolute line number instead of a zero. (Nazri Ramliy)
updated for version 7.3.786
2025-12-24 08:05:19 +00:00 · 2013-01-30 12:31:36 +01:00 · 2013-01-30 11:44:39 +01:00 · 2013-01-25 20:11:01 +01:00 · 2013-01-25 19:28:38 +01:00 · 2013-01-24 21:00:20 +01:00
670 changed files with 41652 additions and 12079 deletions
--- a/.gitignore
+++ b/.gitignore
@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@ src/auto/pathdef.c
 *.suo
 *.res
 *.RES
+src/if_perl.c
 src/pathdef.c
 src/Obj*/pathdef.c
 gvimext.dll
@@ -41,11 +42,13 @@ gvimext.lib
 *.mo
 *.swp
 *~
+src/po/vim.pot

 # Generated by "make test"
 src/po/*.ck 
 src/testdir/mbyte.vim 
 src/testdir/mzscheme.vim 
+src/testdir/lua.vim 
 src/testdir/small.vim 
 src/testdir/tiny.vim 
 src/testdir/test*.out
--- a/25
+++ b/25
@@ -81,6 +81,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/testdir/test[0-9]*.ok \
 		src/testdir/test49.vim \
 		src/testdir/test60.vim \
+		src/testdir/test83-tags? \
 		src/proto.h \
 		src/proto/blowfish.pro \
 		src/proto/buffer.pro \
@@ -260,6 +261,7 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/Make_mvc.mak \
 		src/Make_w16.mak \
 		src/bigvim.bat \
+		src/bigvim64.bat \
 		src/msvcsetup.bat \
 		src/msvc2008.bat \
 		src/msvc2010.bat \
@@ -313,6 +315,7 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/xxd/Make_bc5.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_cyg.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_djg.mak \
+		src/xxd/Make_ming.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_mvc.mak \
 		nsis/gvim.nsi \
 		nsis/README.txt \
@@ -347,6 +350,13 @@ SRC_DOS_BIN =	\
 		src/vim*.ico \
 		src/vim.tlb \
 		src/vimtbar.lib \
+		src/xpm/COPYRIGHT \
+		src/xpm/README.txt \
+		src/xpm/include/*.h \
+		src/xpm/x64/lib/libXpm.a \
+		src/xpm/x64/lib/libXpm.lib \
+		src/xpm/x86/lib/libXpm.a \
+		src/xpm/x86/lib/libXpm.lib \
 		src/vimtbar.dll \
 		nsis/icons/*.bmp \
 		nsis/icons/*.ico \
@@ -461,6 +471,7 @@ RT_ALL =	\
 		runtime/macros/hanoi/hanoi.vim \
 		runtime/macros/hanoi/poster \
 		runtime/macros/justify.vim \
+		runtime/macros/less.bat \
 		runtime/macros/less.sh \
 		runtime/macros/less.vim \
 		runtime/macros/life/click.me \
@@ -664,6 +675,8 @@ EXTRA =		\

 # generic language files
 LANG_GEN = \
+		runtime/doc/*-de.1 \
+		runtime/doc/*-de.UTF-8.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-fr.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-fr.UTF-8.1 \
 		runtime/doc/*-it.1 \
@@ -680,9 +693,17 @@ LANG_GEN = \
 		runtime/tutor/Makefile \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.utf-8 \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.?? \
-		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.* \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.utf-8 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.euc \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.sjis \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.iso9 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.big5 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.cp1250 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.cp1251 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??.cp737 \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.??_??.utf-8 \
 		runtime/tutor/tutor.bar \
-		runtime/tutor/tutor.bar.* \
+		runtime/tutor/tutor.bar.utf-8 \
 		runtime/spell/README.txt \
 		runtime/spell/??/*.diff \
 		runtime/spell/??/main.aap \
--- a/README.txt
+++ b/README.txt
@@ -97,10 +97,12 @@ The latest news about Vim can be found on the Vim home page:
 If you have problems, have a look at the Vim FAQ:
 	http://vimdoc.sf.net/vimfaq.html

-Send bug reports to:
-	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
+If you still have problems or any other questions, use one of the mailing
+lists to discuss them with Vim users and developers:
+	http://www.vim.org/maillist.php

-There are several mailing lists for Vim, see http://www.vim.org/maillist.php.
+If nothing else works, report bugs directly:
+	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>


 MAIN AUTHOR
--- a/runtime/autoload/ada.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/ada.vim
@@ -29,6 +29,8 @@
 if version < 700
   finish
 endif 
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 " Section: Constants {{{1
 "
@@ -619,6 +621,9 @@ lockvar  g:ada#Comment
 lockvar! g:ada#Keywords
 lockvar! g:ada#Ctags_Kinds

+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 finish " 1}}}

 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- a/runtime/autoload/ccomplete.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/ccomplete.vim
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:	C
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2010 Mar 23
+" Last Change:	2012 Jun 20

+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 " This function is used for the 'omnifunc' option.
 function! ccomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
@@ -498,7 +500,7 @@ function! s:StructMembers(typename, items, all)
  endif
  if !cached
    while 1
-      exe 'silent! ' . n . 'vimgrep /\t' . typename . '\(\t\|$\)/j ' . fnames
+      exe 'silent! keepj noautocmd ' . n . 'vimgrep /\t' . typename . '\(\t\|$\)/j ' . fnames

      let qflist = getqflist()
      if len(qflist) > 0 || match(typename, "::") < 0
@@ -603,3 +605,6 @@ function! s:SearchMembers(matches, items, all)
  endfor
  return res
 endfunc
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
--- a/runtime/autoload/getscript.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/getscript.vim
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 " getscript.vim
 "  Author:	Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
-"  Date:	May 31, 2011
-"  Version:	33
+"  Date:	Jan 17, 2012
+"  Version:	34
 "  Installing:	:help glvs-install
 "  Usage:	:help glvs
 "
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
 if exists("g:loaded_getscript")
 finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_getscript= "v33"
+let g:loaded_getscript= "v34"
 if &cp
 echoerr "GetLatestVimScripts is not vi-compatible; not loaded (you need to set nocp)"
 finish
@@ -550,30 +550,42 @@ fun! s:GetOneScript(...)
     " decompress
     if sname =~ '\.bz2$'
 "      call Decho("decompress: attempt to bunzip2 ".sname)
-      exe "silent !bunzip2 ".shellescape(sname)
+      exe "sil !bunzip2 ".shellescape(sname)
      let sname= substitute(sname,'\.bz2$','','')
 "      call Decho("decompress: new sname<".sname."> after bunzip2")
     elseif sname =~ '\.gz$'
 "      call Decho("decompress: attempt to gunzip ".sname)
-      exe "silent !gunzip ".shellescape(sname)
+      exe "sil !gunzip ".shellescape(sname)
      let sname= substitute(sname,'\.gz$','','')
 "      call Decho("decompress: new sname<".sname."> after gunzip")
     elseif sname =~ '\.xz$'
 "      call Decho("decompress: attempt to unxz ".sname)
-      exe "silent !unxz ".shellescape(sname)
+      exe "sil !unxz ".shellescape(sname)
      let sname= substitute(sname,'\.xz$','','')
 "      call Decho("decompress: new sname<".sname."> after unxz")
     else
 "      call Decho("no decompression needed")
     endif
     
-     " distribute archive(.zip, .tar, .vba) contents
+     " distribute archive(.zip, .tar, .vba, ...) contents
     if sname =~ '\.zip$'
 "      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to unzip ".sname)
      exe "silent !unzip -o ".shellescape(sname)
     elseif sname =~ '\.tar$'
 "      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to untar ".sname)
      exe "silent !tar -xvf ".shellescape(sname)
+     elseif sname =~ '\.tgz$'
+"      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to untar+gunzip ".sname)
+      exe "silent !tar -zxvf ".shellescape(sname)
+     elseif sname =~ '\.taz$'
+"      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to untar+uncompress ".sname)
+      exe "silent !tar -Zxvf ".shellescape(sname)
+     elseif sname =~ '\.tbz$'
+"      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to untar+bunzip2 ".sname)
+      exe "silent !tar -jxvf ".shellescape(sname)
+     elseif sname =~ '\.txz$'
+"      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to untar+xz ".sname)
+      exe "silent !tar -Jxvf ".shellescape(sname)
     elseif sname =~ '\.vba$'
 "      call Decho("dearchive: attempt to handle a vimball: ".sname)
      silent 1split
--- a/runtime/autoload/netrw.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/netrw.vim
--- a/runtime/autoload/netrwFileHandlers.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/netrwFileHandlers.vim
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 " netrwFileHandlers: contains various extension-based file handlers for
 "                    netrw's browsers' x command ("eXecute launcher")
 " Author:	Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
-" Date:		Sep 30, 2008
-" Version:	10
-" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 1999-2008 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
+" Date:		Mar 14, 2012
+" Version:	11a
+" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 1999-2012 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
 "               Permission is hereby granted to use and distribute this code,
 "               with or without modifications, provided that this copyright
 "               notice is copied with it. Like anything else that's free,
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 if exists("g:loaded_netrwFileHandlers") || &cp
 finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_netrwFileHandlers= "v10"
+let g:loaded_netrwFileHandlers= "v11a"
 if v:version < 702
 echohl WarningMsg
 echo "***warning*** this version of netrwFileHandlers needs vim 7.2"
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ fun! netrwFileHandlers#Invoke(exten,fname)
 "   call Decho("let ret= netrwFileHandlers#NFH_".a:exten.'("'.fname.'")')
   exe "let ret= s:NFH_".a:exten.'("'.fname.'")'
  endif
-  
+
 "  call Dret("netrwFileHandlers#Invoke 0 : ret=".ret)
  return 0
 endfun
@@ -356,6 +356,7 @@ fun! s:NFH_obj(obj)
 endfun

 let &cpo= s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 "  Modelines: {{{1
 "  vim: fdm=marker
--- a/runtime/autoload/netrwSettings.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/netrwSettings.vim
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ fun! netrwSettings#NetrwSettings()
   put = 'let g:netrw_browsex_viewer    = (not defined)'
  endif
  put = 'let g:netrw_compress          = '.g:netrw_compress
-  put = 'let g:netrw_cursorline        = '.g:netrw_cursorline
+  put = 'let g:netrw_cursor            = '.g:netrw_cursor
  let decompressline= line("$")
  put ='let g:netrw_decompress...'
  put = 'let g:netrw_dirhistmax        = '.g:netrw_dirhistmax
@@ -125,9 +125,9 @@ fun! netrwSettings#NetrwSettings()
  put = 'let g:netrw_list_hide         = '.g:netrw_list_hide
  put = 'let g:netrw_liststyle         = '.g:netrw_liststyle
  put = 'let g:netrw_localcopycmd      = '.g:netrw_localcopycmd
-  put = 'let g:netrw_local_mkdir       = '.g:netrw_local_mkdir
+  put = 'let g:netrw_localmkdir        = '.g:netrw_localmkdir
  put = 'let g:netrw_localmovecmd      = '.g:netrw_localmovecmd
-  put = 'let g:netrw_local_rmdir       = '.g:netrw_local_rmdir
+  put = 'let g:netrw_localrmdir       = '.g:netrw_localrmdir
  put = 'let g:netrw_maxfilenamelen    = '.g:netrw_maxfilenamelen
  put = 'let g:netrw_menu              = '.g:netrw_menu
  put = 'let g:netrw_mkdir_cmd         = '.g:netrw_mkdir_cmd
--- a/runtime/autoload/phpcomplete.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/phpcomplete.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:	PHP
 " Maintainer:	Mikolaj Machowski ( mikmach AT wp DOT pl )
-" Last Change:	2006 May 9
+" Last Change:	2011 Dec 08
 "
 "   TODO:
 "   - Class aware completion:
@@ -650,6 +650,7 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassContents(file, name) " {{{
 	" this is the most efficient way. The other way
 	" is to go through the looong string looking for
 	" matching {}
+	let original_window = winnr()
 	below 1new
 	0put =cfile
 	call search('class\s\+'.a:name)
@@ -667,6 +668,9 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassContents(file, name) " {{{
 	let classcontent = join(classc, "\n")

 	bw! %
+	" go back to where we started
+	exe original_window.'wincmd w'
+
 	if extends_class != ''
 		let classlocation = phpcomplete#GetClassLocation(extends_class)
 		if filereadable(classlocation)
--- a/runtime/autoload/spellfile.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/spellfile.vim
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim script to download a missing spell file
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2008 Nov 29
+" Last Change:	2012 Jan 08

 if !exists('g:spellfile_URL')
  " Prefer using http:// when netrw should be able to use it, since
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ function! spellfile#LoadFile(lang)
    " Remember the buffer number, we check it below.
    new
    let newbufnr = winbufnr(0)
-    setlocal bin
+    setlocal bin fenc=
    echo 'Downloading ' . fname . '...'
    call spellfile#Nread(fname)
    if getline(2) !~ 'VIMspell'
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ function! spellfile#LoadFile(lang)
 	  " Our buffer has vanished!?  Open a new window.
 	  echomsg "download buffer disappeared, opening a new one"
 	  new
-	  setlocal bin
+	  setlocal bin fenc=
 	else
 	  exe winnr . "wincmd w"
 	endif
@@ -120,6 +120,7 @@ function! spellfile#LoadFile(lang)
      else
 	let dirname = escape(dirlist[dirchoice], ' ')
      endif
+      setlocal fenc=
      exe "write " . dirname . '/' . fname

      " Also download the .sug file, if the user wants to.
--- a/runtime/autoload/sqlcomplete.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/sqlcomplete.vim
@@ -1,16 +1,51 @@
 " Vim OMNI completion script for SQL
 " Language:    SQL
 " Maintainer:  David Fishburn <dfishburn dot vim at gmail dot com>
-" Version:     10.0
-" Last Change: 2010 Jun 11
+" Version:     14.0
+" Last Change: 2012 Dec 04
+" Homepage:    http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=1572
 " Usage:       For detailed help
-"              ":help sql.txt" 
-"              or ":help ft-sql-omni" 
+"              ":help sql.txt"
+"              or ":help ft-sql-omni"
 "              or read $VIMRUNTIME/doc/sql.txt

 " History
+"
+" Version 14.0 (Dec 2012)
+"     - BF: Added check for cpo
+"
+" Version 13.0 (Dec 2012)
+"     - NF: When completing column lists or drilling into a table
+"           and g:omni_sql_include_owner is enabled, the
+"           only the table name would be replaced with the column
+"           list instead of the table name and owner (if specified).
+"     - NF: When completing column lists using table aliases
+"           and g:omni_sql_include_owner is enabled, account
+"           for the owner name when looking up the table
+"           list instead of the table name and owner (if specified).
+"     - BF: When completing column lists or drilling into a table
+"           and g:omni_sql_include_owner is enabled, the
+"           column list could often not be found for the table.
+"     - BF: When OMNI popped up, possibly the wrong word
+"           would be replaced for column and column list options.
+"
+" Version 12.0 (Feb 2012)
+"     - Partial column name completion did not work when a table
+"       name or table alias was provided (Jonas Enberg).
+"     - Improved the handling of column completion.  First we match any
+"       columns from a previous completion.  If not matches are found, we
+"       consider the partial name to be a table or table alias for the
+"       query and attempt to match on it.
+"
+" Version 11.0 (Jan 2012)
+"     Added g:omni_sql_default_compl_type variable
+"         - You can specify which type of completion to default to
+"           when pressing <C-X><C-O>.  The entire list of available
+"           choices can be found in the calls to sqlcomplete#Map in:
+"               ftplugin/sql.vim
+"
 " Version 10.0
-"     Updated PreCacheSyntax() 
+"     Updated PreCacheSyntax()
 "         - Now returns a List of the syntax items it finds.
 "           This allows other plugins / scripts to use this list for their own
 "           purposes.  In this case XPTemplate can use them for a Choose list.
@@ -18,33 +53,33 @@
 "           warning if not.
 "         - Verifies the parameters are the correct type and displays a
 "           warning if not.
-"     Updated SQLCWarningMsg() 
+"     Updated SQLCWarningMsg()
 "         - Prepends warning message with SQLComplete so you know who issued
 "           the warning.
-"     Updated SQLCErrorMsg() 
+"     Updated SQLCErrorMsg()
 "         - Prepends error message with SQLComplete so you know who issued
 "           the error.
-"     
-" Version 9.0
+"
+" Version 9.0 (May 2010)
 "     This change removes some of the support for tables with spaces in their
-"     names in order to simplify the regexes used to pull out query table 
+"     names in order to simplify the regexes used to pull out query table
 "     aliases for more robust table name and column name code completion.
 "     Full support for "table names with spaces" can be added in again
 "     after 7.3.
 "
 " Version 8.0
-"     Incorrectly re-executed the g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_right and g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_left 
+"     Incorrectly re-executed the g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_right and g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_left
 "     when drilling in and out of a column list for a table.
 "
-" Version 7.0
+" Version 7.0 (Jan 2010)
 "     Better handling of object names
 "
-" Version 6.0
+" Version 6.0 (Apr 2008)
 "     Supports object names with spaces "my table name"
 "
 " Set completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O to autoloaded function.
 " This check is in place in case this script is
-" sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature. 
+" sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature.
 if exists('&omnifunc')
    " Do not set the option if already set since this
    " results in an E117 warning.
@@ -54,9 +89,11 @@ if exists('&omnifunc')
 endif

 if exists('g:loaded_sql_completion')
-    finish 
+    finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_sql_completion = 100
+let g:loaded_sql_completion = 130
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 " Maintains filename of dictionary
 let s:sql_file_table        = ""
@@ -69,7 +106,7 @@ let s:tbl_alias             = []
 let s:tbl_cols              = []
 let s:syn_list              = []
 let s:syn_value             = []
- 
+
 " Used in conjunction with the syntaxcomplete plugin
 let s:save_inc              = ""
 let s:save_exc              = ""
@@ -79,7 +116,7 @@ endif
 if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql')
    let s:save_exc = g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_sql
 endif
- 
+
 " Used with the column list
 let s:save_prev_table       = ""

@@ -110,14 +147,25 @@ if !exists('g:omni_sql_include_owner')
        if g:loaded_dbext >= 300
            " New to dbext 3.00, by default the table lists include the owner
            " name of the table.  This is used when determining how much of
-            " whatever has been typed should be replaced as part of the 
+            " whatever has been typed should be replaced as part of the
            " code replacement.
            let g:omni_sql_include_owner = 1
        endif
    endif
 endif
+" Default type of completion used when <C-X><C-O> is pressed
+if !exists('g:omni_sql_default_compl_type')
+    let g:omni_sql_default_compl_type = 'table'
+endif

 " This function is used for the 'omnifunc' option.
+" It is called twice by omni and it is responsible
+" for returning the completion list of items.
+" But it must also determine context of what to complete
+" and what to "replace" with the completion.
+" The a:base, is replaced directly with what the user
+" chooses from the choices.
+" The s:prepend provides context for the completion.
 function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)

    " Default to table name completion
@@ -126,6 +174,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
    if exists('b:sql_compl_type')
        let compl_type = b:sql_compl_type
    endif
+    let begindot = 0

    " First pass through this function determines how much of the line should
    " be replaced by whatever is chosen from the completion list
@@ -134,13 +183,12 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
        let line     = getline('.')
        let start    = col('.') - 1
        let lastword = -1
-        let begindot = 0
        " Check if the first character is a ".", for column completion
        if line[start - 1] == '.'
            let begindot = 1
        endif
        while start > 0
-            " Additional code was required to handle objects which 
+            " Additional code was required to handle objects which
            " can contain spaces like "my table name".
            if line[start - 1] !~ '\(\w\|\.\)'
                " If the previous character is not a period or word character
@@ -150,7 +198,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
            elseif line[start - 1] =~ '\w'
                " If the previous character is word character continue back
                let start -= 1
-            elseif line[start - 1] =~ '\.' && 
+            elseif line[start - 1] =~ '\.' &&
                        \ compl_type =~ 'column\|table\|view\|procedure'
                " If the previous character is a period and we are completing
                " an object which can be specified with a period like this:
@@ -160,7 +208,10 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
                " If lastword has already been set for column completion
                " break from the loop, since we do not also want to pickup
                " a table name if it was also supplied.
-                if lastword != -1 && compl_type == 'column' 
+                " Unless g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1, then we can
+                " include the ownername.
+                if lastword != -1 && compl_type == 'column'
+                            \ && g:omni_sql_include_owner == 0
                    break
                endif
                " If column completion was specified stop at the "." if
@@ -171,8 +222,8 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
                endif
                " If omni_sql_include_owner = 0, do not include the table
                " name as part of the substitution, so break here
-                if lastword == -1 && 
-                            \ compl_type =~ 'table\|view\|procedure\column_csv' && 
+                if lastword == -1 &&
+                            \ compl_type =~ '\<\(table\|view\|procedure\|column\|column_csv\)\>' &&
                            \ g:omni_sql_include_owner == 0
                    let lastword = start
                    break
@@ -202,7 +253,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
    let compl_list = []

    " Default to table name completion
-    let compl_type = 'table'
+    let compl_type = g:omni_sql_default_compl_type
    " Allow maps to specify what type of object completion they want
    if exists('b:sql_compl_type')
        let compl_type = b:sql_compl_type
@@ -216,7 +267,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)

    if compl_type == 'table' ||
                \ compl_type == 'procedure' ||
-                \ compl_type == 'view' 
+                \ compl_type == 'view'

        " This type of completion relies upon the dbext.vim plugin
        if s:SQLCCheck4dbext() == -1
@@ -254,7 +305,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)

        if base == ""
            " The last time we displayed a column list we stored
-            " the table name.  If the user selects a column list 
+            " the table name.  If the user selects a column list
            " without a table name of alias present, assume they want
            " the previous column list displayed.
            let base = s:save_prev_table
@@ -269,20 +320,26 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
            let table  = matchstr( base, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze\..*' )
            let column = matchstr( base, '.*\.\zs.*' )

+            if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1 && owner == '' && table != '' && column != ''
+                let owner  = table
+                let table  = column
+                let column = ''
+            endif
+
            " It is pretty well impossible to determine if the user
            " has entered:
            "    owner.table
            "    table.column_prefix
-            " So there are a couple of things we can do to mitigate 
+            " So there are a couple of things we can do to mitigate
            " this issue.
            "    1.  Check if the dbext plugin has the option turned
            "        on to even allow owners
            "    2.  Based on 1, if the user is showing a table list
-            "        and the DrillIntoTable (using <Right>) then 
+            "        and the DrillIntoTable (using <Right>) then
            "        this will be owner.table.  In this case, we can
-            "        check to see the table.column exists in the 
+            "        check to see the table.column exists in the
            "        cached table list.  If it does, then we have
-            "        determined the user has actually chosen 
+            "        determined the user has actually chosen
            "        owner.table, not table.column_prefix.
            let found = -1
            if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1 && owner == ''
@@ -297,17 +354,46 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
            " If the user has indicated not to use table owners at all and
            " the base ends in a '.' we know they are not providing a column
            " name, so we can shift the items appropriately.
-            if found != -1 || (g:omni_sql_include_owner == 0 && base !~ '\.$')
-                let owner  = table
-                let table  = column
-                let column = ''
-            endif
+            " if found != -1 || (g:omni_sql_include_owner == 0 && base !~ '\.$')
+            "     let owner  = table
+            "     let table  = column
+            "     let column = ''
+            " endif
        else
+            " If no "." was provided and the user asked for
+            " column level completion, first attempt the match
+            " on any previous column lists.  If the user asked
+            " for a list of columns comma separated, continue as usual.
+            if compl_type == 'column' && s:save_prev_table != ''
+                " The last time we displayed a column list we stored
+                " the table name.  If the user selects a column list
+                " without a table name of alias present, assume they want
+                " the previous column list displayed.
+                let table     = s:save_prev_table
+                let list_type = ''
+
+                let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(table, list_type)
+                if ! empty(compl_list)
+                    " If no column prefix has been provided and the table
+                    " name was provided, append it to each of the items
+                    " returned.
+                    let compl_list = filter(deepcopy(compl_list), 'v:val=~"^'.base.'"' )
+
+                    " If not empty, we have a match on columns
+                    " return the list
+                    if ! empty(compl_list)
+                        return compl_list
+                    endif
+                endif
+            endif
+            " Since no columns were found to match the base supplied
+            " assume the user is trying to complete the column list
+            " for a table (and or an alias to a table).
            let table  = base
        endif

        " Get anything after the . and consider this the table name
-        " If an owner has been specified, then we must consider the 
+        " If an owner has been specified, then we must consider the
        " base to be a partial column name
        " let base  = matchstr( base, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*' )

@@ -322,16 +408,25 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
                let list_type     = 'csv'
            endif

-            let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(table, list_type)
+            " If we are including the OWNER for the objects, then for
+            " table completion, if we have it, it should be included
+            " as there can be the same table names in a database yet
+            " with different owner names.
+            if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1 && owner != '' && table != ''
+                let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(owner.'.'.table, list_type)
+            else
+                let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(table, list_type)
+            endif
+
            if column != ''
                " If no column prefix has been provided and the table
                " name was provided, append it to each of the items
                " returned.
-                let compl_list = map(compl_list, "table.'.'.v:val")
+                let compl_list = map(compl_list, 'table.".".v:val')
                if owner != ''
                    " If an owner has been provided append it to each of the
                    " items returned.
-                    let compl_list = map(compl_list, "owner.'.'.v:val")
+                    let compl_list = map(compl_list, 'owner.".".v:val')
                endif
            else
                let base = ''
@@ -345,11 +440,14 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
        endif
    elseif compl_type == 'resetCache'
        " Reset all cached items
-        let s:tbl_name  = []
-        let s:tbl_alias = []
-        let s:tbl_cols  = []
-        let s:syn_list  = []
-        let s:syn_value = []
+        let s:tbl_name           = []
+        let s:tbl_alias          = []
+        let s:tbl_cols           = []
+        let s:syn_list           = []
+        let s:syn_value          = []
+        let s:sql_file_table     = ""
+        let s:sql_file_procedure = ""
+        let s:sql_file_view      = ""

        let msg = "All SQL cached items have been removed."
        call s:SQLCWarningMsg(msg)
@@ -361,22 +459,41 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)

    if base != ''
        " Filter the list based on the first few characters the user entered.
-        " Check if the text matches at the beginning 
-        " or 
+        " Check if the text matches at the beginning
+        "         \\(^.base.'\\)
+        " or
        " Match to a owner.table or alias.column type match
+        "         ^\\(\\w\\+\\.\\)\\?'.base.'\\)
        " or
        " Handle names with spaces "my table name"
+        "         "\\(^'.base.'\\|^\\(\\w\\+\\.\\)\\?'.base.'\\)"'
+        "
        let expr = 'v:val '.(g:omni_sql_ignorecase==1?'=~?':'=~#').' "\\(^'.base.'\\|^\\(\\w\\+\\.\\)\\?'.base.'\\)"'
        " let expr = 'v:val '.(g:omni_sql_ignorecase==1?'=~?':'=~#').' "\\(^'.base.'\\)"'
        " let expr = 'v:val '.(g:omni_sql_ignorecase==1?'=~?':'=~#').' "\\(^'.base.'\\|\\(\\.\\)\\?'.base.'\\)"'
        " let expr = 'v:val '.(g:omni_sql_ignorecase==1?'=~?':'=~#').' "\\(^'.base.'\\|\\([^.]*\\)\\?'.base.'\\)"'
        let compl_list = filter(deepcopy(compl_list), expr)
+
+        if empty(compl_list) && compl_type == 'table' && base =~ '\.$'
+            " It is possible we could be looking for column name completion
+            " and the user simply hit C-X C-O to lets try it as well
+            " since we had no hits with the tables.
+            " If the base ends with a . it is hard to know if we are
+            " completing table names or column names.
+            let list_type = ''
+
+            let compl_list  = s:SQLCGetColumns(base, list_type)
+        endif
    endif

    if exists('b:sql_compl_savefunc') && b:sql_compl_savefunc != ""
        let &omnifunc = b:sql_compl_savefunc
    endif

+    if empty(compl_list)
+        call s:SQLCWarningMsg( 'Could not find type['.compl_type.'] using prepend[.'.s:prepended.'] base['.a:base.']' )
+    endif
+
    return compl_list
 endfunc

@@ -384,7 +501,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#PreCacheSyntax(...)
    let syn_group_arr = []
    let syn_items     = []

-    if a:0 > 0 
+    if a:0 > 0
        if type(a:1) != 3
            call s:SQLCWarningMsg("Parameter is not a list. Example:['syntaxGroup1', 'syntaxGroup2']")
            return ''
@@ -407,7 +524,7 @@ endfunction
 function! sqlcomplete#ResetCacheSyntax(...)
    let syn_group_arr = []

-    if a:0 > 0 
+    if a:0 > 0
        if type(a:1) != 3
            call s:SQLCWarningMsg("Parameter is not a list. Example:['syntaxGroup1', 'syntaxGroup2']")
            return ''
@@ -458,7 +575,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#DrillIntoTable()
 	" If the popup is not visible, simple perform the normal
 	" key behaviour.
 	" Must use exec since they key must be preceeded by "\"
-	" or feedkeys will simply push each character of the string 
+	" or feedkeys will simply push each character of the string
 	" rather than the "key press".
        exec 'call feedkeys("\'.g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_right.'", "n")'
    endif
@@ -475,7 +592,7 @@ function! sqlcomplete#DrillOutOfColumns()
 	" If the popup is not visible, simple perform the normal
 	" key behaviour.
 	" Must use exec since they key must be preceeded by "\"
-	" or feedkeys will simply push each character of the string 
+	" or feedkeys will simply push each character of the string
 	" rather than the "key press".
        exec 'call feedkeys("\'.g:ftplugin_sql_omni_key_left.'", "n")'
    endif
@@ -484,16 +601,16 @@ endfunction

 function! s:SQLCWarningMsg(msg)
    echohl WarningMsg
-    echomsg 'SQLComplete:'.a:msg 
+    echomsg 'SQLComplete:'.a:msg
    echohl None
 endfunction
-      
+
 function! s:SQLCErrorMsg(msg)
    echohl ErrorMsg
-    echomsg 'SQLComplete:'.a:msg 
+    echomsg 'SQLComplete:'.a:msg
    echohl None
 endfunction
-      
+
 function! s:SQLCGetSyntaxList(syn_group)
    let syn_group  = a:syn_group
    let compl_list = []
@@ -504,7 +621,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetSyntaxList(syn_group)
        " Return previously cached value
        let compl_list = s:syn_value[list_idx]
    else
-        " Request the syntax list items from the 
+        " Request the syntax list items from the
        " syntax completion plugin
        if syn_group == 'syntax'
            " Handle this special case.  This allows the user
@@ -552,7 +669,7 @@ function! s:SQLCAddAlias(table_name, table_alias, cols)
    let table_alias = a:table_alias
    let cols        = a:cols

-    if g:omni_sql_use_tbl_alias != 'n' 
+    if g:omni_sql_use_tbl_alias != 'n'
        if table_alias == ''
            if 'da' =~? g:omni_sql_use_tbl_alias
                if table_name =~ '_'
@@ -562,13 +679,13 @@ function! s:SQLCAddAlias(table_name, table_alias, cols)
                    setlocal iskeyword-=_

                    " Get the first letter of each word
-                    " [[:alpha:]] is used instead of \w 
+                    " [[:alpha:]] is used instead of \w
                    " to catch extended accented characters
                    "
-                    let table_alias = substitute( 
-                                \ table_name, 
-                                \ '\<[[:alpha:]]\+\>_\?', 
-                                \ '\=strpart(submatch(0), 0, 1)', 
+                    let table_alias = substitute(
+                                \ table_name,
+                                \ '\<[[:alpha:]]\+\>_\?',
+                                \ '\=strpart(submatch(0), 0, 1)',
                                \ 'g'
                                \ )
                    " Restore original value
@@ -596,7 +713,7 @@ function! s:SQLCAddAlias(table_name, table_alias, cols)
    return cols
 endfunction

-function! s:SQLCGetObjectOwner(object) 
+function! s:SQLCGetObjectOwner(object)
    " The owner regex matches a word at the start of the string which is
    " followed by a dot, but doesn't include the dot in the result.
    " ^           - from beginning of line
@@ -609,11 +726,29 @@ function! s:SQLCGetObjectOwner(object)
    " let owner = matchstr( a:object, '^\s*\zs.*\ze\.' )
    let owner = matchstr( a:object, '^\("\|\[\)\?\zs\.\{-}\ze\("\|\]\)\?\.' )
    return owner
-endfunction 
+endfunction

 function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
+    if a:table_name =~ '\.'
+        " Check if the owner/creator has been specified
+        let owner  = matchstr( a:table_name, '^\zs.*\ze\..*\..*' )
+        let table  = matchstr( a:table_name, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze\..*' )
+        let column = matchstr( a:table_name, '.*\.\zs.*' )
+
+        if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1 && owner == '' && table != '' && column != ''
+            let owner  = table
+            let table  = column
+            let column = ''
+        endif
+    else
+        let owner  = ''
+        let table  = matchstr(a:table_name, '^["\[\]a-zA-Z0-9_ ]\+\ze\.\?')
+        let column = ''
+    endif
+
    " Check if the table name was provided as part of the column name
-    let table_name   = matchstr(a:table_name, '^["\[\]a-zA-Z0-9_ ]\+\ze\.\?')
+    " let table_name   = matchstr(a:table_name, '^["\[\]a-zA-Z0-9_ ]\+\ze\.\?')
+    let table_name   = table
    let table_cols   = []
    let table_alias  = ''
    let move_to_top  = 1
@@ -636,7 +771,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
    if list_idx > -1
        let table_cols = split(s:tbl_cols[list_idx], '\n')
    else
-        " Check if we have already cached the column list for this table 
+        " Check if we have already cached the column list for this table
        " by its alias, assuming the table_name provided was actually
        " the alias for the table instead
        "     select *
@@ -654,7 +789,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
    " And the table ends in a "." or we are looking for a column list
    " if list_idx == -1 && (a:table_name =~ '\.' || b:sql_compl_type =~ 'column')
    " if list_idx == -1 && (a:table_name =~ '\.' || a:list_type =~ 'csv')
-    if list_idx == -1 
+    if list_idx == -1
         let saveY      = @y
         let saveSearch = @/
         let saveWScan  = &wrapscan
@@ -665,7 +800,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
         setlocal nowrapscan
         " If . was entered, look at the word just before the .
         " We are looking for something like this:
-         "    select * 
+         "    select *
         "      from customer c
         "     where c.
         " So when . is pressed, we need to find 'c'
@@ -692,15 +827,15 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
         " if query =~? '^\c\(select\)'
         if query =~? '^\(select\|update\|delete\)'
             let found = 1
-             "  \(\(\<\w\+\>\)\.\)\?   - 
+             "  \(\(\<\w\+\>\)\.\)\?   -
             " '\c\(from\|join\|,\).\{-}'  - Starting at the from clause (case insensitive)
             " '\zs\(\(\<\w\+\>\)\.\)\?' - Get the owner name (optional)
-             " '\<\w\+\>\ze' - Get the table name 
+             " '\<\w\+\>\ze' - Get the table name
             " '\s\+\<'.table_name.'\>' - Followed by the alias
             " '\s*\.\@!.*'  - Cannot be followed by a .
             " '\(\<where\>\|$\)' - Must be followed by a WHERE clause
             " '.*'  - Exclude the rest of the line in the match
-             " let table_name_new = matchstr(@y, 
+             " let table_name_new = matchstr(@y,
             "             \ '\c\(from\|join\|,\).\{-}'.
             "             \ '\zs\(\("\|\[\)\?.\{-}\("\|\]\)\.\)\?'.
             "             \ '\("\|\[\)\?.\{-}\("\|\]\)\?\ze'.
@@ -711,7 +846,16 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
             "             \ '\(\<where\>\|$\)'.
             "             \ '.*'
             "             \ )
-             let table_name_new = matchstr(@y, 
+             "
+             "
+             " ''\c\(\<from\>\|\<join\>\|,\)\s*'  - Starting at the from clause (case insensitive)
+             " '\zs\(\("\|\[\)\?\w\+\("\|\]\)\?\.\)\?' - Get the owner name (optional)
+             " '\("\|\[\)\?\w\+\("\|\]\)\?\ze' - Get the table name
+             " '\s\+\%(as\s\+\)\?\<'.matchstr(table_name, '.\{-}\ze\.\?$').'\>' - Followed by the alias
+             " '\s*\.\@!.*'  - Cannot be followed by a .
+             " '\(\<where\>\|$\)' - Must be followed by a WHERE clause
+             " '.*'  - Exclude the rest of the line in the match
+             let table_name_new = matchstr(@y,
                         \ '\c\(\<from\>\|\<join\>\|,\)\s*'.
                         \ '\zs\(\("\|\[\)\?\w\+\("\|\]\)\?\.\)\?'.
                         \ '\("\|\[\)\?\w\+\("\|\]\)\?\ze'.
@@ -725,7 +869,12 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)

             if table_name_new != ''
                 let table_alias = table_name
-                 let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze' )
+                 if g:omni_sql_include_owner == 1
+                    let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\zs\(.\{-}\.\)\?\(.\{-}\.\)\?.*\ze' )
+                 else
+                     " let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\(.*\.\)\?\zs.*\ze' )
+                    let table_name  = matchstr( table_name_new, '^\(.\{-}\.\)\?\zs\(.\{-}\.\)\?.*\ze' )
+                 endif

                 let list_idx = index(s:tbl_name, table_name, 0, &ignorecase)
                 if list_idx > -1
@@ -753,7 +902,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)

         " Return to previous location
         call cursor(curline, curcol)
-         
+
         if found == 0
             if g:loaded_dbext > 300
                 exec 'DBSetOption use_tbl_alias='.saveSettingAlias
@@ -762,12 +911,13 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)
             " Not a SQL statement, do not display a list
             return []
         endif
-    endif 
+    endif

    if empty(table_cols)
        " Specify silent mode, no messages to the user (tbl, 1)
        " Specify do not comma separate (tbl, 1, 1)
-        let table_cols_str = DB_getListColumn(table_name, 1, 1)
+        " let table_cols_str = DB_getListColumn(table_name, 1, 1)
+        let table_cols_str = DB_getListColumn((owner!=''?owner.'.':'').table_name, 1, 1)

        if table_cols_str != ""
            let s:tbl_name  = add( s:tbl_name,  table_name )
@@ -793,3 +943,7 @@ function! s:SQLCGetColumns(table_name, list_type)

    return table_cols
 endfunction
+"  Restore:
+let &cpo= s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+" vim: ts=4 fdm=marker
--- a/runtime/autoload/syntaxcomplete.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/syntaxcomplete.vim
@@ -1,16 +1,42 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:    All languages, uses existing syntax highlighting rules
 " Maintainer:  David Fishburn <dfishburn dot vim at gmail dot com>
-" Version:     7.0
-" Last Change: 2010 Jul 29
-" Usage:       For detailed help, ":help ft-syntax-omni" 
+" Version:     11.0
+" Last Change: 2012 Dec 04
+" Usage:       For detailed help, ":help ft-syntax-omni"

 " History
 "
+" Version 11.0
+"     Corrected which characters required escaping during
+"     substitution calls.
+"
+" Version 10.0
+"     Cycle through all the character ranges specified in the
+"     iskeyword option and build a list of valid word separators.
+"     Prior to this change, only actual characters were used,
+"     where for example ASCII "45" == "-".  If "45" were used
+"     in iskeyword the hyphen would not be picked up.
+"     This introduces a new option, since the character ranges
+"     specified could be multibyte:
+"         let g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte = 1
+"     This by default will only allow single byte ASCII
+"     characters to be added and an additional check to ensure
+"     the charater is printable (see documentation for isprint).
+"
+" Version 9.0
+"     Add the check for cpo.
+"
+" Version 8.0
+"     Updated SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems()
+"         - Some additional syntax items were also allowed
+"           on nextgroup= lines which were ignored by default.
+"           Now these lines are processed independently.
+"
 " Version 7.0
 "     Updated syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
 "         - Looking up the syntax groups defined from a syntax file
-"           looked for only 1 format of {filetype}GroupName, but some 
+"           looked for only 1 format of {filetype}GroupName, but some
 "           syntax writers use this format as well:
 "               {b:current_syntax}GroupName
 "           OmniSyntaxList() will now check for both if the first
@@ -18,11 +44,11 @@
 "
 " Version 6.0
 "     Added syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList()
-"         - Allows other plugins to use this for their own 
+"         - Allows other plugins to use this for their own
 "           purposes.
 "         - It will return a List of all syntax items for the
-"           syntax group name passed in.  
-"         - XPTemplate for SQL will use this function via the 
+"           syntax group name passed in.
+"         - XPTemplate for SQL will use this function via the
 "           sqlcomplete plugin to populate a Choose box.
 "
 " Version 5.0
@@ -32,7 +58,7 @@
 "
 " Set completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O to autoloaded function.
 " This check is in place in case this script is
-" sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature. 
+" sourced directly instead of using the autoload feature.
 if exists('+omnifunc')
    " Do not set the option if already set since this
    " results in an E117 warning.
@@ -42,9 +68,13 @@ if exists('+omnifunc')
 endif

 if exists('g:loaded_syntax_completion')
-    finish 
+    finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_syntax_completion = 70
+let g:loaded_syntax_completion = 110
+
+" Turn on support for line continuations when creating the script
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 " Set ignorecase to the ftplugin standard
 " This is the default setting, but if you define a buffer local
@@ -61,6 +91,18 @@ if !exists('g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword')
    let g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword = 1
 endif

+" When using iskeyword, this setting controls whether the characters
+" should be limited to single byte characters.
+if !exists('g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte')
+    let g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte = 1
+endif
+
+" When using iskeyword, this setting controls whether the characters
+" should be limited to single byte characters.
+if !exists('g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword_numeric')
+    let g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword_numeric = 1
+endif
+
 " Only display items in the completion window that are at least
 " this many characters in length.
 " This is the default setting, but if you define a buffer local
@@ -72,7 +114,8 @@ endif
 " This script will build a completion list based on the syntax
 " elements defined by the files in $VIMRUNTIME/syntax.
 let s:syn_remove_words = 'match,matchgroup=,contains,'.
-            \ 'links to,start=,end=,nextgroup='
+            \ 'links to,start=,end='
+            " \ 'links to,start=,end=,nextgroup='

 let s:cache_name = []
 let s:cache_list = []
@@ -151,7 +194,7 @@ endfunc
 function! syntaxcomplete#OmniSyntaxList(...)
    if a:0 > 0
        let parms = []
-        if 3 == type(a:1) 
+        if 3 == type(a:1)
            let parms = a:1
        elseif 1 == type(a:1)
            let parms = split(a:1, ',')
@@ -165,7 +208,7 @@ endfunc
 function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
    let list_parms = []
    if a:0 > 0
-        if 3 == type(a:1) 
+        if 3 == type(a:1)
            let list_parms = a:1
        elseif 1 == type(a:1)
            let list_parms = split(a:1, ',')
@@ -201,18 +244,18 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)

    let saveL = @l
    let filetype = substitute(&filetype, '\.', '_', 'g')
-    
+
    if empty(list_parms)
        " Default the include group to include the requested syntax group
        let syntax_group_include_{filetype} = ''
        " Check if there are any overrides specified for this filetype
        if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_include_'.filetype)
            let syntax_group_include_{filetype} =
-                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype},'\s\+','','g') 
+                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype},'\s\+','','g')
            let list_parms = split(g:omni_syntax_group_include_{filetype}, ',')
            if syntax_group_include_{filetype} =~ '\w'
-                let syntax_group_include_{filetype} = 
-                            \ substitute( syntax_group_include_{filetype}, 
+                let syntax_group_include_{filetype} =
+                            \ substitute( syntax_group_include_{filetype},
                            \ '\s*,\s*', '\\|', 'g'
                            \ )
            endif
@@ -222,11 +265,11 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
    endif

    " Loop through all the syntax groupnames, and build a
-    " syntax file which contains these names.  This can 
+    " syntax file which contains these names.  This can
    " work generically for any filetype that does not already
    " have a plugin defined.
    " This ASSUMES the syntax groupname BEGINS with the name
-    " of the filetype.  From my casual viewing of the vim7\syntax 
+    " of the filetype.  From my casual viewing of the vim7\syntax
    " directory this is true for almost all syntax definitions.
    " As an example, the SQL syntax groups have this pattern:
    "     sqlType
@@ -239,7 +282,7 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
    let syntax_full = "\n".@l
    let @l = saveL

-    if syntax_full =~ 'E28' 
+    if syntax_full =~ 'E28'
                \ || syntax_full =~ 'E411'
                \ || syntax_full =~ 'E415'
                \ || syntax_full =~ 'No Syntax items'
@@ -249,7 +292,7 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
    let filetype = substitute(&filetype, '\.', '_', 'g')

    let list_exclude_groups = []
-    if a:0 > 0 
+    if a:0 > 0
        " Do nothing since we have specific a specific list of groups
    else
        " Default the exclude group to nothing
@@ -257,11 +300,11 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
        " Check if there are any overrides specified for this filetype
        if exists('g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_'.filetype)
            let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =
-                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype},'\s\+','','g') 
+                        \ substitute( g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype},'\s\+','','g')
            let list_exclude_groups = split(g:omni_syntax_group_exclude_{filetype}, ',')
-            if syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =~ '\w' 
-                let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} = 
-                            \ substitute( syntax_group_exclude_{filetype}, 
+            if syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =~ '\w'
+                let syntax_group_exclude_{filetype} =
+                            \ substitute( syntax_group_exclude_{filetype},
                            \ '\s*,\s*', '\\|', 'g'
                            \ )
            endif
@@ -278,14 +321,14 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
    while ftindex > -1
        let ft_part_name = matchstr( &filetype, '\w\+', ftindex )

-        " Syntax rules can contain items for more than just the current 
+        " Syntax rules can contain items for more than just the current
        " filetype.  They can contain additional items added by the user
        " via autocmds or their vimrc.
        " Some syntax files can be combined (html, php, jsp).
        " We want only items that begin with the filetype we are interested in.
        let next_group_regex = '\n' .
                    \ '\zs'.ft_part_name.'\w\+\ze'.
-                    \ '\s\+xxx\s\+' 
+                    \ '\s\+xxx\s\+'
        let index    = 0
        let index    = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)

@@ -299,11 +342,11 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
            "     syn keyword {syntax_filename}Keyword  values ...
            "     let b:current_syntax = "mysql"
            " So, we will make the format of finding the syntax group names
-            " a bit more flexible and look for both if the first fails to 
+            " a bit more flexible and look for both if the first fails to
            " find a match.
            let next_group_regex = '\n' .
                        \ '\zs'.b:current_syntax.'\w\+\ze'.
-                        \ '\s\+xxx\s\+' 
+                        \ '\s\+xxx\s\+'
            let index    = 0
            let index    = match(syntax_full, next_group_regex, index)
        endif
@@ -317,9 +360,9 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
                    let get_syn_list = 0
                endif
            endfor
-        
+
            " This code is no longer needed in version 6.0 since we have
-            " augmented the syntax list command to only retrieve the syntax 
+            " augmented the syntax list command to only retrieve the syntax
            " groups we are interested in.
            "
            " if get_syn_list == 1
@@ -331,7 +374,7 @@ function! OmniSyntaxList(...)
            " endif

            if get_syn_list == 1
-                " Pass in the full syntax listing, plus the group name we 
+                " Pass in the full syntax listing, plus the group name we
                " are interested in.
                let extra_syn_list = s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems(group_name, syntax_full)
                let syn_list = syn_list . extra_syn_list . "\n"
@@ -385,7 +428,7 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )
    "     \|           - 2nd potential match
    "     \%$          - matches end of the file or string
    "     \)           - end a group
-    let syntax_group = matchstr(a:syntax_full, 
+    let syntax_group = matchstr(a:syntax_full,
                \ "\n".a:group_name.'\s\+xxx\s\+\zs.\{-}\ze\(\n\w\|\%$\)'
                \ )

@@ -395,26 +438,42 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )

        " We only want the words for the lines begining with
        " containedin, but there could be other items.
-        
+
        " Tried to remove all lines that do not begin with contained
        " but this does not work in all cases since you can have
        "    contained nextgroup=...
        " So this will strip off the ending of lines with known
        " keywords.
-        let syn_list = substitute( 
+        let syn_list = substitute(
                    \    syntax_group, '\<\('.
                    \    substitute(
                    \      escape(s:syn_remove_words, '\\/.*$^~[]')
                    \      , ',', '\\|', 'g'
                    \    ).
                    \    '\).\{-}\%($\|'."\n".'\)'
-                    \    , "\n", 'g' 
+                    \    , "\n", 'g'
                    \  )

-        " Now strip off the newline + blank space + contained
-        let syn_list = substitute( 
-                    \    syn_list, '\%(^\|\n\)\@<=\s*\<\(contained\)'
-                    \    , "", 'g' 
+        " Now strip off the newline + blank space + contained.
+        " Also include lines with nextgroup=@someName skip_key_words syntax_element
+        let syn_list = substitute(
+                    \    syn_list, '\%(^\|\n\)\@<=\s*\<\(contained\|nextgroup=\)'
+                    \    , "", 'g'
+                    \ )
+
+        " This can leave lines like this
+        "     =@vimMenuList  skipwhite onoremenu
+        " Strip the special option keywords first
+        "     :h :syn-skipwhite*
+        let syn_list = substitute(
+                    \    syn_list, '\<\(skipwhite\|skipnl\|skipempty\)\>'
+                    \    , "", 'g'
+                    \ )
+
+        " Now remove the remainder of the nextgroup=@someName lines
+        let syn_list = substitute(
+                    \    syn_list, '\%(^\|\n\)\@<=\s*\(@\w\+\)'
+                    \    , "", 'g'
                    \ )

        if b:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword == 0
@@ -423,19 +482,74 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )
            " This will replace non-word characters with spaces.
            let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '[^0-9A-Za-z_ ]', ' ', 'g' )
        else
-            let accept_chars = ','.&iskeyword.','
-            " Remove all character ranges
-            " let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',[^,]\+-[^,]\+,', ',', 'g')
-            let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\@<=[^,]\+-[^,]\+,', '', 'g')
-            " Remove all numeric specifications
-            " let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\d\{-},', ',', 'g')
-            let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\@<=\d\{-},', '', 'g')
-            " Remove all commas
-            let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',', '', 'g')
-            " Escape special regex characters
-            let accept_chars = escape(accept_chars, '\\/.*$^~[]' )
-            " Remove all characters that are not acceptable
-            let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '[^0-9A-Za-z_ '.accept_chars.']', ' ', 'g' )
+            if g:omni_syntax_use_iskeyword_numeric == 1
+                " iskeyword can contain value like this
+                " 38,42,43,45,47-58,60-62,64-90,97-122,_,+,-,*,/,%,<,=,>,:,$,?,!,@-@,94
+                " Numeric values convert to their ASCII equivalent using the
+                " nr2char() function.
+                "     &       38
+                "     *       42
+                "     +       43
+                "     -       45
+                "     ^       94
+                " Iterate through all numeric specifications and convert those
+                " to their ascii equivalent ensuring the character is printable.
+                " If so, add it to the list.
+                let accepted_chars = ''
+                for item in split(&iskeyword, ',')
+                    if item =~ '-'
+                        " This is a character range (ie 47-58),
+                        " cycle through each character within the range
+                        let [b:start, b:end] = split(item, '-')
+                        for range_item in range( b:start, b:end )
+                            if range_item <= 127 || g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte == 0
+                                if nr2char(range_item) =~ '\p'
+                                    let accepted_chars = accepted_chars . nr2char(range_item)
+                                endif
+                            endif
+                        endfor
+                    elseif item =~ '^\d\+$'
+                        " Only numeric, translate to a character
+                        if item < 127 || g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte == 0
+                            if nr2char(item) =~ '\p'
+                                let accepted_chars = accepted_chars . nr2char(item)
+                            endif
+                        endif
+                    else
+                        if char2nr(item) < 127 || g:omni_syntax_use_single_byte == 0
+                            if item =~ '\p'
+                                let accepted_chars = accepted_chars . item
+                            endif
+                        endif
+                    endif
+                endfor
+                " Escape special regex characters
+                " Looks like the wrong chars are escaped.  In a collection,
+                "      :h /[]
+                "      only `]', `\', `-' and `^' are special:
+                " let accepted_chars = escape(accepted_chars, '\\/.*$^~[]' )
+                let accepted_chars = escape(accepted_chars, ']\-^' )
+                " Remove all characters that are not acceptable
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '[^A-Za-z'.accepted_chars.']', ' ', 'g' )
+            else
+                let accept_chars = ','.&iskeyword.','
+                " Remove all character ranges
+                " let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',[^,]\+-[^,]\+,', ',', 'g')
+                let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\@<=[^,]\+-[^,]\+,', '', 'g')
+                " Remove all numeric specifications
+                " let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\d\{-},', ',', 'g')
+                let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',\@<=\d\{-},', '', 'g')
+                " Remove all commas
+                let accept_chars = substitute(accept_chars, ',', '', 'g')
+                " Escape special regex characters
+                " Looks like the wrong chars are escaped.  In a collection,
+                "      :h /[]
+                "      only `]', `\', `-' and `^' are special:
+                " let accept_chars = escape(accept_chars, '\\/.*$^~[]' )
+                let accept_chars = escape(accept_chars, ']\-^' )
+                " Remove all characters that are not acceptable
+                let syn_list = substitute( syn_list, '[^0-9A-Za-z_'.accept_chars.']', ' ', 'g' )
+            endif
        endif

        if b:omni_syntax_minimum_length > 0
@@ -448,3 +562,27 @@ function! s:SyntaxCSyntaxGroupItems( group_name, syntax_full )

    return syn_list
 endfunction
+
+function! OmniSyntaxShowChars(spec)
+  let result = []
+  for item in split(a:spec, ',')
+    if len(item) > 1
+      if item == '@-@'
+        call add(result, char2nr(item))
+      else
+        call extend(result, call('range', split(item, '-')))
+      endif
+    else
+      if item == '@'  " assume this is [A-Za-z]
+        for [c1, c2] in [['A', 'Z'], ['a', 'z']]
+          call extend(result, range(char2nr(c1), char2nr(c2)))
+        endfor
+      else
+        call add(result, char2nr(item))
+      endif
+    endif
+  endfor
+  return join(map(result, 'nr2char(v:val)'), ', ')
+endfunction
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
--- a/runtime/autoload/tar.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/tar.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " tar.vim: Handles browsing tarfiles
 "            AUTOLOAD PORTION
-" Date:			May 31, 2011
-" Version:		27
+" Date:			Jan 17, 2012
+" Version:		28
 " Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell, Jr <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM-NOSPAM>
 " License:		Vim License  (see vim's :help license)
 "
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
 if &cp || exists("g:loaded_tar")
 finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_tar= "v27"
+let g:loaded_tar= "v28"
 if v:version < 702
 echohl WarningMsg
 echo "***warning*** this version of tar needs vim 7.2"
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ fun! tar#Browse(tarfile)
  call setline(lastline+2,'" Browsing tarfile '.a:tarfile)
  call setline(lastline+3,'" Select a file with cursor and press ENTER')
  keepj $put =''
-  keepj 0d
+  keepj sil! 0d
  keepj $

  let tarfile= a:tarfile
@@ -158,10 +158,10 @@ fun! tar#Browse(tarfile)
  elseif tarfile =~# '\.lrp'
 "   call Decho("2: exe silent r! cat -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)."|gzip -d -c -|".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - ")
   exe "sil! r! cat -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)."|gzip -d -c -|".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - "
-  elseif tarfile =~# '\.bz2$'
+  elseif tarfile =~# '\.\(bz2\|tbz\|tb2\)$'
 "   call Decho("3: exe silent r! bzip2 -d -c -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - ")
   exe "sil! r! bzip2 -d -c -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - "
-  elseif tarfile =~# '\.lzma$'
+  elseif tarfile =~# '\.\(lzma\|tlz\)$'
 "   call Decho("3: exe silent r! lzma -d -c -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - ")
   exe "sil! r! lzma -d -c -- ".shellescape(tarfile,1)." | ".g:tar_cmd." -".g:tar_browseoptions." - "
  elseif tarfile =~# '\.\(xz\|txz\)$'
--- a/runtime/autoload/tohtml.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/tohtml.vim
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim autoload file for the tohtml plugin.
 " Maintainer: Ben Fritz <fritzophrenic@gmail.com>
-" Last Change: 2011 Apr 05
+" Last Change: 2012 Jun 30
 "
 " Additional contributors:
 "
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@

 " this file uses line continuations
 let s:cpo_sav = &cpo
-set cpo-=C
+set cpo&vim

 " Automatically find charsets from all encodings supported natively by Vim. With
 " the 8bit- and 2byte- prefixes, Vim can actually support more encodings than
@@ -391,12 +391,25 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
  call add(html, '<meta name="plugin-version" content="'.g:loaded_2html_plugin.'"'.tag_close)
  call add(html, '<meta name="settings" content="'.
 	\ join(filter(keys(s:settings),'s:settings[v:val]'),',').
+	\ ',prevent_copy='.s:settings.prevent_copy.
 	\ '"'.tag_close)
+  call add(html, '<meta name="colorscheme" content="'.
+	\ (exists('g:colors_name')
+	\ ? g:colors_name
+	\ : 'none'). '"'.tag_close)

  call add(html, '</head>')
  let body_line_num = len(html)
-  call add(html, '<body>')
-  call add(html, '<table border="1" width="100%">')
+  if !empty(s:settings.prevent_copy)
+    call add(html, "<body onload='FixCharWidth();'>")
+    call add(html, "<!-- hidden divs used by javascript to get the width of a char -->")
+    call add(html, "<div id='oneCharWidth'>0</div>")
+    call add(html, "<div id='oneInputWidth'><input size='1' value='0'".tag_close."</div>")
+    call add(html, "<div id='oneEmWidth' style='width: 1em;'></div>")
+  else
+    call add(html, '<body>')
+  endif
+  call add(html, "<table border='1' width='100%' id='vimCodeElement'>")

  call add(html, '<tr>')
  for buf in a:win_list
@@ -454,16 +467,19 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
      let insert_index = diff_style_start
    endif

-    " Delete those parts that are not needed so
-    " we can include the rest into the resulting table
-    1,/^<body/d_
+    " Delete those parts that are not needed so we can include the rest into the
+    " resulting table.
+    1,/^<body.*\%(\n<!--.*-->\_s\+.*id='oneCharWidth'.*\_s\+.*id='oneInputWidth'.*\_s\+.*id='oneEmWidth'\)\?\zs/d_
    $
    ?</body>?,$d_
    let temp = getline(1,'$')
+    " clean out id on the main content container because we already set it on
+    " the table
+    let temp[0] = substitute(temp[0], " id='vimCodeElement'", "", "")
    " undo deletion of start and end part
    " so we can later save the file as valid html
    " TODO: restore using grabbed lines if undolevel is 1?
-    normal 2u
+    normal! 2u
    if s:settings.use_css
      call add(html, '<td valign="top"><div>')
    elseif s:settings.use_xhtml
@@ -520,12 +536,47 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
    1
    let style_start = search('^</head>')-1

+    " add required javascript in reverse order so we can just call append again
+    " and again without adjusting {{{
+
+    " insert script closing tag if any javascript is needed
+    if s:settings.dynamic_folds || !empty(s:settings.prevent_copy)
+      call append(style_start, [
+	    \ '',
+	    \ s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//]]>' : '-->',
+	    \ "</script>"
+	    \ ])
+    endif
+
+    " insert script which corrects the size of small input elements in
+    " prevent_copy mode. See 2html.vim for details on why this is needed and how
+    " it works.
+    if !empty(s:settings.prevent_copy)
+      call append(style_start, [
+	    \ '',
+	    \ '/* simulate a "ch" unit by asking the browser how big a zero character is */',
+	    \ 'function FixCharWidth() {',
+	    \ '  /* get the hidden element which gives the width of a single character */',
+	    \ '  var goodWidth = document.getElementById("oneCharWidth").clientWidth;',
+	    \ '  /* get all input elements, we''ll filter on class later */',
+	    \ '  var inputTags = document.getElementsByTagName("input");',
+	    \ '  var ratio = 5;',
+	    \ '  var inputWidth = document.getElementById("oneInputWidth").clientWidth;',
+	    \ '  var emWidth = document.getElementById("oneEmWidth").clientWidth;',
+	    \ '  if (inputWidth > goodWidth) {',
+	    \ '    while (ratio < 100*goodWidth/emWidth && ratio < 100) {',
+	    \ '    ratio += 5;',
+	    \ '  }',
+	    \ '  document.getElementById("vimCodeElement").className = "em"+ratio;',
+	    \ '  }',
+	    \ '}'
+	    \ ])
+    endif
+
    " Insert javascript to toggle matching folds open and closed in all windows,
-    " if dynamic folding is active. {{{
+    " if dynamic folding is active.
    if s:settings.dynamic_folds
      call append(style_start, [
-	    \  "<script type='text/javascript'>",
-	    \  s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//<![CDATA[' : "  <!--",
 	    \  "  function toggleFold(objID)",
 	    \  "  {",
 	    \  "    for (win_num = 1; win_num <= ".len(a:buf_list)."; win_num++)",
@@ -542,9 +593,14 @@ func! tohtml#Diff2HTML(win_list, buf_list) "{{{
 	    \  "      }",
 	    \  "    }",
 	    \  "  }",
-	    \  s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//]]>' : "  -->",
-	    \  "</script>"
 	    \ ])
+    endif
+
+    " insert script tag if any javascript is needed
+    if s:settings.dynamic_folds || s:settings.prevent_copy != ""
+      call append(style_start, [
+	    \ "<script type='text/javascript'>",
+	    \ s:settings.use_xhtml ? '//<![CDATA[' : "<!--"])
    endif "}}}

    " Insert styles from all the generated html documents and additional styles
@@ -609,9 +665,10 @@ func! tohtml#GetUserSettings() "{{{
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings, 'ignore_conceal', 0 )
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings, 'ignore_folding', 0 )
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,  'dynamic_folds', 0 )
-    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,  'no_foldcolumn', 0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,  'no_foldcolumn', user_settings.ignore_folding)
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,   'hover_unfold', 0 )
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,         'no_pre', 0 )
+    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,     'no_invalid', 0 )
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,   'whole_filler', 0 )
    call tohtml#GetOption(user_settings,      'use_xhtml', 0 )
    " }}}
@@ -637,6 +694,8 @@ func! tohtml#GetUserSettings() "{{{
    " dynamic folding implies css
    if user_settings.dynamic_folds
      let user_settings.use_css = 1
+    else
+      let user_settings.no_foldcolumn = 1 " won't do anything but for consistency and for the test suite
    endif

    " if we're not using CSS we cannot use a pre section because <font> tags
@@ -663,6 +722,7 @@ func! tohtml#GetUserSettings() "{{{
    endif
    " }}}

+    " textual options
    if exists("g:html_use_encoding") "{{{
      " user specified the desired MIME charset, figure out proper
      " 'fileencoding' from it or warn the user if we cannot
@@ -705,6 +765,45 @@ func! tohtml#GetUserSettings() "{{{
      endif
    endif "}}}

+    " Default to making nothing uncopyable, because we default to
+    " not-standards way of doing things, and also because Microsoft Word and
+    " others paste the <input> elements anyway.
+    "
+    " html_prevent_copy only has an effect when using CSS.
+    "
+    " All options:
+    "	  f - fold column
+    "	  n - line numbers (also within fold text)
+    "	  t - fold text
+    "	  d - diff filler
+    "	  c - concealed text (reserved future)
+    "	  l - listchars (reserved possible future)
+    "	  s - signs (reserved possible future)
+    "
+    " Normal text is always selectable.
+    let user_settings.prevent_copy = ""
+    if user_settings.use_css
+      if exists("g:html_prevent_copy")
+	if user_settings.dynamic_folds && !user_settings.no_foldcolumn && g:html_prevent_copy =~# 'f'
+	  let user_settings.prevent_copy .= 'f'
+	endif
+	if user_settings.number_lines && g:html_prevent_copy =~# 'n'
+	  let user_settings.prevent_copy .= 'n'
+	endif
+	if &diff && g:html_prevent_copy =~# 'd'
+	  let user_settings.prevent_copy .= 'd'
+	endif
+	if !user_settings.ignore_folding && g:html_prevent_copy =~# 't'
+	  let user_settings.prevent_copy .= 't'
+	endif
+      else
+	let user_settings.prevent_copy = ""
+      endif
+    endif
+    if empty(user_settings.prevent_copy)
+      let user_settings.no_invalid = 0
+    endif
+
    " TODO: font

    return user_settings
--- a/runtime/autoload/vimball.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/vimball.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " vimball.vim : construct a file containing both paths and files
 " Author:	Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
-" Date:		Apr 02, 2011
-" Version:	33
+" Date:		Jan 17, 2012
+" Version:	35
 " GetLatestVimScripts: 1502 1 :AutoInstall: vimball.vim
 " Copyright: (c) 2004-2011 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
 "            The VIM LICENSE applies to Vimball.vim, and Vimball.txt
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
 if &cp || exists("g:loaded_vimball")
 finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_vimball = "v33"
+let g:loaded_vimball = "v35"
 if v:version < 702
 echohl WarningMsg
 echo "***warning*** this version of vimball needs vim 7.2"
@@ -220,7 +220,16 @@ fun! vimball#Vimball(really,...)

  " go to vim plugin home
  if a:0 > 0
+   " let user specify the directory where the vimball is to be unpacked.
+   " If, however, the user did not specify a full path, set the home to be below the current directory
   let home= expand(a:1)
+   if has("win32") || has("win95") || has("win64") || has("win16")
+	if home !~ '^\a:[/\\]'
+	 let home= getcwd().'/'.a:1
+	endif
+   elseif home !~ '^/'
+	let home= getcwd().'/'.a:1
+   endif
  else
   let home= vimball#VimballHome()
  endif
@@ -282,11 +291,14 @@ fun! vimball#Vimball(really,...)
 "    call Decho("making directories if they don't exist yet (fname<".fname.">)")
    let fnamebuf= substitute(fname,'\\','/','g')
 	let dirpath = substitute(home,'\\','/','g')
+"	call Decho("init: fnamebuf<".fnamebuf.">")
+"	call Decho("init: dirpath <".dirpath.">")
    while fnamebuf =~ '/'
     let dirname  = dirpath."/".substitute(fnamebuf,'/.*$','','')
 	 let dirpath  = dirname
     let fnamebuf = substitute(fnamebuf,'^.\{-}/\(.*\)$','\1','')
 "	 call Decho("dirname<".dirname.">")
+"	 call Decho("dirpath<".dirpath.">")
     if !isdirectory(dirname)
 "      call Decho("making <".dirname.">")
      if exists("g:vimball_mkdir")
@@ -569,9 +581,19 @@ endfun
 fun! s:ChgDir(newdir)
 "  call Dfunc("ChgDir(newdir<".a:newdir.">)")
  if (has("win32") || has("win95") || has("win64") || has("win16"))
-   exe 'silent cd '.fnameescape(substitute(a:newdir,'/','\\','g'))
+   try
+    exe 'silent cd '.fnameescape(substitute(a:newdir,'/','\\','g'))
+   catch  /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E/
+    call mkdir(fnameescape(substitute(a:newdir,'/','\\','g')))
+    exe 'silent cd '.fnameescape(substitute(a:newdir,'/','\\','g'))
+   endtry
  else
-   exe 'silent cd '.fnameescape(a:newdir)
+   try
+    exe 'silent cd '.fnameescape(a:newdir)
+   catch  /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E/
+    call mkdir(fnameescape(a:newdir))
+    exe 'silent cd '.fnameescape(a:newdir)
+   endtry
  endif
 "  call Dret("ChgDir : curdir<".getcwd().">")
 endfun
@@ -745,6 +767,9 @@ fun! vimball#RestoreSettings()
 "  call Dret("RestoreSettings")
 endfun

+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 " Modelines: {{{1
 " vim: fdm=marker
--- a/runtime/autoload/zip.vim
+++ b/runtime/autoload/zip.vim
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
 " zip.vim: Handles browsing zipfiles
 "            AUTOLOAD PORTION
-" Date:		May 24, 2011
-" Version:	24
+" Date:		Jan 17, 2012
+" Version:	25
 " Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell, Jr <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM-NOSPAM>
 " License:	Vim License  (see vim's :help license)
-" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 2005-2011 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
+" Copyright:    Copyright (C) 2005-2012 Charles E. Campbell, Jr. {{{1
 "               Permission is hereby granted to use and distribute this code,
 "               with or without modifications, provided that this copyright
 "               notice is copied with it. Like anything else that's free,
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
 if &cp || exists("g:loaded_zip")
 finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_zip= "v24"
+let g:loaded_zip= "v25"
 if v:version < 702
 echohl WarningMsg
 echo "***warning*** this version of zip needs vim 7.2"
@@ -104,12 +104,12 @@ fun! zip#Browse(zipfile)

  " give header
  call append(0, ['" zip.vim version '.g:loaded_zip,
-                \ '" Browsing zipfile '.a:zipfile,
-                \ '" Select a file with cursor and press ENTER'])
+ \                '" Browsing zipfile '.a:zipfile,
+ \                '" Select a file with cursor and press ENTER'])
  keepj $

 "  call Decho("exe silent r! ".g:zip_unzipcmd." -l -- ".s:Escape(a:zipfile,1))
-  exe "silent r! ".g:zip_unzipcmd." -Z -1 -- ".s:Escape(a:zipfile,1)
+  exe "keepj sil! r! ".g:zip_unzipcmd." -Z -1 -- ".s:Escape(a:zipfile,1)
  if v:shell_error != 0
   redraw!
   echohl WarningMsg | echo "***warning*** (zip#Browse) ".fnameescape(a:zipfile)." is not a zip file" | echohl None
--- a/runtime/compiler/cs.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/cs.vim
@@ -2,12 +2,14 @@
 " Compiler:	Microsoft Visual Studio C#
 " Maintainer:	Zhou YiChao (broken.zhou@gmail.com)
 " Previous Maintainer:	Joseph H. Yao (hyao@sina.com)
-" Last Change:	2011 Apr 21
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "cs"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat+=%f(%l\\,%v):\ %t%*[^:]:\ %m,
            \%tarning%*[^:]:\ %m

 CompilerSet makeprg=csc\ %
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/decada.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/decada.vim
@@ -15,11 +15,11 @@
 "    Help Page: compiler-decada
 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-if (exists("current_compiler")	    &&
-   \ current_compiler == "decada")  ||
-   \ version < 700
+if (exists("current_compiler") && current_compiler == "decada") || version < 700
   finish
 endif
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 let current_compiler = "decada"

@@ -44,6 +44,9 @@ endif
 execute "CompilerSet makeprg="     . escape (g:decada.Make_Command, ' ')
 execute "CompilerSet errorformat=" . escape (g:decada.Error_Format, ' ')

+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 finish " 1}}}

 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- a/runtime/compiler/erlang.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/erlang.vim
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim compiler file
+" Compiler:     Erlang
+" Maintainer:	Dmitry Vasiliev <dima at hlabs dot org>
+" Last Change:	2012-02-13
+
+if exists("current_compiler")
+  finish
+endif
+let current_compiler = "erlang"
+
+CompilerSet makeprg=erlc\ -Wall\ %
+
+CompilerSet errorformat=%f:%l:\ %m
--- a/runtime/compiler/g95.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/g95.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Compiler: G95
 " Maintainer: H Xu <xuhdev@gmail.com>
 " Version: 0.1.3
-" Last Change: 2011 Apr 01
+" Last Change: 2012 Apr 30
 " Homepage: http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=3492
 "           https://bitbucket.org/xuhdev/compiler-g95.vim
 " License: Same as Vim
@@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ if exists('current_compiler')
    finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = 'g95'
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -21,3 +23,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=
            \%-Z%trror:\ %m,
            \%-Z%tarning\ (%n):\ %m,
            \%-C%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/gcc.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/gcc.vim
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ endif
 let current_compiler = "gcc"

 let s:cpo_save = &cpo
-set cpo-=C
+set cpo&vim

 CompilerSet errorformat=
      \%*[^\"]\"%f\"%*\\D%l:%c:\ %m,
--- a/runtime/compiler/gfortran.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/gfortran.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Compiler: GNU Fortran Compiler
 " Maintainer: H Xu <xuhdev@gmail.com>
 " Version: 0.1.3
-" Last Change: 19 March 2011
+" Last Change: 2012 Apr 30
 " Homepage: http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=3496
 "           https://bitbucket.org/xuhdev/compiler-gfortran.vim
 " License: Same as Vim
@@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ if exists('current_compiler')
    finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = 'gfortran'
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -20,3 +22,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=
            \%-Z%trror:\ %m,
            \%-Z%tarning:\ %m,
            \%-C%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/gnat.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/gnat.vim
@@ -17,11 +17,11 @@
 "    Help Page: compiler-gnat
 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-if (exists("current_compiler")	    &&
-   \ current_compiler == "gnat")    ||
-   \ version < 700
+if (exists("current_compiler")&& current_compiler == "gnat") || version < 700
   finish
 endif
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 let current_compiler = "gnat"

@@ -62,6 +62,9 @@ endif
 execute "CompilerSet makeprg="     . escape (g:gnat.Get_Command('Make'), ' ')
 execute "CompilerSet errorformat=" . escape (g:gnat.Error_Format, ' ')

+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 finish " 1}}}

 "------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- a/runtime/compiler/hp_acc.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/hp_acc.vim
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Compiler:	HP aCC
 " Maintainer:	Matthias Ulrich <matthias-ulrich@web.de>
 " URL:          http://www.subhome.de/vim/hp_acc.vim
-" Last Change:	2005 Nov 19
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30
 "
 "  aCC --version says: "HP ANSI C++ B3910B A.03.13"
 "  This compiler has been tested on:
@@ -19,6 +19,8 @@ if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "hp_acc"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -30,4 +32,7 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%A%trror\ %n\:\ \"%f\"\\,\ line\ %l\ \#\ %m,
         \%Z\ \ \ \ %p^%.%#,
         \%-C%.%#

+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
+
 " vim:ts=8:sw=4:cindent
--- a/runtime/compiler/ifort.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/ifort.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Compiler: Intel Fortran Compiler
 " Maintainer: H Xu <xuhdev@gmail.com>
 " Version: 0.1.1
-" Last Change: 19 March 2011
+" Last Change: 2012 Apr 30
 " Homepage: http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=3497
 "           https://bitbucket.org/xuhdev/compiler-ifort.vim
 " License: Same as Vim
@@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ if exists('current_compiler')
    finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = 'ifort'
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -20,3 +22,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=
            \%A%f(%l):\ %tarning\ \#%n:\ %m,
            \%-Z%p^,
            \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/intel.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/intel.vim
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:     Intel C++ 7.1
 " Maintainer:   David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:  2004 May 16
+" Last Change:  2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "intel"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%E%f(%l):\ error:\ %m,
 		    \%-Z\ \ %p^,
 		    \%-G\\s%#,
 		    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/irix5_c.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/irix5_c.vim
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 5.3 cc
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "irix5_c"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=\%Ecfe:\ Error:\ %f\\,\ line\ %l:\ %m,
 		     \%-Z\ %p^,
 		     \-G\\s%#,
 		     \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/irix5_cpp.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/irix5_cpp.vim
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 5.3 CC or NCC
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "irix5_cpp"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%E\"%f\"\\,\ line\ %l:\ error(%n):\ ,
 		      \%-Z\ \ %p%^,
 		      \%+C\ %\\{10}%.%#,
 		      \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/mcs.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/mcs.vim
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:    Mono C# Compiler
 " Maintainer:  Jarek Sobiecki <harijari@go2.pl>
-" Latest Revision: 2006-06-18
+" Last Updated By: Peter Collingbourne
+" Latest Revision: 2012 Jul 19

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
@@ -12,13 +13,18 @@ let s:cpo_save = &cpo
 set cpo-=C

 setlocal errorformat=
+         \%D%.%#Project\ \"%f/%[%^/\"]%#\"%.%#,
+         \%X%.%#Done\ building\ project\ \"%f/%[%^/\"]%#\"%.%#,
+         \%-G%\\s%.%#,
+         \%E%f(%l):\ error\ CS%n:%m,
+         \%W%f(%l):\ warning\ CS%n:%m,
         \%E%f(%l\\,%c):\ error\ CS%n:%m,
         \%W%f(%l\\,%c):\ warning\ CS%n:%m,
         \%E%>syntax\ error\\,%m,%Z%f(%l\\,%c):\ error\ CS%n:%m,
         \%D%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Entering\ directory\ `%f',
         \%X%*\\a[%*\\d]:\ Leaving\ directory\ `%f',
         \%DMaking\ %*\\a\ in\ %f,
-         \%G-%.%#
+         \%-G%.%#

 let &cpo = s:cpo_save
 unlet s:cpo_save
--- a/runtime/compiler/mips_c.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/mips_c.vim
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 6.5 MIPS C (cc)
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "mips_c"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%Ecc\-%n\ %.%#:\ ERROR\ File\ =\ %f\%\\,\ Line\ =\ %l,
 		    \%-Z\ \ %p^,
 		    \%-G\\s%#,
 		    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/mipspro_c89.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/mipspro_c89.vim
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 6.5 MIPSPro C (c89)
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "mipspro_c89"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -20,3 +22,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%Ecc\-%n\ %.%#:\ ERROR\ File\ =\ %f\%\\,\ Line\ =\ %l,
 		    \%+C\ \ %m,
 		    \%-G\\s%#,
 		    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/mipspro_cpp.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/mipspro_cpp.vim
@@ -1,12 +1,14 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	SGI IRIX 6.5 MIPSPro C++ (CC)
 " Maintainer:	David Harrison <david_jr@users.sourceforge.net>
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
  finish
 endif
 let current_compiler = "mipspro_cpp"
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -19,3 +21,6 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%Ecc\-%n\ %.%#:\ ERROR\ File\ =\ %f\%\\,\ Line\ =\ %l,
 		    \%-Z\ \ %p^,
 		    \%-G\\s%#,
 		    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/compiler/rst.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/rst.vim
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ endif
 let current_compiler = "rst"

 let s:cpo_save = &cpo
-set cpo-=C
+set cpo&vim

 setlocal errorformat=
      \%f:%l:\ (%tEBUG/0)\ %m,
--- a/runtime/compiler/tex.vim
+++ b/runtime/compiler/tex.vim
@@ -1,11 +1,13 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:     TeX
 " Maintainer:   Artem Chuprina <ran@ran.pp.ru>
-" Last Change:  2004 Mar 27
+" Last Change:  2012 Apr 30

 if exists("current_compiler")
 	finish
 endif
+let s:keepcpo= &cpo
+set cpo&vim

 if exists(":CompilerSet") != 2		" older Vim always used :setlocal
  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
@@ -30,9 +32,6 @@ else
 	let current_compiler = 'make'
 endif

-let s:cpo_save = &cpo
-set cpo-=C
-
 " Value errorformat are taken from vim help, see :help errorformat-LaTeX, with
 " addition from Srinath Avadhanula <srinath@fastmail.fm>
 CompilerSet errorformat=%E!\ LaTeX\ %trror:\ %m,
@@ -64,5 +63,5 @@ CompilerSet errorformat=%E!\ LaTeX\ %trror:\ %m,
 	\%+Q%*[^()])%r,
 	\%+Q[%\\d%*[^()])%r

-let &cpo = s:cpo_save
-unlet s:cpo_save
+let &cpo = s:keepcpo
+unlet s:keepcpo
--- a/runtime/doc/autocmd.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/autocmd.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 19
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Sep 05


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ files matching *.c.  You can also use autocommands to implement advanced
 features, such as editing compressed files (see |gzip-example|).  The usual
 place to put autocommands is in your .vimrc or .exrc file.

-							*E203* *E204* *E143*
+						*E203* *E204* *E143* *E855*
 WARNING: Using autocommands is very powerful, and may lead to unexpected side
 effects.  Be careful not to destroy your text.
 - It's a good idea to do some testing on an expendable copy of a file first.
@@ -263,8 +263,10 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 	Startup and exit
 |VimEnter|		after doing all the startup stuff
 |GUIEnter|		after starting the GUI successfully
+|GUIFailed|		after starting the GUI failed
 |TermResponse|		after the terminal response to |t_RV| is received

+|QuitPre|			when using `:quit`, before deciding whether to quit
 |VimLeavePre|		before exiting Vim, before writing the viminfo file
 |VimLeave|		before exiting Vim, after writing the viminfo file

@@ -312,6 +314,7 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 |SessionLoadPost|	after loading a session file

 |MenuPopup|		just before showing the popup menu
+|CompleteDone|		after Insert mode completion is done

 |User|			to be used in combination with ":doautocmd"

@@ -385,6 +388,10 @@ BufRead or BufReadPost		When starting to edit a new buffer, after
 				This does NOT work for ":r file".  Not used
 				when the file doesn't exist.  Also used after
 				successfully recovering a file.
+				Also triggered for the filetypedetect group
+				when executing ":filetype detect" and when
+				writing an unnamed buffer in a way that the
+				buffer gets a name.
 							*BufReadCmd*
 BufReadCmd			Before starting to edit a new buffer.  Should
 				read the file into the buffer. |Cmd-event|
@@ -448,6 +455,9 @@ BufWriteCmd			Before writing the whole buffer to a file.
 				'modified' if successful, unless '+' is in
 				'cpo' and writing to another file |cpo-+|.
 				The buffer contents should not be changed.
+				When the command resets 'modified' the undo
+				information is adjusted to mark older undo
+				states as 'modified', like |:write| does.
 				|Cmd-event|
 							*BufWritePost*
 BufWritePost			After writing the whole buffer to a file
@@ -471,6 +481,11 @@ CmdwinLeave			Before leaving the command-line window.
 							*ColorScheme*
 ColorScheme			After loading a color scheme. |:colorscheme|

+							*CompleteDone*
+CompleteDone			After Insert mode completion is done.  Either
+				when something was completed or abandoning
+				completion. |ins-completion|
+
 							*CursorHold*
 CursorHold			When the user doesn't press a key for the time
 				specified with 'updatetime'.  Not re-triggered
@@ -508,6 +523,7 @@ CursorMoved			After the cursor was moved in Normal mode.
 				not expect or that is slow.
 							*CursorMovedI*
 CursorMovedI			After the cursor was moved in Insert mode.
+				Not triggered when the popup menu is visible.
 				Otherwise the same as CursorMoved.
 							*EncodingChanged*
 EncodingChanged			Fires off after the 'encoding' option has been
@@ -695,7 +711,10 @@ MenuPopup			Just before showing the popup menu (under the
 QuickFixCmdPre			Before a quickfix command is run (|:make|,
 				|:lmake|, |:grep|, |:lgrep|, |:grepadd|,
 				|:lgrepadd|, |:vimgrep|, |:lvimgrep|,
-				|:vimgrepadd|, |:lvimgrepadd|, |:cscope|).
+				|:vimgrepadd|, |:lvimgrepadd|, |:cscope|,
+				|:cfile|, |:cgetfile|, |:caddfile|, |:lfile|,
+				|:lgetfile|, |:laddfile|, |:helpgrep|,
+				|:lhelpgrep|).
 				The pattern is matched against the command
 				being run.  When |:grep| is used but 'grepprg'
 				is set to "internal" it still matches "grep".
@@ -706,7 +725,16 @@ QuickFixCmdPre			Before a quickfix command is run (|:make|,
 							*QuickFixCmdPost*
 QuickFixCmdPost			Like QuickFixCmdPre, but after a quickfix
 				command is run, before jumping to the first
-				location.  See |QuickFixCmdPost-example|.
+				location. For |:cfile| and |:lfile| commands
+				it is run after error file is read and before
+				moving to the first error. 
+				See |QuickFixCmdPost-example|.
+							*QuitPre*
+QuitPre				When using `:quit`, before deciding whether it
+				closes the current window or quits Vim.  Can
+				be used to close any non-essential window if
+				the current window is the last ordinary
+				window.
 							*RemoteReply*
 RemoteReply			When a reply from a Vim that functions as
 				server was received |server2client()|.  The
@@ -1048,7 +1076,7 @@ Note that the 'eventignore' option applies here too.  Events listed in this
 option will not cause any commands to be executed.

 					*:do* *:doau* *:doautocmd* *E217*
-:do[autocmd] [group] {event} [fname]
+:do[autocmd] [<nomodeline>] [group] {event} [fname]
 			Apply the autocommands matching [fname] (default:
 			current file name) for {event} to the current buffer.
 			You can use this when the current file name does not
@@ -1057,8 +1085,8 @@ option will not cause any commands to be executed.
 			It's possible to use this inside an autocommand too,
 			so you can base the autocommands for one extension on
 			another extension.  Example: >
-				:au Bufenter *.cpp so ~/.vimrc_cpp
-				:au Bufenter *.cpp doau BufEnter x.c
+				:au BufEnter *.cpp so ~/.vimrc_cpp
+				:au BufEnter *.cpp doau BufEnter x.c
 <			Be careful to avoid endless loops.  See
 			|autocmd-nested|.

@@ -1067,14 +1095,17 @@ option will not cause any commands to be executed.
 			argument is included, Vim executes only the matching
 			autocommands for that group.  Note: if you use an
 			undefined group name, Vim gives you an error message.
-
+							*<nomodeline>*
 			After applying the autocommands the modelines are
 			processed, so that their settings overrule the
 			settings from autocommands, like what happens when
-			editing a file.
+			editing a file. This is skipped when the <nomodeline>
+			argument is present. You probably want to use
+			<nomodeline> for events that are not used when loading
+			a buffer, such as |User|.

 						*:doautoa* *:doautoall*
-:doautoa[ll] [group] {event} [fname]
+:doautoa[ll] [<nomodeline>] [group] {event} [fname]
 			Like ":doautocmd", but apply the autocommands to each
 			loaded buffer.  Note that [fname] is used to select
 			the autocommands, not the buffers to which they are
--- a/runtime/doc/change.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/change.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jun 19
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 02


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ For inserting text see |insert.txt|.
 			"D" deletes the highlighted text plus all text until
 			the end of the line.  {not in Vi}

-						*:d* *:de* *:del* *:delete*
+					*:d* *:de* *:del* *:delete* *:dl*
 :[range]d[elete] [x]	Delete [range] lines (default: current line) [into
 			register x].

@@ -80,15 +80,16 @@ For inserting text see |insert.txt|.
 			(default: current line |cmdline-ranges|) [into
 			register x].

-These commands delete text.  You can repeat them with the "." command
-(except ":d") and undo them.  Use Visual mode to delete blocks of text.  See
+These commands delete text.  You can repeat them with the `.` command
+(except `:d`) and undo them.  Use Visual mode to delete blocks of text.  See
 |registers| for an explanation of registers.

 An exception for the d{motion} command: If the motion is not linewise, the
 start and end of the motion are not in the same line, and there are only
 blanks before the start and after the end of the motion, the delete becomes
 linewise.  This means that the delete also removes the line of blanks that you
-might expect to remain.
+might expect to remain. Use the |o_v| operator to force the motion to be
+characterwise.

 Trying to delete an empty region of text (e.g., "d0" in the first column)
 is an error when 'cpoptions' includes the 'E' flag.
@@ -131,7 +132,7 @@ gJ			Join [count] lines, with a minimum of two lines.
 			See |ex-flags| for [flags].

 These commands delete the <EOL> between lines.  This has the effect of joining
-multiple lines into one line.  You can repeat these commands (except ":j") and
+multiple lines into one line.  You can repeat these commands (except `:j`) and
 undo them.

 These commands, except "gJ", insert one space in place of the <EOL> unless
@@ -259,6 +260,12 @@ r{char}			Replace the character under the cursor with {char}.
 			<CR>.  CTRL-V <NL> replaces with a <Nul>.
 			{Vi: CTRL-V <CR> still replaces with a line break,
 			cannot replace something with a <CR>}
+
+			If {char} is CTRL-E or CTRL-Y the character from the
+			line below or above is used, just like with |i_CTRL-E|
+			and |i_CTRL-Y|.  This also works with a count, thus
+			`10r<C-E>` copies 10 characters from the line below.
+
 			If you give a [count], Vim replaces [count] characters
 			with [count] {char}s.  When {char} is a <CR> or <NL>,
 			however, Vim inserts only one <CR>: "5r<CR>" replaces
@@ -464,9 +471,9 @@ much as possible to make the indent.  You can use ">><<" to replace an indent
 made out of spaces with the same indent made out of <Tab>s (and a few spaces
 if necessary).  If the 'expandtab' option is on, Vim uses only spaces.  Then
 you can use ">><<" to replace <Tab>s in the indent by spaces (or use
-":retab!").
+`:retab!`).

-To move a line several 'shiftwidth's, use Visual mode or the ":" commands.
+To move a line several 'shiftwidth's, use Visual mode or the `:` commands.
 For example: >
 	Vjj4>		move three lines 4 indents to the right
 	:<<<		move current line 3 indents to the left
@@ -486,7 +493,7 @@ Examples of filters are "sort", which sorts lines alphabetically, and
 works like a filter; not all versions do).  The 'shell' option specifies the
 shell Vim uses to execute the filter command (See also the 'shelltype'
 option).  You can repeat filter commands with ".".  Vim does not recognize a
-comment (starting with '"') after the ":!" command.
+comment (starting with '"') after the `:!` command.

 							*!*
 !{motion}{filter}	Filter {motion} text lines through the external
@@ -573,34 +580,37 @@ For other systems the tmpnam() library function is used.
 			Repeat last :substitute with same search pattern and
 			substitute string, but without the same flags.  You
 			may add [flags], see |:s_flags|.
-			Note that after ":substitute" the '&' flag can't be
+			Note that after `:substitute` the '&' flag can't be
 			used, it's recognized as a pattern separator.
-			The space between ":substitute" and the 'c', 'g' and
+			The space between `:substitute` and the 'c', 'g' and
 			'r' flags isn't required, but in scripts it's a good
 			idea to keep it to avoid confusion.

 :[range]~[&][flags] [count]					*:~*
 			Repeat last substitute with same substitute string
 			but with last used search pattern.  This is like
-			":&r".  See |:s_flags| for [flags].
+			`:&r`.  See |:s_flags| for [flags].

 								*&*
-&			Synonym for ":s" (repeat last substitute).  Note
+&			Synonym for `:s` (repeat last substitute).  Note
 			that the flags are not remembered, thus it might
-			actually work differently.  You can use ":&&" to keep
+			actually work differently.  You can use `:&&` to keep
 			the flags.

 								*g&*
-g&			Synonym for ":%s//~/&" (repeat last substitute on all
-			lines with the same flags).
+g&			Synonym for `:%s//~/&` (repeat last substitute with
+			last search pattern on all lines with the same flags).
+			For exaple, when you first do a substitution with
+			`:s/pattern/repl/flags` and then `/search` for
+			something else, `g&` will do `:%s/search/repl/flags`.
 			Mnemonic: global substitute. {not in Vi}

 						*:snomagic* *:sno*
-:[range]sno[magic] ...	Same as ":substitute", but always use 'nomagic'.
+:[range]sno[magic] ...	Same as `:substitute`, but always use 'nomagic'.
 			{not in Vi}

 						*:smagic* *:sm*
-:[range]sm[agic] ...	Same as ":substitute", but always use 'magic'.
+:[range]sm[agic] ...	Same as `:substitute`, but always use 'magic'.
 			{not in Vi}

 							*:s_flags*
@@ -610,7 +620,7 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 	command.  Examples: >
 		:&&
 		:s/this/that/&
-<	Note that ":s" and ":&" don't keep the flags.
+<	Note that `:s` and `:&` don't keep the flags.
 	{not in Vi}

 [c]	Confirm each substitution.  Vim highlights the matching string (with
@@ -659,6 +669,8 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:
 [n]	Report the number of matches, do not actually substitute.  The [c]
 	flag is ignored.  The matches are reported as if 'report' is zero.
 	Useful to |count-items|.
+	If \= |sub-replace-expression| is used, the expression will be
+	evaluated in the |sandbox| at every match.

 [p]	Print the line containing the last substitute.

@@ -666,14 +678,14 @@ The flags that you can use for the substitute commands:

 [l]	Like [p] but print the text like |:list|.

-[r]	Only useful in combination with ":&" or ":s" without arguments.  ":&r"
-	works the same way as ":~":  When the search pattern is empty, use the
+[r]	Only useful in combination with `:&` or `:s` without arguments.  `:&r`
+	works the same way as `:~`:  When the search pattern is empty, use the
 	previously used search pattern instead of the search pattern from the
-	last substitute or ":global".  If the last command that did a search
-	was a substitute or ":global", there is no effect.  If the last
+	last substitute or `:global`.  If the last command that did a search
+	was a substitute or `:global`, there is no effect.  If the last
 	command was a search command such as "/", use the pattern from that
 	command.
-	For ":s" with an argument this already happens: >
+	For `:s` with an argument this already happens: >
 		:s/blue/red/
 		/green
 		:s//red/   or  :~   or  :&r
@@ -690,9 +702,9 @@ reason is that the flags can only be found by skipping the pattern, and in
 order to skip the pattern the "magicness" must be known.  Catch 22!

 If the {pattern} for the substitute command is empty, the command uses the
-pattern from the last substitute or ":global" command.  If there is none, but
+pattern from the last substitute or `:global` command.  If there is none, but
 there is a previous search pattern, that one is used.  With the [r] flag, the
-command uses the pattern from the last substitute, ":global", or search
+command uses the pattern from the last substitute, `:global`, or search
 command.

 If the {string} is omitted the substitute is done as if it's empty.  Thus the
@@ -847,7 +859,7 @@ This replaces each 'E' character with a euro sign.  Read more in |<Char->|.


 4.4 Changing tabs					*change-tabs*
-							*:ret* *:retab*
+							*:ret* *:retab* *:retab!*
 :[range]ret[ab][!] [new_tabstop]
 			Replace all sequences of white-space containing a
 			<Tab> with new strings of white-space using the new
@@ -866,7 +878,7 @@ This replaces each 'E' character with a euro sign.  Read more in |<Char->|.
 			Careful: This command modifies any <Tab> characters
 			inside of strings in a C program.  Use "\t" to avoid
 			this (that's a good habit anyway).
-			":retab!" may also change a sequence of spaces by
+			`:retab!` may also change a sequence of spaces by
 			<Tab> characters, which can mess up a printf().
 			{not in Vi}
 			Not available when |+ex_extra| feature was disabled at
@@ -976,8 +988,12 @@ inside of strings can change!  Also see 'softtabstop' option. >
 			current line).  This always works |linewise|, thus
 			this command can be used to put a yanked block as new
 			lines.
-			The cursor is left on the first non-blank in the last
-			new line.
+			If no register is specified, it depends on the 'cb'
+			option: If 'cb' contains "unnamedplus", paste from the
+			+ register |quoteplus|.  Otherwise, if 'cb' contains
+			"unnamed", paste from the * register |quotestar|.
+			Otherwise, paste from the unnamed register
+			|quote_quote|.
 			The register can also be '=' followed by an optional
 			expression.  The expression continues until the end of
 			the command.  You need to escape the '|' and '"'
@@ -1182,7 +1198,7 @@ nothing is returned.  {not in Vi}

 9. Last search pattern register	"/			*quote_/* *quote/*
 Contains the most recent search-pattern.  This is used for "n" and 'hlsearch'.
-It is writable with ":let", you can change it to have 'hlsearch' highlight
+It is writable with `:let`, you can change it to have 'hlsearch' highlight
 other matches without actually searching.  You can't yank or delete into this
 register.  The search direction is available in |v:searchforward|.
 Note that the valued is restored when returning from a function
@@ -1190,12 +1206,12 @@ Note that the valued is restored when returning from a function
 {not in Vi}

 							*@/*
-You can write to a register with a ":let" command |:let-@|.  Example: >
+You can write to a register with a `:let` command |:let-@|.  Example: >
 	:let @/ = "the"

 If you use a put command without specifying a register, Vim uses the register
 that was last filled (this is also the contents of the unnamed register).  If
-you are confused, use the ":dis" command to find out what Vim will put (this
+you are confused, use the `:dis` command to find out what Vim will put (this
 command displays all named and numbered registers; the unnamed register is
 labelled '"').

@@ -1491,6 +1507,7 @@ n	When formatting text, recognize numbered lists.  This actually uses
 			first line of a paragraph
 		second line of the same paragraph
 		third line.
+<	This also works inside comments, ignoring the comment leader.
 v	Vi-compatible auto-wrapping in insert mode: Only break a line at a
 	blank that you have entered during the current insert command.  (Note:
 	this is not 100% Vi compatible.  Vi has some "unexpected features" or
@@ -1511,6 +1528,12 @@ B	When joining lines, don't insert a space between two multi-byte
 	characters.  Overruled by the 'M' flag.
 1	Don't break a line after a one-letter word.  It's broken before it
 	instead (if possible).
+j	Where it makes sense, remove a comment leader when joining lines.  For
+	example, joining:
+		int i;   // the index ~
+		         // in the list ~
+	Becomes:
+		int i;   // the index in the list ~


 With 't' and 'c' you can specify when Vim performs auto-wrapping:
@@ -1554,7 +1577,7 @@ Some examples:
 	:set fo=tcrq
 <

-Automatic formatting					*auto-format*
+Automatic formatting				*auto-format* *autoformat*

 When the 'a' flag is present in 'formatoptions' text is formatted
 automatically when inserting text or deleting text.  This works nice for
@@ -1663,7 +1686,7 @@ found here: |sort()|.
 			last search pattern is used.  This allows trying out
 			a pattern first.

-Note that using ":sort" with ":global" doesn't sort the matching lines, it's
+Note that using `:sort` with `:global` doesn't sort the matching lines, it's
 quite useless.

 The details about sorting depend on the library function used.  There is no
--- a/runtime/doc/cmdline.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/cmdline.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Mar 27
+*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Oct 11


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ CTRL-\ e {expr}						*c_CTRL-\_e*
 			   :return cmd
 			:endfunc
 <		This doesn't work recursively, thus not when already editing
-		an expression.
+		an expression.  But it is possible to use in a mapping.

 							*c_CTRL-Y*
 CTRL-Y		When there is a modeless selection, copy the selection into
@@ -330,12 +330,12 @@ terminals)

 :his[tory] [{name}] [{first}][, [{last}]]
 		List the contents of history {name} which can be:
-		c[md]	 or :	command-line history
-		s[earch] or /	search string history
-		e[xpr]	 or =	expression register history
-		i[nput]	 or @	input line history
-		d[ebug]	 or >	debug command history
-		a[ll]		all of the above
+		c[md]	 or :		command-line history
+		s[earch] or / or ?	search string history
+		e[xpr]	 or =		expression register history
+		i[nput]	 or @		input line history
+		d[ebug]	 or >		debug command history
+		a[ll]			all of the above
 		{not in Vi}

 		If the numbers {first} and/or {last} are given, the respective
@@ -426,6 +426,8 @@ a previous version <Esc> was used).  In the pattern standard wildcards '*' and
 '?' are accepted when matching file names.  '*' matches any string, '?'
 matches exactly one character.

+The 'wildignorecase' option can be set to ignore case in filenames.
+
 If you like tcsh's autolist completion, you can use this mapping:
 	:cnoremap X <C-L><C-D>
 (Where X is the command key to use, <C-L> is CTRL-L and <C-D> is CTRL-D)
@@ -824,10 +826,11 @@ These modifiers can be given, in this order:
 		the home directory.  If the name is a directory a path
 		separator is added at the end.  For a file name that does not
 		exist and does not have an absolute path the result is
-		unpredictable.
+		unpredictable.  On MS-Windows an 8.3 filename is expanded to
+		the long name.
 	:8	Converts the path to 8.3 short format (currently only on
-		win32).  Will act on as much of a path that is an existing
-		path.
+		MS-Windows).  Will act on as much of a path that is an
+		existing path.
 	:~	Reduce file name to be relative to the home directory, if
 		possible.  File name is unmodified if it is not below the home
 		directory.
--- a/runtime/doc/debug.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/debug.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*debug.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Dec 22
+*debug.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Feb 11


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ For debugging Vim scripts, functions, etc. see |debug-scripts|

 ==============================================================================

-1. Location of a crash, using gcc and gdb		*debug-gcc*
+1. Location of a crash, using gcc and gdb		*debug-gcc* *gdb*

 When Vim crashes in one of the test files, and you are using gcc for
 compilation, here is what you can do to find out exactly where Vim crashes.
--- a/runtime/doc/develop.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/develop.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Dec 17
+*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 10


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -232,6 +232,17 @@ time		shadows global declaration
 new		C++ reserved keyword
 try		Borland C++ doesn't like it to be used as a variable.

+clear		Mac curses.h
+echo		Mac curses.h
+instr		Mac curses.h
+meta		Mac curses.h
+newwin		Mac curses.h
+nl		Mac curses.h
+overwrite	Mac curses.h
+refresh		Mac curses.h
+scroll		Mac curses.h
+typeahead	Mac curses.h
+
 basename()	GNU string function
 dirname()	GNU string function
 get_env_value()	Linux system function
--- a/runtime/doc/diff.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/diff.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Apr 14
+*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Sep 05


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -86,16 +86,16 @@ diff mode.  You could use a construct like this: >
 While already in Vim you can start diff mode in three ways.

 							*E98*
-:diffsplit {filename}					*:diffs* *:diffsplit*
+:diffs[plit] {filename}					*:diffs* *:diffsplit*
 		Open a new window on the file {filename}.  The options are set
 		as for "vimdiff" for the current and the newly opened window.
 		Also see 'diffexpr'.

 							*:difft* *:diffthis*
-:diffthis	Make the current window part of the diff windows.  This sets
+:difft[his]	Make the current window part of the diff windows.  This sets
 		the options like for "vimdiff".

-:diffpatch {patchfile}				 *E816* *:diffp* *:diffpatch*
+:diffp[atch] {patchfile}				 *E816* *:diffp* *:diffpatch*
 		Use the current buffer, patch it with the diff found in
 		{patchfile} and open a buffer on the result.  The options are
 		set as for "vimdiff".
@@ -123,9 +123,9 @@ Since the option values are remembered with the buffer, you can edit another
 file for a moment and come back to the same file and be in diff mode again.

 							*:diffo* *:diffoff*
-:diffoff	Switch off diff mode for the current window.
+:diffo[ff]	Switch off diff mode for the current window.

-:diffoff!	Switch off diff mode for the current window and in all windows
+:diffo[ff]!	Switch off diff mode for the current window and in all windows
 		in the current tab page where 'diff' is set.

 The ":diffoff" command resets the relevant options to their default value.
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ buffer.  If you don't want a buffer to remain used for the diff do ":set
 nodiff" before hiding it.

 							*:diffu* *:diffupdate*
-:diffu[pdate]			Update the diff highlighting and folds.
+:diffu[pdate][!]		Update the diff highlighting and folds.

 Vim attempts to keep the differences updated when you make changes to the
 text.  This mostly takes care of inserted and deleted lines.  Changes within a
@@ -187,6 +187,9 @@ To force the differences to be updated use: >

 	:diffupdate

+If the ! is included Vim will check if the file was changed externally and
+needs to be reloaded.  It will prompt for each changed file, like `:checktime`
+was used.

 Vim will show filler lines for lines that are missing in one window but are
 present in another.  These lines were inserted in another file or deleted in
@@ -330,7 +333,7 @@ diff.  This example explains the format that Vim expects: >

 The "1a2" item appends the line "bbb".
 The "4d4" item deletes the line "111".
-The '7c7" item replaces the line "GGG" with "ggg".
+The "7c7" item replaces the line "GGG" with "ggg".

 When 'diffexpr' is not empty, Vim evaluates it to obtain a diff file in the
 format mentioned.  These variables are set to the file names used:
--- a/runtime/doc/editing.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/editing.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Feb 26
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 08


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -377,8 +377,9 @@ command that accepts more than one file name (like ":next file1 file2")
 embedded spaces must be escaped with a backslash.

 						*wildcard* *wildcards*
-Wildcards in {file} are expanded.  Which wildcards are supported depends on
-the system.  These are the common ones:
+Wildcards in {file} are expanded, but as with file completion, 'wildignore'
+and 'suffixes' apply.  Which wildcards are supported depends on the system.
+These are the common ones:
 	?	matches one character
 	*	matches anything, including nothing
 	**	matches anything, including nothing, recurses into directories
@@ -392,7 +393,7 @@ is to use "path\[[]abc]".  Then the file "path[abc]" literally.
 					*starstar-wildcard*
 Expanding "**" is possible on Unix, Win32, Mac OS/X and a few other systems.
 This allows searching a directory tree.  This goes up to 100 directories deep.
-Note there are some commands where this works slightly different, see
+Note there are some commands where this works slightly differently, see
 |file-searching|.
 Example: >
 	:n **/*.txt
@@ -422,9 +423,11 @@ You can have the backticks expanded as a Vim expression, instead of an
 external command, by using the syntax `={expr}` e.g.: >
 	:e `=tempname()`
 The expression can contain just about anything, thus this can also be used to
-avoid the special meaning of '"', '|', '%' and '#'.  Names are to be separated
-with line breaks.  When the result is a |List| then each item is used as a
-name.  Line breaks also separate names.
+avoid the special meaning of '"', '|', '%' and '#'.  However, 'wildignore'
+does apply like to other wildcars.
+If the expression returns a string then names are to be separated with line
+breaks.  When the result is a |List| then each item is used as a name.  Line
+breaks also separate names.

 							*++opt* *[++opt]*
 The [++opt] argument can be used to force the value of 'fileformat',
@@ -1066,6 +1069,7 @@ The names can be in upper- or lowercase.
 			If there are other tab pages and quitting the last
 			window in the current tab page the current tab page is
 			closed |tab-page|.
+			Triggers the |QuitPre| autocommand event.

 :conf[irm] q[uit]	Quit, but give prompt when changes have been made, or
 			the last file in the argument list has not been
@@ -1159,8 +1163,10 @@ MULTIPLE WINDOWS AND BUFFERS				*window-exit*
 							*:confirm* *:conf*
 :conf[irm] {command}	Execute {command}, and use a dialog when an
 			operation has to be confirmed.  Can be used on the
-			":q", ":qa" and ":w" commands (the latter to over-ride
-			a read-only setting).
+			|:q|, |:qa| and |:w| commands (the latter to override
+			a read-only setting), and any other command that can
+			fail in such a way, such as |:only|, |:buffer|,
+			|:bdelete|, etc.

 Examples: >
  :confirm w foo
@@ -1213,13 +1219,13 @@ For versions of Vim where browsing is not supported, the command is executed
 unmodified.

 							*browsefilter*
-For MS Windows, you can modify the filters that are used in the browse dialog.
-By setting the g:browsefilter or b:browsefilter variables, you can change the
-filters globally or locally to the buffer.  The variable is set to a string in
-the format "{filter label}\t{pattern};{pattern}\n" where {filter label} is the
-text that appears in the "Files of Type" comboBox, and {pattern} is the
-pattern which filters the filenames.  Several patterns can be given, separated
-by ';'.
+For MS Windows and GTK, you can modify the filters that are used in the browse
+dialog.  By setting the g:browsefilter or b:browsefilter variables, you can
+change the filters globally or locally to the buffer.  The variable is set to
+a string in the format "{filter label}\t{pattern};{pattern}\n" where {filter
+label} is the text that appears in the "Files of Type" comboBox, and {pattern}
+is the pattern which filters the filenames.  Several patterns can be given,
+separated by ';'.

 For Motif the same format is used, but only the very first pattern is actually
 used (Motif only offers one pattern, but you can edit it).
@@ -1227,7 +1233,7 @@ used (Motif only offers one pattern, but you can edit it).
 For example, to have only Vim files in the dialog, you could use the following
 command: >

-     let g:browsefilter="Vim Scripts\t*.vim\nVim Startup Files\t*vimrc\n"
+     let g:browsefilter = "Vim Scripts\t*.vim\nVim Startup Files\t*vimrc\n"

 You can override the filter setting on a per-buffer basis by setting the
 b:browsefilter variable.  You would most likely set b:browsefilter in a
@@ -1237,6 +1243,13 @@ difficult to start editing a file of a different type.  To overcome this, you
 may want to add "All Files\t*.*\n" as the final filter, so that the user can
 still access any desired file.

+To avoid setting browsefilter when Vim does not actually support it, you can
+use has("browsefilter"): >
+
+	if has("browsefilter")
+	   let g:browsefilter = "whatever"
+	endif
+
 ==============================================================================
 7. The current directory				*current-directory*

@@ -1639,6 +1652,6 @@ There are three different types of searching:

   Note that completion for ":find", ":sfind", and ":tabfind" commands do not
   currently work with 'path' items that contain a url or use the double star
-   (/usr/**2) or upward search (;) notations. >
+   with depth limiter (/usr/**2) or upward search (;) notations.

 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
--- a/runtime/doc/eval.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/eval.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*eval.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jul 13
+*eval.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Dec 05


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ done, the features in this document are not available.	See |+eval| and
 							*E712*
 There are six types of variables:

-Number		A 32 bit signed number.  |expr-number| *Number*
+Number		A 32 or 64 bit signed number.  |expr-number| *Number*
 		Examples:  -123  0x10  0177

 Float		A floating point number. |floating-point-format| *Float*
@@ -91,8 +91,8 @@ For boolean operators Numbers are used.  Zero is FALSE, non-zero is TRUE.
 Note that in the command >
 	:if "foo"
 "foo" is converted to 0, which means FALSE.  To test for a non-empty string,
-use strlen(): >
-	:if strlen("foo")
+use empty(): >
+	:if !empty("foo")
 <				*E745* *E728* *E703* *E729* *E730* *E731*
 List, Dictionary and Funcref types are not automatically converted.

@@ -615,7 +615,6 @@ Expression syntax summary, from least to most significant:
 	- expr7			unary minus
 	+ expr7			unary plus

-
 |expr8|	expr8[expr1]		byte of a String or item of a |List|
 	expr8[expr1 : expr1]	substring of a String or sublist of a |List|
 	expr8.name		entry in a |Dictionary|
@@ -760,7 +759,7 @@ of a |List| is different from the original |List|.  When using "is" without
 a |List| or a |Dictionary| it is equivalent to using "equal", using "isnot"
 equivalent to using "not equal".  Except that a different type means the
 values are different: "4 == '4'" is true, "4 is '4'" is false and "0 is []" is
-false and not a error. "is#"/"isnot#" and "is?"/"isnot?" can be used to match
+false and not an error. "is#"/"isnot#" and "is?"/"isnot?" can be used to match
 and ignore case.

 When comparing a String with a Number, the String is converted to a Number,
@@ -801,11 +800,12 @@ expr6 .	 expr6 ..	String concatenation			*expr-.*
 For |Lists| only "+" is possible and then both expr6 must be a list.  The
 result is a new list with the two lists Concatenated.

-expr7 *	 expr7 ..	number multiplication			*expr-star*
-expr7 /	 expr7 ..	number division				*expr-/*
-expr7 %	 expr7 ..	number modulo				*expr-%*
+expr7 *	 expr7 ..	Number multiplication			*expr-star*
+expr7 /	 expr7 ..	Number division				*expr-/*
+expr7 %	 expr7 ..	Number modulo				*expr-%*

 For all, except ".", Strings are converted to Numbers.
+For bitwise operators see |and()|, |or()| and |xor()|.

 Note the difference between "+" and ".":
 	"123" + "456" = 579
@@ -945,7 +945,8 @@ When expr8 is a |Funcref| type variable, invoke the function it refers to.
 							*expr9*
 number
 ------
-number			number constant		*expr-number*
+number			number constant			*expr-number* 
+						*hex-number* *octal-number*

 Decimal, Hexadecimal (starting with 0x or 0X), or Octal (starting with 0).

@@ -1543,15 +1544,18 @@ v:profiling	Normally zero.	Set to one after using ":profile start".

 					*v:progname* *progname-variable*
 v:progname	Contains the name (with path removed) with which Vim was
-		invoked.  Allows you to do special initialisations for "view",
-		"evim" etc., or any other name you might symlink to Vim.
+		invoked.  Allows you to do special initialisations for |view|,
+		|evim| etc., or any other name you might symlink to Vim.
 		Read-only.

 					*v:register* *register-variable*
 v:register	The name of the register in effect for the current normal mode
-		command.  If none is supplied it is the default register '"',
-		unless 'clipboard' contains "unnamed" or "unnamedplus", then
-		it is '*' or '+'.
+		command (regardless of whether that command actually used a
+		register).  Or for the currently executing normal mode mapping
+		(use this in custom commands that take a register).
+		If none is supplied it is the default register '"', unless
+		'clipboard' contains "unnamed" or "unnamedplus", then it is
+		'*' or '+'.
 		Also see |getreg()| and |setreg()|

 					*v:scrollstart* *scrollstart-variable*
@@ -1687,6 +1691,7 @@ USAGE				RESULT	DESCRIPTION	~
 abs( {expr})			Float or Number  absolute value of {expr}
 acos( {expr})			Float	arc cosine of {expr}
 add( {list}, {item})		List	append {item} to |List| {list}
+and( {expr}, {expr})		Number  bitwise AND
 append( {lnum}, {string})	Number	append {string} below line {lnum}
 append( {lnum}, {list})		Number	append lines {list} below line {lnum}
 argc()				Number	number of files in the argument list
@@ -1711,7 +1716,7 @@ call( {func}, {arglist} [, {dict}])
 				any	call {func} with arguments {arglist}
 ceil( {expr})			Float	round {expr} up
 changenr()			Number	current change number
-char2nr( {expr})		Number	ASCII value of first char in {expr}
+char2nr( {expr}[, {utf8}])	Number	ASCII/UTF8 value of first char in {expr}
 cindent( {lnum})		Number	C indent for line {lnum}
 clearmatches()			none	clear all matches
 col( {expr})			Number	column nr of cursor or mark
@@ -1744,7 +1749,8 @@ exists( {expr})			Number	TRUE if {expr} exists
 extend( {expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])
 				List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1}
 exp( {expr})			Float	exponential of {expr}
-expand( {expr} [, {flag}])	String	expand special keywords in {expr}
+expand( {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])
+				any	expand special keywords in {expr}
 feedkeys( {string} [, {mode}])	Number	add key sequence to typeahead buffer
 filereadable( {file})		Number	TRUE if {file} is a readable file
 filewritable( {file})		Number	TRUE if {file} is a writable file
@@ -1766,7 +1772,7 @@ foldtext( )			String	line displayed for closed fold
 foldtextresult( {lnum})		String	text for closed fold at {lnum}
 foreground( )			Number	bring the Vim window to the foreground
 function( {name})		Funcref reference to function {name}
-garbagecollect( [at_exit])	none	free memory, breaking cyclic references
+garbagecollect( [{atexit}])	none	free memory, breaking cyclic references
 get( {list}, {idx} [, {def}])	any	get item {idx} from {list} or {def}
 get( {dict}, {key} [, {def}])	any	get item {key} from {dict} or {def}
 getbufline( {expr}, {lnum} [, {end}])
@@ -1798,7 +1804,8 @@ gettabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {name})
 getwinposx()			Number	X coord in pixels of GUI Vim window
 getwinposy()			Number	Y coord in pixels of GUI Vim window
 getwinvar( {nr}, {varname})	any	variable {varname} in window {nr}
-glob( {expr} [, {flag}])	String	expand file wildcards in {expr}
+glob( {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])
+				any	expand file wildcards in {expr}
 globpath( {path}, {expr} [, {flag}])
 				String	do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path}
 has( {feature})			Number	TRUE if feature {feature} supported
@@ -1825,6 +1832,7 @@ inputrestore()			Number	restore typeahead
 inputsave()			Number	save and clear typeahead
 inputsecret( {prompt} [, {text}]) String  like input() but hiding the text
 insert( {list}, {item} [, {idx}]) List	insert {item} in {list} [before {idx}]
+invert( {expr})			Number  bitwise invert
 isdirectory( {directory})	Number	TRUE if {directory} is a directory
 islocked( {expr})		Number	TRUE if {expr} is locked
 items( {dict})			List	key-value pairs in {dict}
@@ -1839,9 +1847,11 @@ lispindent( {lnum})		Number	Lisp indent for line {lnum}
 localtime()			Number	current time
 log( {expr})			Float	natural logarithm (base e) of {expr}
 log10( {expr})			Float	logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10
+luaeval( {expr}[, {expr}])	any	evaluate |Lua| expression
 map( {expr}, {string})		List/Dict  change each item in {expr} to {expr}
 maparg( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]])
-				String	rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}
+				String or Dict
+					rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}
 mapcheck( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
 				String	check for mappings matching {name}
 match( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
@@ -1863,12 +1873,15 @@ mkdir( {name} [, {path} [, {prot}]])
 mode( [expr])			String	current editing mode
 mzeval( {expr})			any	evaluate |MzScheme| expression
 nextnonblank( {lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum}
-nr2char( {expr})		String	single char with ASCII value {expr}
+nr2char( {expr}[, {utf8}])	String	single char with ASCII/UTF8 value {expr}
+or( {expr}, {expr})		Number  bitwise OR
 pathshorten( {expr})		String	shorten directory names in a path
 pow( {x}, {y})			Float	{x} to the power of {y}
 prevnonblank( {lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum}
 printf( {fmt}, {expr1}...)	String	format text
 pumvisible()			Number	whether popup menu is visible
+pyeval( {expr})			any	evaluate |Python| expression
+py3eval( {expr})		any	evaluate |python3| expression
 range( {expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])
 				List	items from {expr} to {max}
 readfile( {fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
@@ -1890,6 +1903,8 @@ repeat( {expr}, {count})	String	repeat {expr} {count} times
 resolve( {filename})		String	get filename a shortcut points to
 reverse( {list})		List	reverse {list} in-place
 round( {expr})			Float	round off {expr}
+screencol()			Number	current cursor column
+screenrow()			Number	current cursor row
 search( {pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])
 				Number	search for {pattern}
 searchdecl( {name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]])
@@ -1919,6 +1934,7 @@ setwinvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val})	set {varname} in window {nr} to {val}
 shellescape( {string} [, {special}])
 				String	escape {string} for use as shell
 					command argument
+shiftwidth()			Number	effective value of 'shiftwidth'
 simplify( {filename})		String	simplify filename as much as possible
 sin( {expr})			Float	sine of {expr}
 sinh( {expr})			Float	hyperbolic sine of {expr}
@@ -1987,6 +2003,7 @@ winsaveview()			Dict	save view of current window
 winwidth( {nr})			Number	width of window {nr}
 writefile( {list}, {fname} [, {binary}])
 				Number	write list of lines to file {fname}
+xor( {expr}, {expr})		Number  bitwise XOR

 abs({expr})							*abs()*
 		Return the absolute value of {expr}.  When {expr} evaluates to
@@ -2026,6 +2043,13 @@ add({list}, {expr})					*add()*
 		Use |insert()| to add an item at another position.


+and({expr}, {expr})					*and()*
+		Bitwise AND on the two arguments.  The arguments are converted
+		to a number.  A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
+		Example: >
+			:let flag = and(bits, 0x80)
+
+
 append({lnum}, {expr})					*append()*
 		When {expr} is a |List|: Append each item of the |List| as a
 		text line below line {lnum} in the current buffer.
@@ -2270,14 +2294,16 @@ changenr()						*changenr()*
 		redo it is the number of the redone change.  After undo it is
 		one less than the number of the undone change.

-char2nr({expr})						*char2nr()*
+char2nr({expr}[, {utf8}])					*char2nr()*
 		Return number value of the first char in {expr}.  Examples: >
 			char2nr(" ")		returns 32
 			char2nr("ABC")		returns 65
-<		The current 'encoding' is used.  Example for "utf-8": >
+<		When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used.
+		Example for "utf-8": >
 			char2nr("<22>")		returns 225
 			char2nr("<22>"[0])		returns 195
-<		A combining character is a separate character.
+<		With {utf8} set to 1, always treat as utf-8 characters.
+		A combining character is a separate character.
 		|nr2char()| does the opposite.

 cindent({lnum})						*cindent()*
@@ -2298,7 +2324,7 @@ col({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column
 		position given with {expr}.  The accepted positions are:
 		    .	    the cursor position
 		    $	    the end of the cursor line (the result is the
-			    number of characters in the cursor line plus one)
+			    number of bytes in the cursor line plus one)
 		    'x	    position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
 			    returned)
 		Additionally {expr} can be [lnum, col]: a |List| with the line
@@ -2729,13 +2755,15 @@ exp({expr})						*exp()*
 		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}


-expand({expr} [, {flag}])				*expand()*
+expand({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])				*expand()*
 		Expand wildcards and the following special keywords in {expr}.
-		The result is a String.  'wildignorecase' applies.
+		'wildignorecase' applies.

-		When there are several matches, they are separated by <NL>
-		characters.  [Note: in version 5.0 a space was used, which
-		caused problems when a file name contains a space]
+		If {list} is given and it is non-zero, a List will be returned.
+		Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several
+		matches, they are separated by <NL> characters.  [Note: in
+		version 5.0 a space was used, which caused problems when a
+		file name contains a space]

 		If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string.	A name
 		for a non-existing file is not included.
@@ -2789,10 +2817,10 @@ expand({expr} [, {flag}])				*expand()*
 		When {expr} does not start with '%', '#' or '<', it is
 		expanded like a file name is expanded on the command line.
 		'suffixes' and 'wildignore' are used, unless the optional
-		{flag} argument is given and it is non-zero.  Names for
-		non-existing files are included.  The "**" item can be used to
-		search in a directory tree.  For example, to find all "README"
-		files in the current directory and below: >
+		{nosuf} argument is given and it is non-zero.
+		Names for non-existing files are included.  The "**" item can
+		be used to search in a directory tree.  For example, to find
+		all "README" files in the current directory and below: >
 			:echo expand("**/README")
 <
 		Expand() can also be used to expand variables and environment
@@ -3065,7 +3093,7 @@ function({name})					*function()* *E700*
 		{name} can be a user defined function or an internal function.


-garbagecollect([at_exit])				*garbagecollect()*
+garbagecollect([{atexit}])				*garbagecollect()*
 		Cleanup unused |Lists| and |Dictionaries| that have circular
 		references.  There is hardly ever a need to invoke this
 		function, as it is automatically done when Vim runs out of
@@ -3075,7 +3103,7 @@ garbagecollect([at_exit])				*garbagecollect()*
 		This is useful if you have deleted a very big |List| and/or
 		|Dictionary| with circular references in a script that runs
 		for a long time.
-		When the optional "at_exit" argument is one, garbage
+		When the optional {atexit} argument is one, garbage
 		collection will also be done when exiting Vim, if it wasn't
 		done before.  This is useful when checking for memory leaks.

@@ -3151,6 +3179,8 @@ getchar([expr])						*getchar()*
 		one-byte character it is the character itself as a number.
 		Use nr2char() to convert it to a String.

+		Use getcharmod() to obtain any additional modifiers.
+
 		When the user clicks a mouse button, the mouse event will be
 		returned.  The position can then be found in |v:mouse_col|,
 		|v:mouse_lnum| and |v:mouse_win|.  This example positions the
@@ -3189,10 +3219,11 @@ getcharmod()						*getcharmod()*
 			2	shift
 			4	control
 			8	alt (meta)
-			16	mouse double click
-			32	mouse triple click
-			64	mouse quadruple click
-			128	Macintosh only: command
+			16	meta (when it's different from ALT)
+			32	mouse double click
+			64	mouse triple click
+			96	mouse quadruple click (== 32 + 64)
+			128	command (Macintosh only)
 		Only the modifiers that have not been included in the
 		character itself are obtained.	Thus Shift-a results in "A"
 		without a modifier.
@@ -3209,7 +3240,8 @@ getcmdpos()						*getcmdpos()*
 		Return the position of the cursor in the command line as a
 		byte count.  The first column is 1.
 		Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
-		|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|.  Returns 0 otherwise.
+		|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping.
+		Returns 0 otherwise.
 		Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.

 getcmdtype()						*getcmdtype()*
@@ -3222,8 +3254,8 @@ getcmdtype()						*getcmdtype()*
 		    @	|input()| command
 		    -	|:insert| or |:append| command
 		Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
-		|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|.  Returns an empty string
-		otherwise.
+		|c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping.
+		Returns an empty string otherwise.
 		Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.

 							*getcwd()*
@@ -3261,8 +3293,9 @@ getfperm({fname})					*getfperm()*
 		"rwx" flags represent, in turn, the permissions of the owner
 		of the file, the group the file belongs to, and other users.
 		If a user does not have a given permission the flag for this
-		is replaced with the string "-".  Example: >
+		is replaced with the string "-".  Examples: >
 			:echo getfperm("/etc/passwd")
+			:echo getfperm(expand("~/.vimrc"))
 <		This will hopefully (from a security point of view) display
 		the string "rw-r--r--" or even "rw-------".

@@ -3436,19 +3469,25 @@ getwinvar({winnr}, {varname})				*getwinvar()*
 			:let list_is_on = getwinvar(2, '&list')
 			:echo "myvar = " . getwinvar(1, 'myvar')
 <
-glob({expr} [, {flag}])					*glob()*
+glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])				*glob()*
 		Expand the file wildcards in {expr}.  See |wildcards| for the
 		use of special characters.
-		The result is a String.
-		When there are several matches, they are separated by <NL>
-		characters.
-		Unless the optional {flag} argument is given and is non-zero,
+
+		Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is non-zero,
 		the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
 		one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
 		'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
 		'wildignorecase' always applies.
-		If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string.
-		A name for a non-existing file is not included.
+
+		When {list} is present and it is non-zero the result is a List
+		with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is,
+		you also get filenames containing newlines correctly.
+		Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several
+		matches, they are separated by <NL> characters.
+
+		If the expansion fails, the result is an empty String or List.
+		A name for a non-existing file is not included.  A symbolic
+		link is only included if it points to an existing file.

 		For most systems backticks can be used to get files names from
 		any external command.  Example: >
@@ -3534,6 +3573,9 @@ histadd({history}, {item})				*histadd()*
 			"search" or "/"   search pattern history
 			"expr"	 or "="   typed expression history
 			"input"  or "@"	  input line history
+			"debug"  or ">"   debug command history
+		The {history} string does not need to be the whole name, one
+		character is sufficient.
 		If {item} does already exist in the history, it will be
 		shifted to become the newest entry.
 		The result is a Number: 1 if the operation was successful,
@@ -3717,10 +3759,10 @@ inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]])		*inputdialog()*
 		Like |input()|, but when the GUI is running and text dialogs
 		are supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text.
 		Example: >
-			:let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", &sw)
-			:if n != ""
-			:  let &sw = n
-			:endif
+		   :let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", shiftwidth())
+		   :if n != ""
+		   :  let &sw = n
+		   :endif
 <		When the dialog is cancelled {cancelreturn} is returned.  When
 		omitted an empty string is returned.
 		Hitting <Enter> works like pressing the OK button.  Hitting
@@ -3782,6 +3824,11 @@ insert({list}, {item} [, {idx}])			*insert()*
 		Note that when {item} is a |List| it is inserted as a single
 		item.  Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|.

+invert({expr})						*invert()*
+		Bitwise invert.  The argument is converted to a number.  A
+		List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.  Example: >
+			:let bits = invert(bits)
+
 isdirectory({directory})				*isdirectory()*
 		The result is a Number, which is non-zero when a directory
 		with the name {directory} exists.  If {directory} doesn't
@@ -3920,11 +3967,12 @@ line2byte({lnum})					*line2byte()*
 		Return the byte count from the start of the buffer for line
 		{lnum}.  This includes the end-of-line character, depending on
 		the 'fileformat' option for the current buffer.  The first
-		line returns 1.
+		line returns 1. 'encoding' matters, 'fileencoding' is ignored.
 		This can also be used to get the byte count for the line just
 		below the last line: >
 			line2byte(line("$") + 1)
-<		This is the file size plus one.
+<		This is the buffer size plus one.  If 'fileencoding' is empty
+		it is the file size plus one.
 		When {lnum} is invalid, or the |+byte_offset| feature has been
 		disabled at compile time, -1 is returned.
 		Also see |byte2line()|, |go| and |:goto|.
@@ -3964,6 +4012,20 @@ log10({expr})						*log10()*
 <			-2.0
 		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
 		
+luaeval({expr}[, {expr}])					*luaeval()*
+		Evaluate Lua expression {expr} and return its result converted 
+		to Vim data structures. Second {expr} may hold additional 
+		argument accessible as _A inside first {expr}.
+		Strings are returned as they are.
+		Boolean objects are converted to numbers.
+		Numbers are converted to |Float| values if vim was compiled 
+		with |+float| and to numbers otherwise.
+		Dictionaries and lists obtained by vim.eval() are returned 
+		as-is.
+		Other objects are returned as zero without any errors.
+		See |lua-luaeval| for more details.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+lua| feature}
+
 map({expr}, {string})					*map()*
 		{expr} must be a |List| or a |Dictionary|.
 		Replace each item in {expr} with the result of evaluating
@@ -3982,7 +4044,7 @@ map({expr}, {string})					*map()*

 		The operation is done in-place.  If you want a |List| or
 		|Dictionary| to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
-			:let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' & . "\t"')
+			:let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' v:val . "\t"')

 <		Returns {expr}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered.
 		When an error is encountered while evaluating {string} no
@@ -4288,7 +4350,7 @@ mode([expr])	Return a string that indicates the current mode.

 mzeval({expr})							*mzeval()*
 		Evaluate MzScheme expression {expr} and return its result
-		convert to Vim data structures.
+		converted to Vim data structures.
 		Numbers and strings are returned as they are.
 		Pairs (including lists and improper lists) and vectors are
 		returned as Vim |Lists|.
@@ -4311,14 +4373,16 @@ nextnonblank({lnum})					*nextnonblank()*
 		below it, zero is returned.
 		See also |prevnonblank()|.

-nr2char({expr})						*nr2char()*
+nr2char({expr}[, {utf8}])				*nr2char()*
 		Return a string with a single character, which has the number
 		value {expr}.  Examples: >
 			nr2char(64)		returns "@"
 			nr2char(32)		returns " "
-<		The current 'encoding' is used.  Example for "utf-8": >
+<		When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used.
+		Example for "utf-8": >
 			nr2char(300)		returns I with bow character
-<		Note that a NUL character in the file is specified with
+<		With {utf8} set to 1, always return utf-8 characters.
+		Note that a NUL character in the file is specified with
 		nr2char(10), because NULs are represented with newline
 		characters.  nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the
 		string, thus results in an empty string.
@@ -4347,6 +4411,13 @@ getpos({expr})	Get the position for {expr}.  For possible values of {expr}
 			call setpos('.', save_cursor)
 <		Also see |setpos()|.

+or({expr}, {expr})					*or()*
+		Bitwise OR on the two arguments.  The arguments are converted
+		to a number.  A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
+		Example: >
+			:let bits = or(bits, 0x80)
+
+
 pathshorten({expr})					*pathshorten()*
 		Shorten directory names in the path {expr} and return the
 		result.  The tail, the file name, is kept as-is.  The other
@@ -4386,6 +4457,7 @@ printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...)				*printf()*

 		Often used items are:
 		  %s	string
+		  %6S	string right-aligned in 6 display cells
 		  %6s	string right-aligned in 6 bytes
 		  %.9s	string truncated to 9 bytes
 		  %c	single byte
@@ -4500,6 +4572,10 @@ printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...)				*printf()*
 		s	The text of the String argument is used.  If a
 			precision is specified, no more bytes than the number
 			specified are used.
+		S	The text of the String argument is used.  If a
+			precision is specified, no more display cells than the
+			number specified are used.  Without the |+multi_byte|
+			feature works just like 's'.

 							*printf-f* *E807*
 		f	The Float argument is converted into a string of the 
@@ -4552,6 +4628,29 @@ pumvisible()						*pumvisible()*
 		This can be used to avoid some things that would remove the
 		popup menu.

+							*E860* *E861*
+py3eval({expr})						*py3eval()*
+		Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are 
+		copied though, unicode strings are additionally converted to 
+		'encoding').
+		Lists are represented as Vim |List| type.
+		Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with 
+		keys converted to strings.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+python3| feature}
+
+							*E858* *E859*
+pyeval({expr})						*pyeval()*
+		Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result
+		converted to Vim data structures.
+		Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are 
+		copied though).
+		Lists are represented as Vim |List| type.
+		Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type, 
+		non-string keys result in error.
+		{only available when compiled with the |+python| feature}
+
 							*E726* *E727*
 range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])				*range()*
 		Returns a |List| with Numbers:
@@ -4779,12 +4878,35 @@ round({expr})							*round()*
 			echo round(-4.5)
 <			-5.0
 		{only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
-		
-		
+
+screencol()							*screencol()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the current screen column of
+		the cursor. The leftmost column has number 1.
+		This function is mainly used for testing.
+
+		Note: Always returns the current screen column, thus if used
+		in a command (e.g. ":echo screencol()") it will return the
+		column inside the command line, which is 1 when the command is
+		executed. To get the cursor position in the file use one of
+		the following mappings: >
+			nnoremap <expr> GG ":echom ".screencol()."\n"
+			nnoremap <silent> GG :echom screencol()<CR>
+<
+screenrow()							*screenrow()*
+		The result is a Number, which is the current screen row of the
+		cursor.  The top line has number one.
+		This function is mainly used for testing.
+
+		Note: Same restrictions as with |screencol()|.
+
 search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])	*search()*
 		Search for regexp pattern {pattern}.  The search starts at the
 		cursor position (you can use |cursor()| to set it).

+		When a match has been found its line number is returned.
+		If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't
+		move.  No error message is given.
+
 		{flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
 		'b'	search backward instead of forward
 		'c'	accept a match at the cursor position
@@ -4812,15 +4934,12 @@ search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])	*search()*
 		A zero value is equal to not giving the argument.

 		When the {timeout} argument is given the search stops when
-		more than this many milli seconds have passed.	Thus when
+		more than this many milliseconds have passed.	Thus when
 		{timeout} is 500 the search stops after half a second.
 		The value must not be negative.  A zero value is like not
 		giving the argument.
 		{only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}

-		If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't
-		move.  No error message is given.
-		When a match has been found its line number is returned.
 							*search()-sub-match*
 		With the 'p' flag the returned value is one more than the
 		first sub-match in \(\).  One if none of them matched but the
@@ -5039,7 +5158,8 @@ setcmdpos({pos})					*setcmdpos()*
 		line.

 setline({lnum}, {text})					*setline()*
-		Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}.
+		Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}.  To insert
+		lines use |append()|.
 		{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
 		When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be
 		added as a new line.
@@ -5050,7 +5170,7 @@ setline({lnum}, {text})					*setline()*
 		will be set to the items in the list.  Example: >
 			:call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc'])
 <		This is equivalent to: >
-			:for [n, l] in [[5, 6, 7], ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc']]
+			:for [n, l] in [[5, 'aaa'], [6, 'bbb'], [7, 'ccc']]
 			:  call setline(n, l)
 			:endfor
 <		Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set.
@@ -5164,8 +5284,9 @@ setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}])

 		If {options} contains no register settings, then the default
 		is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL>.
-		Setting the '=' register is not possible.
-		Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
+		Setting the '=' register is not possible, but you can use >
+			:let @= = var_expr
+<		Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.

 		Examples: >
 			:call setreg(v:register, @*)
@@ -5241,6 +5362,23 @@ shellescape({string} [, {special}])			*shellescape()*
 		    :call system("chmod +w -- " . shellescape(expand("%")))


+shiftwidth()						*shiftwidth()*
+		Returns the effective value of 'shiftwidth'. This is the
+		'shiftwidth' value unless it is zero, in which case it is the
+		'tabstop' value.  To be backwards compatible in indent
+		plugins, use this: >
+			if exists('*shiftwidth')
+			  func s:sw()
+			    return shiftwidth()
+			  endfunc
+			else
+			  func s:sw()
+			    return &sw
+			  endfunc
+			endif
+<		And then use s:sw() instead of &sw.
+
+
 simplify({filename})					*simplify()*
 		Simplify the file name as much as possible without changing
 		the meaning.  Shortcuts (on MS-Windows) or symbolic links (on
@@ -5370,7 +5508,8 @@ split({expr} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]])			*split()*
 		empty each white-separated sequence of characters becomes an
 		item.
 		Otherwise the string is split where {pattern} matches,
-		removing the matched characters.
+		removing the matched characters. 'ignorecase' is not used
+		here, add \c to ignore case. |/\c|
 		When the first or last item is empty it is omitted, unless the
 		{keepempty} argument is given and it's non-zero.
 		Other empty items are kept when {pattern} matches at least one
@@ -5580,8 +5719,10 @@ substitute({expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags})		*substitute()*
 		This works like the ":substitute" command (without any flags).
 		But the matching with {pat} is always done like the 'magic'
 		option is set and 'cpoptions' is empty (to make scripts
-		portable).  'ignorecase' is still relevant.  'smartcase' is
-		not used.  See |string-match| for how {pat} is used.
+		portable).  'ignorecase' is still relevant, use |/\c| or |/\C|
+		if you want to ignore or match case and ignore 'ignorecase'.
+		'smartcase' is not used.  See |string-match| for how {pat} is
+		used.

 		A "~" in {sub} is not replaced with the previous {sub}.
 		Note that some codes in {sub} have a special meaning
@@ -5739,9 +5880,9 @@ tabpagebuflist([{arg}])					*tabpagebuflist()*
 		omitted the current tab page is used.
 		When {arg} is invalid the number zero is returned.
 		To get a list of all buffers in all tabs use this: >
-			tablist = []
+			let buflist = []
 			for i in range(tabpagenr('$'))
-			   call extend(tablist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1))
+			   call extend(buflist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1))
 			endfor
 <		Note that a buffer may appear in more than one window.

@@ -5904,6 +6045,8 @@ undofile({name})					*undofile()*
 		the undo file exists.
 		{name} is always expanded to the full path, since that is what
 		is used internally.
+		If {name} is empty undofile() returns an empty string, since a
+		buffer without a file name will not write an undo file.
 		Useful in combination with |:wundo| and |:rundo|.
 		When compiled without the +persistent_undo option this always
 		returns an empty string.
@@ -5963,7 +6106,7 @@ virtcol({expr})						*virtcol()*
 		would be of unlimited width.  When there is a <Tab> at the
 		position, the returned Number will be the column at the end of
 		the <Tab>.  For example, for a <Tab> in column 1, with 'ts'
-		set to 8, it returns 8.
+		set to 8, it returns 8. |conceal| is ignored.
 		For the byte position use |col()|.
 		For the use of {expr} see |col()|.
 		When 'virtualedit' is used {expr} can be [lnum, col, off], where
@@ -6044,8 +6187,9 @@ winline()	The result is a Number, which is the screen line of the cursor
 winnr([{arg}])	The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
 		window.  The top window has number 1.
 		When the optional argument is "$", the number of the
-		last window is returned (the window count).
-		When the optional argument is "#", the number of the last
+		last window is returned (the window count). >
+			let window_count = winnr('$')
+<		When the optional argument is "#", the number of the last
 		accessed window is returned (where |CTRL-W_p| goes to).
 		If there is no previous window or it is in another tab page 0
 		is returned.
@@ -6121,8 +6265,16 @@ writefile({list}, {fname} [, {binary}])
 		To copy a file byte for byte: >
 			:let fl = readfile("foo", "b")
 			:call writefile(fl, "foocopy", "b")
+
+
+xor({expr}, {expr})					*xor()*
+		Bitwise XOR on the two arguments.  The arguments are converted
+		to a number.  A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
+		Example: >
+			:let bits = xor(bits, 0x80)
 <

+
 							*feature-list*
 There are three types of features:
 1.  Features that are only supported when they have been enabled when Vim
@@ -6149,6 +6301,7 @@ balloon_multiline	GUI supports multiline balloons.
 beos			BeOS version of Vim.
 browse			Compiled with |:browse| support, and browse() will
 			work.
+browsefilter		Compiled with support for |browsefilter|.
 builtin_terms		Compiled with some builtin terminals.
 byte_offset		Compiled with support for 'o' in 'statusline'
 cindent			Compiled with 'cindent' support.
@@ -6226,6 +6379,8 @@ mouse_gpm		Compiled with support for gpm (Linux console mouse)
 mouse_netterm		Compiled with support for netterm mouse.
 mouse_pterm		Compiled with support for qnx pterm mouse.
 mouse_sysmouse		Compiled with support for sysmouse (*BSD console mouse)
+mouse_sgr		Compiled with support for sgr mouse.
+mouse_urxvt		Compiled with support for urxvt mouse.
 mouse_xterm		Compiled with support for xterm mouse.
 mouseshape		Compiled with support for 'mouseshape'.
 multi_byte		Compiled with support for 'encoding'
@@ -6302,6 +6457,7 @@ windows			Compiled with support for more than one window.
 writebackup		Compiled with 'writebackup' default on.
 xfontset		Compiled with X fontset support |xfontset|.
 xim			Compiled with X input method support |xim|.
+xpm_w32			Compiled with pixmap support for Win32.
 xsmp			Compiled with X session management support.
 xsmp_interact		Compiled with interactive X session management support.
 xterm_clipboard		Compiled with support for xterm clipboard.
@@ -6374,7 +6530,7 @@ last defined. Example: >
 <
 See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.

-							*E124* *E125*
+							*E124* *E125* *E853*
 :fu[nction][!] {name}([arguments]) [range] [abort] [dict]
 			Define a new function by the name {name}.  The name
 			must be made of alphanumeric characters and '_', and
@@ -6404,6 +6560,8 @@ See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
 			is excluded, ":{range}call" will call the function for
 			each line in the range, with the cursor on the start
 			of each line.  See |function-range-example|.
+			The cursor is still moved to the first line of the
+			range, as is the case with all Ex commands.

 			When the [abort] argument is added, the function will
 			abort as soon as an error is detected.
@@ -6635,9 +6793,9 @@ Hint: If you distribute a bunch of scripts you can pack them together with the
 ==============================================================================
 6. Curly braces names					*curly-braces-names*

-Wherever you can use a variable, you can use a "curly braces name" variable.
-This is a regular variable name with one or more expressions wrapped in braces
-{} like this: >
+In most places where you can use a variable, you can use a "curly braces name"
+variable.  This is a regular variable name with one or more expressions
+wrapped in braces {} like this: >
 	my_{adjective}_variable

 When Vim encounters this, it evaluates the expression inside the braces, puts
@@ -6673,6 +6831,11 @@ Example: >

 This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)".

+This does NOT work: >
+  :let i = 3
+  :let @{i} = ''  " error
+  :echo @{i}      " error
+
 ==============================================================================
 7. Commands						*expression-commands*

--- a/runtime/doc/evim-fr.1
+++ b/runtime/doc/evim-fr.1
@@ -54,3 +54,4 @@ Voir le menu Aide/Remerciements ou ":help credits" dans
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a <20>t<EFBFBD> traduite David Blanchet.
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03-26.
+Mise <20> jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pell<6C> <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>
--- a/runtime/doc/evim-fr.UTF-8.1
+++ b/runtime/doc/evim-fr.UTF-8.1
@@ -54,3 +54,4 @@ Voir le menu Aide/Remerciements ou ":help credits" dans
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a été traduite David Blanchet.
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03-26.
+Mise à jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pellé <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>
--- a/runtime/doc/gui.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/gui.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Nov 03
+*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jul 22


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -147,6 +147,15 @@ task bar with the 'guiheadroom' option.
 If you are running the X Window System, you can get information about the
 window Vim is running in with this command: >
 	:!xwininfo -id $WINDOWID
+<
+							*gui-IME* *iBus*
+Input methods for international characters in X that rely on the XIM
+framework, most notably iBus, have been known to produce undesirable results
+in gVim. These may include an inability to enter spaces, or long delays
+between typing a character and it being recognized by the application.
+
+One workaround that has been successful, for unknown reasons, is to prevent
+gvim from forking into the background by starting it with the |-f| argument.

 ==============================================================================
 2. Scrollbars						*gui-scrollbars*
--- a/runtime/doc/gui_w32.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/gui_w32.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Dec 19
+*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 04


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -137,6 +137,9 @@ options:
 And if there already is a gvim running:
 "Edit with existing gvim"   -- edit the file with the running gvim

+The "edit with existing Vim" entries can be disabled by adding an entry in the
+registry under HKLM\Software\Vim\Gvim, named DisableEditWithExisting, and with
+any value.
 						*install-registry*
 You can add the "Edit with Vim" menu entry in an easy way by using the
 "install.exe" program.  It will add several registry entries for you.
@@ -486,4 +489,16 @@ to:
 And add gvim to the list of applications.  This problem only appears to happen
 with the Intellimouse driver 2.2 and when "Universal Scrolling" is turned on.

+
+XPM support						*w32-xpm-support*
+
+Gvim can be build on MS-Windows with support for XPM files.  |+xpm_w32|
+See the Make_mvc.mak file for instructions, search for XPM.
+
+To try out if XPM support works do this: >
+	:help
+	:exe 'sign define vimxpm icon=' . $VIMRUNTIME . '\\vim16x16.xpm'
+	:exe 'sign place 1 line=1 name=vimxpm file=' . expand('%:p')
+<
+
 vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
--- a/runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
+*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Sep 14


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -53,6 +53,8 @@ When using "gvim -f" and then ":gui", Vim will run in the foreground.  The
 ":gui -b".

 "gvim --nofork" does the same as "gvim -f".
+								*E851* *E852*
+When starting the GUI fails Vim will try to continue running in the terminal.

 If you want the GUI to run in the foreground always, include the 'f'
 flag in 'guioptions'.  |-f|.
--- a/runtime/doc/hebrew.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/hebrew.txt
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Details
      This is also the keymap when 'keymap=hebrew' is set.  The advantage of
      'keymap' is that it works properly when using UTF8, e.g. it inserts the
      correct characters; 'hkmap' does not.  The 'keymap' keyboard can also
-      insert niqud and te`amim.  To see what those mappings are,look at the
+      insert niqud and te`amim.  To see what those mappings are, look at the
      keymap file 'hebrew.vim' etc.


--- a/runtime/doc/helphelp.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/helphelp.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 14
+*helphelp.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 28


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -194,11 +194,12 @@ command: >
 				*E154* *E150* *E151* *E152* *E153* *E670*
 :helpt[ags] [++t] {dir}
 			Generate the help tags file(s) for directory {dir}.
-			All "*.txt" and "*.??x" files in the directory are
-			scanned for a help tag definition in between stars.
-			The "*.??x" files are for translated docs, they
-			generate the "tags-??" file, see |help-translated|.
-			The generated tags files are sorted.
+			All "*.txt" and "*.??x" files in the directory and
+			sub-directories are scanned for a help tag definition
+			in between stars.  The "*.??x" files are for
+			translated docs, they generate the "tags-??" file, see
+			|help-translated|.  The generated tags files are
+			sorted.
 			When there are duplicates an error message is given.
 			An existing tags file is silently overwritten.
 			The optional "++t" argument forces adding the
@@ -218,11 +219,12 @@ files.  Vim will search for all help in "doc" directories in 'runtimepath'.
 This is only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang| feature.

 At this moment translations are available for:
-	Chinese - multiple authors
-	French  - translated by David Blanchet
-	Italian - translated by Antonio Colombo
-	Polish  - translated by Mikolaj Machowski
-	Russian - translated by Vassily Ragosin
+	Chinese  - multiple authors
+	French   - translated by David Blanchet
+	Italian  - translated by Antonio Colombo
+	Japanese - multiple authors
+	Polish   - translated by Mikolaj Machowski
+	Russian  - translated by Vassily Ragosin
 See the Vim website to find them: http://www.vim.org/translations.php

 A set of translated help files consists of these files:
--- a/runtime/doc/if_lua.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/if_lua.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_lua.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 22
+*if_lua.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jun 29


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Luis Carvalho
@@ -8,8 +8,11 @@ The Lua Interface to Vim				*lua* *Lua*

 1. Commands			|lua-commands|
 2. The vim module		|lua-vim|
-3. Buffer userdata		|lua-buffer|
-4. Window userdata		|lua-window|
+3. List userdata		|lua-list|
+4. Dict userdata		|lua-dict|
+5. Buffer userdata		|lua-buffer|
+6. Window userdata		|lua-window|
+7. The luaeval function		|lua-luaeval|

 {Vi does not have any of these commands}

@@ -56,13 +59,14 @@ Example:
 <

 							*:luado*
-:[range]luado {body}	Execute Lua function "function (line) {body} end" for
-			each line in the [range], with the function argument
-			being set to the text of each line in turn, without a
-			trailing <EOL>. If the value returned by the function
-			is a string it becomes the text of the line in the
-			current turn. The default for [range] is the whole
-			file: "1,$".		      {not in Vi}
+:[range]luado {body}	Execute Lua function "function (line, linenr) {body}
+			end" for each line in the [range], with the function
+			argument being set to the text of each line in turn,
+			without a trailing <EOL>, and the current line number.
+			If the value returned by the function is a string it
+			becomes the text of the line in the current turn. The
+			default for [range] is the whole file: "1,$".
+							{not in Vi}

 Examples:
 >
@@ -88,11 +92,9 @@ Examples:
 All these commands execute a Lua chunk from either the command line (:lua and
 :luado) or a file (:luafile) with the given line [range]. Similarly to the Lua
 interpreter, each chunk has its own scope and so only global variables are
-shared between command calls. Lua default libraries "table", "string", "math",
-and "package" are available, "io" and "debug" are not, and "os" is restricted
-to functions "date", "clock", "time", "difftime", and "getenv". In addition,
-Lua "print" function has its output redirected to the Vim message area, with
-arguments separated by a white space instead of a tab.
+shared between command calls. All Lua default libraries are available. In
+addition, Lua "print" function has its output redirected to the Vim message
+area, with arguments separated by a white space instead of a tab.

 Lua uses the "vim" module (see |lua-vim|) to issue commands to Vim
 and manage buffers (|lua-buffer|) and windows (|lua-window|). However,
@@ -108,9 +110,9 @@ input range are stored in "vim.firstline" and "vim.lastline" respectively. The
 module also includes routines for buffer, window, and current line queries,
 Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.

-	vim.isbuffer(value)	Returns 'true' (boolean, not string) if
-				"value" is a buffer userdata and 'false'
-				otherwise (see |lua-buffer|).
+	vim.list()		Returns an empty list (see |List|).
+
+	vim.dict()		Returns an empty dictionary (see |Dictionary|).

 	vim.buffer([arg])	If "arg" is a number, returns buffer with
 				number "arg" in the buffer list or, if "arg"
@@ -121,16 +123,21 @@ Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.
 				'true' returns the first buffer in the buffer
 				list or else the current buffer.

-	vim.iswindow(value)	Returns 'true' (boolean, not string) if
-				"value" is a window userdata and
-				'false' otherwise (see |lua-window|).
-
 	vim.window([arg])	If "arg" is a number, returns window with
 				number "arg" or 'nil' (nil value, not string)
 				if not found. Otherwise, if "toboolean(arg)"
 				is 'true' returns the first window or else the
 				current window.

+	vim.type({arg})		Returns the type of {arg}. It is equivalent to
+				Lua's "type" function, but returns "list",
+				"dict", "buffer", or "window" if {arg} is a
+				list, dictionary, buffer, or window,
+				respectively. Examples: >
+					:lua l = vim.list()
+					:lua print(type(l), vim.type(l))
+					:" userdata list
+<
 	vim.command({cmd})	Executes the vim (ex-mode) command {cmd}.
 				Examples: >
 					:lua vim.command"set tw=60"
@@ -141,7 +148,7 @@ Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.
 				Vim strings and numbers are directly converted
 				to Lua strings and numbers respectively. Vim
 				lists and dictionaries are converted to Lua
-				tables (lists become integer-keyed tables).
+				userdata (see |lua-list| and |lua-dict|).
 				Examples: >
 					:lua tw = vim.eval"&tw"
 					:lua print(vim.eval"{'a': 'one'}".a)
@@ -157,7 +164,72 @@ Vim evaluation and command execution, and others.


 ==============================================================================
-3. Buffer userdata					*lua-buffer*
+3. List userdata					*lua-list*
+
+List userdata represent vim lists, and the interface tries to follow closely
+Vim's syntax for lists. Since lists are objects, changes in list references in
+Lua are reflected in Vim and vice-versa. A list "l" has the following
+properties and methods:
+
+Properties
+----------
+	o "#l" is the number of items in list "l", equivalent to "len(l)"
+	    in Vim.
+	o "l[k]" returns the k-th item in "l"; "l" is zero-indexed, as in Vim.
+	    To modify the k-th item, simply do "l[k] = newitem"; in
+	    particular, "l[k] = nil" removes the k-th item from "l".
+	o "l()" returns an iterator for "l".
+
+Methods
+-------
+	o "l:add(item)" appends "item" to the end of "l".
+	o "l:insert(item[, pos])" inserts "item" at (optional)
+	    position "pos" in the list. The default value for "pos" is 0.
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:let l = [1, 'item']
+	:lua l = vim.eval('l') -- same 'l'
+	:lua l:add(vim.list())
+	:lua l[0] = math.pi
+	:echo l[0] " 3.141593
+	:lua l[0] = nil -- remove first item
+	:lua l:insert(true, 1)
+	:lua print(l, #l, l[0], l[1], l[-1])
+	:lua for item in l() do print(item) end
+<
+
+==============================================================================
+4. Dict userdata					*lua-dict*
+
+Similarly to list userdata, dict userdata represent vim dictionaries; since
+dictionaries are also objects, references are kept between Lua and Vim. A dict
+"d" has the following properties:
+
+Properties
+----------
+	o "#d" is the number of items in dict "d", equivalent to "len(d)"
+	    in Vim.
+	o "d.key" or "d['key']" returns the value at entry "key" in "d".
+	    To modify the entry at this key, simply do "d.key = newvalue"; in
+	    particular, "d.key = nil" removes the entry from "d".
+	o "d()" returns an iterator for "d" and is equivalent to "items(d)" in
+	    Vim.
+
+Examples:
+>
+	:let d = {'n':10}
+	:lua d = vim.eval('d') -- same 'd'
+	:lua print(d, d.n, #d)
+	:let d.self = d
+	:lua for k, v in d() do print(d, k, v) end
+	:lua d.x = math.pi
+	:lua d.self = nil -- remove entry
+	:echo d
+<
+
+==============================================================================
+5. Buffer userdata					*lua-buffer*

 Buffer userdata represent vim buffers. A buffer userdata "b" has the following
 properties and methods:
@@ -209,7 +281,7 @@ Examples:
 <

 ==============================================================================
-4. Window userdata					*lua-window*
+6. Window userdata					*lua-window*

 Window objects represent vim windows. A window userdata "w" has the following
 properties and methods:
@@ -241,4 +313,29 @@ Examples:
 <

 ==============================================================================
- vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
+7. The luaeval function					*lua-luaeval* *lua-eval*
+
+The (dual) equivalent of "vim.eval" for passing Lua values to Vim is
+"luaeval". "luaeval" takes an expression string and an optional argument and
+returns the result of the expression. It is semantically equivalent in Lua to:
+>
+	local chunkheader = "local _A = select(1, ...) return "
+	function luaeval (expstr, arg)
+	    local chunk = assert(loadstring(chunkheader .. expstr, "luaeval"))
+	    return chunk(arg) -- return typval
+	end
+<
+Note that "_A" receives the argument to "luaeval". Examples: >
+
+	:echo luaeval('math.pi')
+	:lua a = vim.list():add('newlist')
+	:let a = luaeval('a')
+	:echo a[0] " 'newlist'
+	:function Rand(x,y) " random uniform between x and y
+	:  return luaeval('(_A.y-_A.x)*math.random()+_A.x', {'x':a:x,'y':a:y})
+	:  endfunction
+	:echo Rand(1,10)
+
+
+==============================================================================
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl:
--- a/runtime/doc/if_perl.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/if_perl.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 21
+*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Oct 25


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sven Verdoolaege
@@ -44,15 +44,17 @@ The Perl patches for Vim were made by:
 	Sven Verdoolaege <skimo@breughel.ufsia.ac.be>
 	Matt Gerassimof

-Perl for MS-Windows can be found at:
-http://www.perl.com/CPAN/ports/nt/Standard/x86/
+Perl for MS-Windows can be found at: http://www.perl.com/
+The ActiveState one should work.

 ==============================================================================
 3. Using the Perl interface				*perl-using*

 							*:perl* *:pe*
 :pe[rl] {cmd}		Execute Perl command {cmd}.  The current package
-			is "main".
+			is "main".  Simple example to test if `:perl` is
+			working: >
+				:perl VIM::Msg("Hello")

 :pe[rl] << {endpattern}
 {script}
@@ -173,7 +175,8 @@ VIM::Windows([{wn}...])	With no arguments, returns a list of all the windows
 VIM::DoCommand({cmd})	Executes Ex command {cmd}.

 							*perl-Eval*
-VIM::Eval({expr})	Evaluates {expr} and returns (success, val).
+VIM::Eval({expr})	Evaluates {expr} and returns (success, value) in list 
+			context or just value in scalar context.
 			success=1 indicates that val contains the value of
 			{expr}; success=0 indicates a failure to evaluate
 			the expression.  '@x' returns the contents of register
--- a/runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 07
+*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Sep 23


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore
@@ -6,13 +6,14 @@

 The Python Interface to Vim				*python* *Python*

-1. Commands			|python-commands|
-2. The vim module		|python-vim|
-3. Buffer objects		|python-buffer|
-4. Range objects		|python-range|
-5. Window objects		|python-window|
-6. Dynamic loading		|python-dynamic|
-7. Python 3			|python3|
+1. Commands					|python-commands|
+2. The vim module				|python-vim|
+3. Buffer objects				|python-buffer|
+4. Range objects				|python-range|
+5. Window objects				|python-window|
+6. pyeval(), py3eval() Vim functions		|python-pyeval|
+7. Dynamic loading				|python-dynamic|
+8. Python 3					|python3|

 {Vi does not have any of these commands}

@@ -26,7 +27,9 @@ The Python 3 interface is available only when Vim was compiled with the

 					*:python* *:py* *E205* *E263* *E264*
 :[range]py[thon] {stmt}
-			Execute Python statement {stmt}.
+			Execute Python statement {stmt}.  A simple check if
+			the `:python` command is working: >
+				:python print "Hello"

 :[range]py[thon] << {endmarker}
 {script}
@@ -150,6 +153,42 @@ vim.eval(str)						*python-eval*
 	[{'cmd': '/^eval_expr(arg, nextcmd)$/', 'static': 0, 'name':
 	'eval_expr', 'kind': 'f', 'filename': './src/eval.c'}]

+vim.bindeval(str)					*python-bindeval*
+	Like |python-eval|, but
+	1. if expression evaluates to |List| or |Dictionary| it is returned as 
+	   vimlist or vimdictionary python type that are connected to original 
+	   list or dictionary. Thus modifications to these objects imply 
+	   modifications of the original.
+
+	   Additionally, vimlist and vimdictionary type have read-write 
+	   `.locked` attribute that returns
+	     Value           Meaning ~
+	     zero            Variable is not locked
+	     vim.VAR_LOCKED  Variable is locked, but can be unlocked
+	     vim.VAR_FIXED   Variable is locked and can't be unlocked
+	   integer constants. If variable is not fixed, you can do 
+	   `var.locked=True` to lock it and `var.locked=False` to unlock. 
+	   There is no recursive locking like |:lockvar|! does. There is also 
+	   no way to lock a specific key or check whether it is locked (in any 
+	   case these locks are ignored by anything except |:let|: |extend()| 
+	   does not care, neither does python interface).
+
+	   Vimdictionary type also supports `.scope` attribute which is one of
+	     Value              Meaning ~
+	     zero               Dictionary is not a scope one
+	     vim.VAR_DEF_SCOPE  Function-local or global scope dictionary
+	     vim.VAR_SCOPE      Other scope dictionary
+
+	2. if expression evaluates to a function reference, then it returns 
+	   callable vimfunction object. Use self keyword argument to assign 
+	   |self| object for dictionary functions.
+
+	Note: this function has the same behavior as |lua-eval| (except that 
+	      lua does not support running vim functions), |python-eval| is 
+	      kept for backwards compatibility in order not to make scripts 
+	      relying on outputs of vim.eval() being a copy of original or 
+	      vim.eval("1") returning a string.
+


 Error object of the "vim" module
@@ -222,8 +261,9 @@ Buffer objects represent vim buffers.  You can obtain them in a number of ways:
 	- from indexing vim.buffers (|python-buffers|)
 	- from the "buffer" attribute of a window (|python-window|)

-Buffer objects have one read-only attribute - name - the full file name for
-the buffer.  They also have three methods (append, mark, and range; see below).
+Buffer objects have two read-only attributes - name - the full file name for
+the buffer, and number - the buffer number.  They also have three methods
+(append, mark, and range; see below).

 You can also treat buffer objects as sequence objects.  In this context, they
 act as if they were lists (yes, they are mutable) of strings, with each
@@ -318,7 +358,13 @@ The height attribute is writable only if the screen is split horizontally.
 The width attribute is writable only if the screen is split vertically.

 ==============================================================================
-6. Dynamic loading					*python-dynamic*
+6. pyeval() and py3eval() Vim functions			*python-pyeval*
+
+To facilitate bi-directional interface, you can use |pyeval()| and |py3eval()| 
+functions to evaluate Python expressions and pass their values to VimL.
+
+==============================================================================
+7. Dynamic loading					*python-dynamic*

 On MS-Windows the Python library can be loaded dynamically.  The |:version|
 output then includes |+python/dyn|.
@@ -335,13 +381,16 @@ Currently the name is "python24.dll".  That is for Python 2.4.  To know for
 sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "python\d*.dll\c".

 ==============================================================================
-7. Python 3						*python3*
+8. Python 3						*python3*

 							*:py3* *:python3*
-The |:py3| and |:python3| commands work similar to |:python|.
-							*:py3file*
+The |:py3| and |:python3| commands work similar to |:python|.  A simple check
+if the `:py3` command is wrong: >
+	:py3 print("Hello")
+<							*:py3file*
 The |:py3file| command works similar to |:pyfile|.

+
 Vim can be built in four ways (:version output):
 1. No Python support	    (-python, -python3)
 2. Python 2 support only    (+python or +python/dyn, -python3)
@@ -380,7 +429,7 @@ To work around such problems there are these options:
 							*has-python*
 You can test what Python version is available with: >
 	if has('python')
-	  echo 'there is Pyton 2.x'
+	  echo 'there is Python 2.x'
  	elseif has('python3')
 	  echo 'there is Python 3.x'
 	endif
--- a/runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Oct 27
+*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 02


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Shugo Maeda
@@ -25,7 +25,8 @@ downloading Ruby there.
 1. Commands						*ruby-commands*

 							*:ruby* *:rub*
-:rub[y] {cmd}		Execute Ruby command {cmd}.
+:rub[y] {cmd}		Execute Ruby command {cmd}.  A command to try it out: >
+				:ruby print "Hello"

 :rub[y] << {endpattern}
 {script}
@@ -40,9 +41,6 @@ downloading Ruby there.
 			wasn't compiled in.  To avoid errors, see
 			|script-here|.

-Command to try it out: >
-	:ruby print "Hello"   # this is a comment
-
 Example Vim script: >

 	function! RedGem()
@@ -211,6 +209,8 @@ for sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "ruby\d*.dll\c".

 If you want to build Vim with Ruby 1.9.1, you need to edit the config.h file
 and comment-out the check for _MSC_VER.
+You may also need to rename the include directory name to match the version,
+strangely for Ruby 1.9.3 the directory is called 1.9.1.

 ==============================================================================
 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
--- a/runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Aug 16
+*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 02


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Ingo Wilken
@@ -27,7 +27,9 @@ comments, ideas etc to <Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de>
 1. Commands				*tcl-ex-commands* *E571* *E572*

 							*:tcl* *:tc*
-:tc[l] {cmd}		Execute Tcl command {cmd}.
+:tc[l] {cmd}		Execute Tcl command {cmd}.  A simple check if `:tcl`
+			is working: >
+				:tcl puts "Hello"

 :[range]tc[l] << {endmarker}
 {script}
--- a/runtime/doc/indent.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/indent.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*indent.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jul 15
+*indent.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 30


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -132,8 +132,8 @@ The 'cinoptions' option sets how Vim performs indentation.  The value after
 the option character can be one of these (N is any number):
 	N	indent N spaces
 	-N	indent N spaces to the left
-	Ns	N times 'shiftwidth spaces
-	-Ns	N times 'shiftwidth spaces to the left
+	Ns	N times 'shiftwidth' spaces
+	-Ns	N times 'shiftwidth' spaces to the left

 In the list below,
 "N" represents a number of your choice (the number can be negative).  When
@@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ The examples below assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 		       c3			    c3
 		      ) && c4;			) && c4;
 <
-							*cino-2*
+							*cino-w*
 	wN    When in unclosed parentheses and N is non-zero and either
 	      using "(0" or "u0", respectively, or using "U0" and the unclosed
 	      parentheses is the first non-white character in its line, line
@@ -459,6 +459,22 @@ The examples below assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 			      argument);	argument);
 		  a_short_line(argument,    a_short_line(argument,
 			       argument);		 argument);
+<
+							*cino-k*
+	kN    When in unclosed parentheses which follow "if", "for" or
+	      "while" and N is non-zero, overrides the behaviour defined by
+	      "(N": causes the indent to be N characters relative to the outer
+	      context (i.e. the line where "if", "for" or "while" is).  Has
+	      no effect on deeper levels of nesting.  Affects flags like "wN"
+	      only for the "if", "for" and "while" conditions.  If 0, defaults
+	      to behaviour defined by the "(N" flag.  (default: 0).
+
+		cino=(0			   cino=(0,ks >
+		  if (condition1	    if (condition1
+		      && condition2)		    && condition2)
+		      action();			action();
+		  function(argument1	    function(argument1
+			   && argument2);	     && argument2);
 <
 							*cino-m*
 	mN    When N is non-zero, line up a line starting with a closing
@@ -524,20 +540,20 @@ The examples below assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
 								*cino-star*
 	*N    Vim searches for unclosed comments at most N lines away.  This
 	      limits the time needed to search for the start of a comment.
-	      If your /* */ comments stop indenting afer N lines this is the
+	      If your /* */ comments stop indenting after N lines this is the
 	      value you will want to change.
 	      (default 70 lines).

 								*cino-#*
 	#N    When N is non-zero recognize shell/Perl comments, starting with
-	      '#'.  Default N is zero: don't recognizes '#' comments.  Note
+	      '#'.  Default N is zero: don't recognize '#' comments.  Note
 	      that lines starting with # will still be seen as preprocessor
 	      lines.


 The defaults, spelled out in full, are:
 	cinoptions=>s,e0,n0,f0,{0,}0,^0,L-1,:s,=s,l0,b0,gs,hs,N0,ps,ts,is,+s,
-			c3,C0,/0,(2s,us,U0,w0,W0,m0,j0,J0,)20,*70,#0
+			c3,C0,/0,(2s,us,U0,w0,W0,k0,m0,j0,J0,)20,*70,#0

 Vim puts a line in column 1 if:
 - It starts with '#' (preprocessor directives), if 'cinkeys' contains '#'.
@@ -706,6 +722,43 @@ Indent for a continuation line: >
 	let g:pyindent_continue = '&sw * 2'


+R								*ft-r-indent*
+
+Function arguments are aligned if they span for multiple lines. If you prefer
+do not have the arguments of functions aligned, put in your |vimrc|:
+>
+   let r_indent_align_args = 0
+<
+All lines beginning with a comment character, #, get the same indentation
+level of the normal R code. Users of Emacs/ESS may be used to have lines
+beginning with a single # indented in the 40th column, ## indented as R code,
+and ### not indented. If you prefer that lines beginning with comment
+characters are aligned as they are by Emacs/ESS, put in your |vimrc|:
+>
+   let r_indent_ess_comments = 1
+<
+If you prefer that lines beginning with a single # are aligned at a column
+different from the 40th one, you should set a new value to the variable
+r_indent_comment_column, as in the example below:
+>
+   let r_indent_comment_column = 30
+<
+Any code after a line that ends with "<-" is indented. Emacs/ESS does not
+indent the code if it is a top level function. If you prefer that the
+Vim-R-plugin behaves like Emacs/ESS in this regard, put in your |vimrc|:
+>
+   let r_indent_ess_compatible = 1
+<
+Below is an example of indentation with and without this option enabled:
+>
+   ### r_indent_ess_compatible = 1           ### r_indent_ess_compatible = 0
+   foo <-                                    foo <-
+       function(x)                               function(x)
+   {                                             {
+       paste(x)                                      paste(x)
+   }                                             }
+<
+
 SHELL							*ft-sh-indent*

 The amount of indent applied under various circumstances in a shell file can
--- a/runtime/doc/index.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/index.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jan 04
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jul 25


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -719,6 +719,8 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 |gH|		gH		   start Select line mode
 |gI|		gI		2  like "I", but always start in column 1
 |gJ|		gJ		2  join lines without inserting space
+|gN|		gN	      1,2  find the previous match with the last used
+				   search pattern and Visually select it
 |gP|		["x]gP		2  put the text [from register x] before the
 				   cursor N times, leave the cursor after it
 |gQ|		gQ		    switch to "Ex" mode with Vim editing
@@ -751,6 +753,8 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 				   lines down
 |gk|		gk		1  like "k", but when 'wrap' on go N screen
 				   lines up
+|gn|		gn	      1,2  find the next match with the last used
+				   search pattern and Visually select it
 |gm|		gm		1  go to character at middle of the screenline
 |go|		go		1  cursor to byte N in the buffer
 |gp|		["x]gp		2  put the text [from register x] after the
@@ -1261,7 +1265,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:k|		:k		set a mark
 |:keepalt|	:keepa[lt]	following command keeps the alternate file
 |:keepmarks|	:kee[pmarks]	following command keeps marks where they are
-|:keepjumps|	:keepj[jumps]	following command keeps jumplist and marks
+|:keepjumps|	:keepj[umps]	following command keeps jumplist and marks
 |:lNext|	:lN[ext]	go to previous entry in location list
 |:lNfile|	:lNf[ile]	go to last entry in previous file
 |:list|		:l[ist]		print lines
--- a/runtime/doc/insert.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/insert.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Nov 10
+*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jul 10


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -383,8 +383,11 @@ will then always put the cursor on it).  Or use CTRL-\ CTRL-O, but then
 beware of the cursor possibly being beyond the end of the line.

 The CTRL-O command takes you to Normal mode.  If you then use a command enter
-Insert mode again it doesn't nest.  Thus when typing "a<C-O>a" and then <Esc>
-takes you back to Normal mode, you do not need to type <Esc> twice.
+Insert mode again it normally doesn't nest.  Thus when typing "a<C-O>a" and
+then <Esc> takes you back to Normal mode, you do not need to type <Esc> twice.
+An exception is when not typing the command, e.g. when executing a mapping or
+sourcing a script.  This makes mappings work that briefly switch to Insert
+mode.

 The shifted cursor keys are not available on all terminals.

@@ -398,7 +401,12 @@ An example for using CTRL-G u: >

 This redefines the backspace key to start a new undo sequence.  You can now
 undo the effect of the backspace key, without changing what you typed before
-that, with CTRL-O u.
+that, with CTRL-O u.  Another example: >
+
+	:inoremap <CR> <C-]><C-G>u<CR>
+
+This breaks undo at each line break.  It also expands abbreviations before
+this.

 Using CTRL-O splits undo: the text typed before and after it is undone
 separately.  If you want to avoid this (e.g., in a mapping) you might be able
@@ -483,7 +491,7 @@ option}
 							*ins-smarttab*
 When the 'smarttab' option is on, a <Tab> inserts 'shiftwidth' positions at
 the beginning of a line and 'tabstop' positions in other places.  This means
-that often spaces instead of a <Tab> character are inserted.  When 'smarttab
+that often spaces instead of a <Tab> character are inserted.  When 'smarttab'
 is off, a <Tab> always inserts 'tabstop' positions, and 'shiftwidth' is only
 used for ">>" and the like.  {not in Vi}

@@ -1009,8 +1017,13 @@ The function must return the column where the completion starts.  It must be a
 number between zero and the cursor column "col('.')".  This involves looking
 at the characters just before the cursor and including those characters that
 could be part of the completed item.  The text between this column and the
-cursor column will be replaced with the matches.  Return -1 if no completion
-can be done.
+cursor column will be replaced with the matches.
+
+Special return values:
+   -1 If no completion can be done, the completion will be cancelled with an
+      error message.
+   -2 To cancel silently and stay in completion mode.
+   -3 To cancel silently and leave completion mode.

 On the second invocation the arguments are:
   a:findstart  0
@@ -1020,6 +1033,23 @@ On the second invocation the arguments are:
 The function must return a List with the matching words.  These matches
 usually include the "a:base" text.  When there are no matches return an empty
 List.
+
+In order to return more information than the matching words, return a Dict
+that contains the List.  The Dict can have these items:
+	words		The List of matching words (mandatory).
+	refresh		A string to control re-invocation of the function
+			(optional).
+			The only value currently recognized is "always", the
+			effect is that the function is called whenever the
+			leading text is changed.
+Other items are ignored.
+
+For acting upon end of completion, see the |CompleteDone| autocommand event.
+
+For example, the function can contain this: >
+	let matches = ... list of words ...
+	return {'words': matches, 'refresh': 'always'}
+<
 						*complete-items*
 Each list item can either be a string or a Dictionary.  When it is a string it
 is used as the completion.  When it is a Dictionary it can contain these
@@ -1040,9 +1070,10 @@ items:
 	empty		when non-zero this match will be added even when it is
 			an empty string

-All of these except 'icase' must be a string.  If an item does not meet these
-requirements then an error message is given and further items in the list are
-not used.  You can mix string and Dictionary items in the returned list.
+All of these except 'icase', 'dup' and 'empty' must be a string.  If an item
+does not meet these requirements then an error message is given and further
+items in the list are not used.  You can mix string and Dictionary items in
+the returned list.

 The "menu" item is used in the popup menu and may be truncated, thus it should
 be relatively short.  The "info" item can be longer, it will  be displayed in
--- a/runtime/doc/intro.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/intro.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 15
+*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Sep 05


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -394,6 +394,8 @@ CTRL-{char}	{char} typed as a control character; that is, typing {char}
 							*quotecommandquote*
 "command"	A reference to a command that you can type is enclosed in
 		double quotes.
+`command`		New style command, this distinguishes it from other
+		quoted text and strings.

 					*key-notation* *key-codes* *keycodes*
 These names for keys are used in the documentation.  They can also be used
--- a/runtime/doc/map.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/map.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jun 13
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Apr 13


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ text before the cursor and start omni completion when some condition is met.

 For abbreviations |v:char| is set to the character that was typed to trigger
 the abbreviation.  You can use this to decide how to expand the {lhs}.  You
-you should not either insert or change the v:char.
+should not either insert or change the v:char.

 Be very careful about side effects!  The expression is evaluated while
 obtaining characters, you may very well make the command dysfunctional.
@@ -237,11 +237,18 @@ For this reason the following is blocked:
 - Editing another buffer.
 - The |:normal| command.
 - Moving the cursor is allowed, but it is restored afterwards.
- You can use getchar(), but the existing typeahead isn't seen and new
-  typeahead is discarded.
 If you want the mapping to do any of these let the returned characters do
 that.

+You can use getchar(), it consumes typeahead if there is any. E.g., if you
+have these mappings: >
+  inoremap <expr> <C-L> nr2char(getchar())
+  inoremap <expr> <C-L>x "foo"
+If you now type CTRL-L nothing happens yet, Vim needs the next character to
+decide what mapping to use.  If you type 'x' the second mapping is used and
+"foo" is inserted.  If you type any other key the first mapping is used,
+getchar() gets the typed key and returns it.
+
 Here is an example that inserts a list number that increases: >
 	let counter = 0
 	inoremap <expr> <C-L> ListItem()
@@ -520,7 +527,7 @@ mappings.
 <LocalLeader> is just like <Leader>, except that it uses "maplocalleader"
 instead of "mapleader".  <LocalLeader> is to be used for mappings which are
 local to a buffer.  Example: >
-      :map <LocalLeader>q  \DoItNow
+      :map <buffer> <LocalLeader>A  oanother line<Esc>
 <
 In a global plugin <Leader> should be used and in a filetype plugin
 <LocalLeader>.  "mapleader" and "maplocalleader" can be equal.  Although, if
@@ -544,6 +551,7 @@ construct can be used:
 	<Char-123>	character 123
 	<Char-033>	character 27
 	<Char-0x7f>	character 127
+	<S-Char-114>    character 114 ('r') shifted ('R')
 This is useful to specify a (multi-byte) character in a 'keymap' file.
 Upper and lowercase differences are ignored.

@@ -1180,7 +1188,7 @@ reported if any are supplied).  However, it is possible to specify that the
 command can take arguments, using the -nargs attribute.  Valid cases are:

 	-nargs=0    No arguments are allowed (the default)
-	-nargs=1    Exactly one argument is require, it includes spaces 
+	-nargs=1    Exactly one argument is required, it includes spaces 
 	-nargs=*    Any number of arguments are allowed (0, 1, or many),
 		    separated by white space
 	-nargs=?    0 or 1 arguments are allowed
@@ -1211,6 +1219,7 @@ completion can be enabled:

 	-complete=augroup	autocmd groups
 	-complete=buffer	buffer names
+	-complete=behave	:behave suboptions
 	-complete=color		color schemes
 	-complete=command	Ex command (and arguments)
 	-complete=compiler	compilers
@@ -1225,6 +1234,7 @@ completion can be enabled:
 	-complete=function	function name
 	-complete=help		help subjects
 	-complete=highlight	highlight groups
+	-complete=history	:history suboptions
 	-complete=locale	locale names (as output of locale -a)
 	-complete=mapping	mapping name
 	-complete=menu		menus
@@ -1234,6 +1244,7 @@ completion can be enabled:
 	-complete=syntax	syntax file names |'syntax'|
 	-complete=tag		tags
 	-complete=tag_listfiles	tags, file names are shown when CTRL-D is hit
+	-complete=user		user names
 	-complete=var		user variables
 	-complete=custom,{func} custom completion, defined via {func}
 	-complete=customlist,{func} custom completion, defined via {func}
--- a/runtime/doc/mbyte.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/mbyte.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jul 18
+*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Oct 06


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar et al.
@@ -475,7 +475,7 @@ Useful utilities for converting the charset:
 	|charset| converter.  Supported |charset|: ISO-2022-CN, ISO-2022-JP,
 	ISO-2022-KR, EUC-CN, EUC-JP, EUC-KR, EUC-TW, UTF-7, UTF-8, ISO-8859
 	series, Shift_JIS, Big5 and HZ.  Lv can be found at:
-	http://www.ff.iij4u.or.jp/~nrt/freeware/lv4495.tar.gz
+	http://www.ff.iij4u.or.jp/~nrt/lv/index.html


 							*mbyte-conversion*
@@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ Each field means:
 	    charsets, such as JIS X 0208, if this field is 0, code points has
 	    the same value as GL, and GR if 1.

-For example, in case of a 14 dots font corresponding to JIS X 0208, it is
+For example, in case of a 16 dots font corresponding to JIS X 0208, it is
 written like:
    -misc-fixed-medium-r-normal--16-110-100-100-c-160-jisx0208.1990-0

@@ -797,8 +797,8 @@ is suitable for complex input, such as CJK.
  number of Hira-gana characters are 76.  So, first, we pre-input text as
  pronounced in Hira-gana, second, we convert Hira-gana to Kanji or Kata-Kana,
  if needed.  There are some Kana-Kanji conversion server: jserver
-  (distributed with Wnn, see below) and canna.  Canna could be found at:
-  ftp://ftp.nec.co.jp/pub/Canna/ (no longer works).
+  (distributed with Wnn, see below) and canna.  Canna can be found at:
+  http://canna.sourceforge.jp/

 There is a good input system: Wnn4.2.  Wnn 4.2 contains,
    xwnmo (|IM-server|)
@@ -857,7 +857,7 @@ Use the RPM or port for your system.


 USING XIM			*multibyte-input* *E284* *E286* *E287* *E288*
-				*E285* *E291* *E292* *E290* *E289*
+				*E285* *E289*

 Note that Display and Input are independent.  It is possible to see your
 language even though you have no input method for it.  But when your Display
@@ -1085,6 +1085,13 @@ Since the mapping is defined with |:lnoremap| the resulting quote will not be
 used for the start of another character.
 The "accents" keymap uses this.				*keymap-accents*

+The first column can also be in |<>| form:
+	<C-c>		Ctrl-C
+	<A-c>		Alt-c
+	<A-C>		Alt-C
+Note that the Alt mappings may not work, depending on your keyboard and
+terminal.
+
 Although it's possible to have more than one character in the second column,
 this is unusual.  But you can use various ways to specify the character: >
 	A	a		literal character
--- a/runtime/doc/mlang.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/mlang.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Dec 11
+*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 15


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ use of "-" and "_".
 			system.  Some systems accept aliases like "en" or
 			"en_US", but some only accept the full specification
 			like "en_US.ISO_8859-1".  On Unix systems you can use
-			the this command to see what locales are supported: >
+			this command to see what locales are supported: >
 				:!locale -a
 <			With the "messages" argument the language used for
 			messages is set.  This can be different when you want,
--- a/runtime/doc/motion.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/motion.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jun 02
+*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 04


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ or change text.  The following operators are available:
 	|>|	>	shift right
 	|<|	<	shift left
 	|zf|	zf	define a fold
-	|g@|    g@      call function set with the 'operatorfunc' option
+	|g@|	g@	call function set with the 'operatorfunc' option

 If the motion includes a count and the operator also had a count before it,
 the two counts are multiplied.  For example: "2d3w" deletes six words.
@@ -326,6 +326,7 @@ gg			Goto line [count], default first line, on the first
 			non-blank character |linewise|.  If 'startofline' not
 			set, keep the same column.

+							*:[range]*
 :[range]		Set the cursor on the last line number in [range].
 			[range] can also be just one line number, e.g., ":1"
 			or ":'m".
@@ -513,6 +514,8 @@ always select less text than the "a" commands.
 These commands are {not in Vi}.
 These commands are not available when the |+textobjects| feature has been
 disabled at compile time.
+Also see `gn` and `gN`, operating on the last search pattern.
+
 							*v_aw* *aw*
 aw			"a word", select [count] words (see |word|).
 			Leading or trailing white space is included, but not
@@ -689,6 +692,7 @@ movement commands are used.
 	"daw"	delete a word				*daw*
 	"diW"	delete inner WORD (see |WORD|)		*diW*
 	"daW"	delete a WORD (see |WORD|)		*daW*
+	"dgn"   delete the next search pattern match    *dgn*
 	"dd"	delete one line				|dd|
 	"dis"	delete inner sentence			*dis*
 	"das"	delete a sentence			*das*
@@ -750,6 +754,13 @@ m[  or  m]		Set the |'[| or |']| mark.  Useful when an operator is
 			to be simulated by multiple commands.  (does not move
 			the cursor, this is not a motion command).

+						*m<* *m>*
+m<  or  m>		Set the |'<| or |'>| mark.  Useful to change what the
+			`gv` command selects.  (does not move the cursor, this
+			is not a motion command).
+			Note that the Visual mode cannot be set, only the
+			start and end position.
+
 						*:ma* *:mark* *E191*
 :[range]ma[rk] {a-zA-Z'}
 			Set mark {a-zA-Z'} at last line number in [range],
@@ -1017,8 +1028,6 @@ CTRL-O			Go to [count] Older cursor position in jump list
 <Tab>		or					*CTRL-I* *<Tab>*
 CTRL-I			Go to [count] newer cursor position in jump list
 			(not a motion command).
-			In a |quickfix-window| it takes you to the position of
-			the error under the cursor.
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available without the |+jumplist| feature}

--- a/runtime/doc/netbeans.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/netbeans.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 29
+*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 26


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur et al.
@@ -263,6 +263,12 @@ The messages are currently sent over a socket.  Since the messages are in
 plain UTF-8 text this protocol could also be used with any other communication
 mechanism.

+Netbeans messages are processed when Vim is idle, waiting for user input.
+When Vim is run in non-interactive mode, for example when running an automated
+test case that sources a Vim script, the idle loop may not be called often
+enough. In that case, insert |:sleep| commands in the Vim script. The |:sleep|
+command does invoke Netbeans messages processing.
+
 6.1 Kinds of messages		|nb-messages|
 6.2 Terms			|nb-terms|
 6.3 Commands			|nb-commands|
@@ -833,11 +839,16 @@ These errors occur when a message violates the protocol:
 			signs.

 							*:nbkey*
-:nb[key] {key}		Pass the {key} to the Vim Controller for processing
-
-When a hot-key has been installed with the specialKeys command, this command
-can be used to generate a hotkey messages to the Vim Controller. The events
-newDotAndMark, keyCommand and keyAtPos are generated (in this order).
+:nb[key] {key}		Pass the {key} to the Vim Controller for processing.
+			When a hot-key has been installed with the specialKeys
+			command, this command can be used to generate a hotkey
+			message to the Vim Controller.
+			This command can also be used to pass any text to the
+			Vim  Controller. It is used by Pyclewn, for example,
+			to build the complete set of gdb commands as Vim user
+			commands.
+			The events newDotAndMark, keyCommand and keyAtPos are
+			generated (in this order).


 ==============================================================================
--- a/runtime/doc/options.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/options.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jul 07
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Oct 21


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -301,9 +301,8 @@ You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
 			copying the value.
 			{not in Vi}

-:se[t] {option}<	Set the local value of {option} to its global value by
-			making it empty.  Only makes sense for |global-local|
-			options.
+:se[t] {option}<	For |global-local| options: Remove the local value of
+			{option}, so that the global value will be used.
 			{not in Vi}

 							*:setg* *:setglobal*
@@ -401,6 +400,9 @@ On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too.  The name between {} can
 contain non-id characters then.  Note that if you want to use this for the
 "gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.

+On MS-Windows, if $HOME is not defined as an environment variable, then
+at runtime Vim will set it to the expansion of $HOMEDRIVE$HOMEPATH.
+
 NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set"
 command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let".

@@ -742,7 +744,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	- Reset the 'rightleft' option.
 	- Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
 	Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
-	option.
+	option).
 	Also see |arabic.txt|.

 					*'arabicshape'* *'arshape'*
@@ -754,7 +756,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			feature}
 	When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
 	corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
-	take affect.  Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
+	take effect.  Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
 	one which encompasses:
 	  a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
 	     within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
@@ -1045,6 +1047,11 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
 	default value.  "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.

+	WARNING: Not having a backup file means that when Vim fails to write
+	your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
+	lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only disable
+	backups if you don't care about losing the file.
+
 	Note that environment variables are not expanded.  If you want to use
 	$HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: >
 		:let backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') . '/tmp/*'
@@ -1100,8 +1107,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Vim does not try to send a message to an external debugger (Netbeans
 	or Sun Workshop).

-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.

 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'balloonexpr' |textlock|.
@@ -1217,7 +1224,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			|:bwipeout|

 	CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer
-	are lost without a warning.
+	are lost without a warning.  Also, these values may break autocommands
+	that switch between buffers temporarily.
 	This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
 	special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.

@@ -1444,6 +1452,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	This option is a list of comma separated names.
 	These names are recognized:

+						*clipboard-unnamed*
 	unnamed		When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*'
 			for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
 			would normally go to the unnamed register.  When a
@@ -1453,6 +1462,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			explicitly accessed using the "* notation.  Also see
 			|gui-clipboard|.

+						*clipboard-unnamedplus*
 	unnamedplus	A variant of "unnamed" flag which uses the clipboard
 			register '+' (|quoteplus|) instead of register '*' for
 			all operations except yank.  Yank shall copy the text
@@ -1462,6 +1472,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			Availability can be checked with: >
 				if has('unnamedplus')
 <
+						*clipboard-autoselect*
 	autoselect	Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present,
 			then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual
 			area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the
@@ -1473,9 +1484,16 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			"autoselect" flag is used.
 			Also applies to the modeless selection.

+						*clipboard-autoselectplus*
+	autoselectplus  Like "autoselect" but using the + register instead of
+			the * register.  Compare to the 'P' flag in
+			'guioptions'.
+
+						*clipboard-autoselectml*
 	autoselectml	Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection
 			only.  Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'.

+						*clipboard-html*
 	html		When the clipboard contains HTML, use this when
 			pasting.  When putting text on the clipboard, mark it
 			as HTML.  This works to copy rendered HTML from
@@ -1486,6 +1504,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			Only supported for GTK version 2 and later.
 			Only available with the |+multi_byte| feature.

+						*clipboard-exclude*
 	exclude:{pattern}
 			Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of
 			the terminal 'term'.  If there is a match, no
@@ -2122,7 +2141,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			and the cursor is right in front of the searched
 			character, the cursor won't move. When not included,
 			the cursor would skip over it and jump to the
-			following occurence.
+			following occurrence.

 	POSIX flags.  These are not included in the Vi default value, except
 	when $VIM_POSIX was set on startup. |posix|
@@ -3032,8 +3051,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr".  It is evaluated
 	for each line to obtain its fold level.  See |fold-expr|.

-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.
 	This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
 	on.

@@ -3175,8 +3194,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
 	fold.  See |fold-foldtext|.

-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.

 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|.
@@ -3221,8 +3240,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	format function will be used |C-indenting|.
 	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
 	about including spaces and backslashes.
-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.

 						*'formatexpr'* *'fex'*
 'formatexpr' 'fex'	string (default "")
@@ -3255,9 +3274,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using
 	the internal format mechanism.

-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working, since changing
-	the buffer text is not allowed.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working,
+	since changing the buffer text is not allowed.

 						*'fsync'* *'fs'*
 'fsync' 'fs'		boolean	(default on)
@@ -3541,6 +3560,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice
 	made by Pango/Xft.

+	Windows +multibyte only:		*guifontwide_win_mbyte*
+
+	If set and vaild, 'guifontwide' is used for IME instead of 'guifont'.
+
 						*'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'*
 'guiheadroom' 'ghr'	number	(default 50)
 			global
@@ -3554,8 +3577,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	screen.

 						*'guioptions'* *'go'*
-'guioptions' 'go'	string	(default "gmrLtT"   (MS-Windows),
-					 "agimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena))
+'guioptions' 'go'	string	(default "egmrLtT"   (MS-Windows),
+					 "aegimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena))
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 			{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
@@ -3581,6 +3604,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
 		by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
 		The same applies to the modeless selection.
+								*'go-P'*
+	  'P'	Like autoselect but using the "+ register instead of the "*
+	  	register.
 								*'go-A'*
 	  'A'	Autoselect for the modeless selection.  Like 'a', but only
 		applies to the modeless selection.
@@ -3769,9 +3795,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 'highlight' 'hl'	string	(default (as a single string):
 				     "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,
 				     e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,
-				     M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question,
-				     s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit,
-				     t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
+				     M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,N:CursorLineNr,
+				     r:Question,s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,
+				     c:VertSplit, t:Title,v:Visual,
+				     w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
 				     f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
 				     C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
 				     >:SignColumn,B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,
@@ -3797,6 +3824,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	|hl-ModeMsg|	 M  Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
 	|hl-LineNr|	 n  line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and
 			    when 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set.
+	|hl-CursorLineNr|  N like n for when 'cursorline' is set.
 	|hl-Question|	 r  |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
 	|hl-StatusLine|	 s  status line of current window |status-line|
 	|hl-StatusLineNC| S  status lines of not-current windows
@@ -3858,14 +3886,16 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	are not applied.
 	See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
 	When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
-	off with |:nohlsearch|.  As soon as you use a search command, the
-	highlighting comes back.
+	off with |:nohlsearch|.  This does not change the option value, as
+	soon as you use a search command, the highlighting comes back.
 	'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches.
 	When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
 	highlight all of the matched text.  However, this depends on where the
 	search starts.  This will be the first line in the window or the first
 	line below a closed fold.  A match in a previous line which is not
 	drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line.
+	You can specify whether the highlight status is restored on startup
+	with the 'h' flag in 'viminfo' |viminfo-h|.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

 						*'history'* *'hi'*
@@ -4074,8 +4104,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	found.  Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
 	Also used for |<cfile>|.

-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.

 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|.
@@ -4139,8 +4169,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	See |indent-expression|.
 	NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set.

-	The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a
+	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.

 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|.
@@ -4569,24 +4599,31 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command.  It is a
 	comma separated list of string settings.
+	  						*lcs-eol*
 	  eol:c		Character to show at the end of each line.  When
 			omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
 			line.
+	  						*lcs-tab*
 	  tab:xy	Two characters to be used to show a tab.  The first
 			char is used once.  The second char is repeated to
 			fill the space that the tab normally occupies.
 			"tab:>-" will show a tab that takes four spaces as
 			">---".  When omitted, a tab is show as ^I.
+	  						*lcs-trail*
 	  trail:c	Character to show for trailing spaces.  When omitted,
 			trailing spaces are blank.
+	  						*lcs-extends*
 	  extends:c	Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
 			off and the line continues beyond the right of the
 			screen.
+	  						*lcs-precedes*
 	  precedes:c	Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'
 			is off and there is text preceding the character
 			visible in the first column.
+	  						*lcs-conceal*
 	  conceal:c	Character to show in place of concealed text, when
 			'conceallevel' is set to 1.
+	  						*lcs-nbsp*
 	  nbsp:c	Character to show for a non-breakable space (character
 			0xA0, 160).  Left blank when omitted.

@@ -4861,6 +4898,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   written.  A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
 	   values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
 	   reset.
+	This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the
+	result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost,
+	FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event.  See |gzip-example| for
+	an explanation.
 	When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
 	will be ignored.

@@ -5049,7 +5090,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
 	alpha	If included, single alphabetical characters will be
 		incremented or decremented.  This is useful for a list with a
-		letter index a), b), etc.			*octal-number*
+		letter index a), b), etc.	  	*octal-nrformats*
 	octal	If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
 		to be octal.  Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
 	hex	If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
@@ -5069,7 +5110,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	number.
 	When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
 	characters are put before the number.
-	See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
+	See |hl-LineNr|  and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for
+	the number.
 	When setting this option, 'relativenumber' is reset.

 						*'numberwidth'* *'nuw'*
@@ -5102,6 +5144,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	invoked and what it should return.
 	This option is usually set by a filetype plugin:
 	|:filetype-plugin-on|
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.


 			    *'opendevice'* *'odev'* *'noopendevice'* *'noodev'*
@@ -5237,7 +5281,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	recognized as a compressed file.
 	Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

-					*'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347*
+				*'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347* *E854*
 'path' 'pa'		string	(default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,,"
 				   on OS/2:	  ".,/emx/include,,"
 				   other systems: ".,,")
@@ -5468,7 +5512,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	number.
 	When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
 	characters are put before the number.
-	See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
+	See |hl-LineNr|  and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for
+	the number.
 	When setting this option, 'number' is reset.

 						*'remap'* *'noremap'*
@@ -5890,16 +5935,20 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	security reasons.

 						*'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'*
-'shellcmdflag' 'shcf'	string	(default: "-c", MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
-					does not contain "sh" somewhere: "/c")
+'shellcmdflag' 'shcf'	string	(default: "-c";
+				 MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' does not
+				 contain "sh" somewhere: "/c")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
 	"bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir".  For the MS-DOS-like
 	systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to
 	reduce the need to set this option by the user.  It's not used for
-	OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself).  See |option-backslash| about
-	including spaces and backslashes.  See |dos-shell|.
+	OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself).
+	On Unix it can have more than one flag.  Each white space separated
+	part is passed as an argument to the shell command.
+	See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+	Also see |dos-shell| for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.

@@ -6027,8 +6076,18 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands
 	1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands

+						*'shellxescape'* *'sxe'*
+'shellxescape' 'sxe'	string	(default: "";
+				 for MS-DOS and MS-Windows: "\"&|<>()@^")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When 'shellxquote' is set to "(" then the characters listed in this
+	option will be escaped with a '^' character.  This makes it possible
+	to execute most external commands with cmd.exe.
+
 						*'shellxquote'* *'sxq'*
 'shellxquote' 'sxq'	string	(default: "";
+					for Win32, when 'shell' is cmd.exe: "("
 					for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh"
 					somewhere: "\""
 					for Unix, when using system(): "\"")
@@ -6038,11 +6097,15 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	the "!" and ":!" commands.  Includes the redirection.  See
 	'shellquote' to exclude the redirection.  It's probably not useful
 	to set both options.
-	This is an empty string by default.  Known to be useful for
-	third-party shells when using the Win32 version, such as the MKS Korn
-	Shell or bash, where it should be "\"".  The default is adjusted
-	according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option
-	by the user.  See |dos-shell|.
+	When the value is '(' then ')' is appended. When the value is '"('
+	then ')"' is appended.
+	When the value is '(' then also see 'shellxescape'.
+	This is an empty string by default on most systems, but is known to be
+	useful for on Win32 version, either for cmd.exe which automatically
+	strips off the first and last quote on a command, or 3rd-party shells
+	such as the MKS Korn Shell or bash, where it should be "\"".  The
+	default is adjusted according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need
+	to set this option by the user.  See |dos-shell|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.

@@ -6060,6 +6123,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			local to buffer
 	Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent.  Used for
 	|'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc.
+	When zero the 'ts' value will be used.  Use the |shiftwidth()|
+	function to get the effective shiftwidth value.

 						*'shortmess'* *'shm'*
 'shortmess' 'shm'	string	(Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "",
@@ -6263,7 +6328,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
 	case characters.  Only used when the search pattern is typed and
 	'ignorecase' option is on.  Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
-	":g" and ":s".  Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc..  After
+	":g" and ":s".  Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.  After
 	"*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command,
 	recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
@@ -6323,6 +6388,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'.  However,
 	commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.
 	When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.
+	When 'sts' is negative, the value of 'shiftwidth' is used.
 	'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.
 	See also |ins-expandtab|.  When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of
 	spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
@@ -6536,6 +6602,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	evaluated and the result is used as the option value.  Example: >
 		:set statusline=%!MyStatusLine()
 <	The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too.
+	Note that the "%!" expression is evaluated in the context of the
+	current window and buffer, while %{} items are evaluated in the
+	context of the window that the statusline belongs to.

 	When there is error while evaluating the option then it will be made
 	empty to avoid further errors.  Otherwise screen updating would loop.
@@ -6641,8 +6710,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the
 	real current buffer.

-	The 'statusline' option may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
-	|sandbox-option|.
+	The 'statusline' option will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from
+	a modeline, see |sandbox-option|.

 	It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
 	evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|.
@@ -6755,8 +6824,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   usetab	Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab
 			pages.
 	   split	If included, split the current window before loading
-			a buffer.  Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
-			Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors.
+			a buffer for a |quickfix| command that display errors.
+			Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
 	   newtab	Like "split", but open a new tab page.  Overrules
 			"split" when both are present.

@@ -7085,8 +7154,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by
 	non-keyword characters (white space is preferred).  Maximum line
 	length is 510 bytes.
-	To obtain a file to be used here, check out the wordlist FAQ at
-	http://www.hyphenologist.co.uk .
+	To obtain a file to be used here, check out this ftp site:
+	ftp://ftp.ox.ac.uk/pub/wordlists/  First get the README file.
 	To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
 	after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
 	name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
@@ -7361,6 +7430,12 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   jsbterm	JSB term mouse handling.
 							*pterm-mouse*
 	   pterm	QNX pterm mouse handling.
+							*urxvt-mouse*
+	   urxvt	Mouse handling for the urxvt (rxvt-unicode) terminal.
+							*sgr-mouse*
+	   sgr		Mouse handling for the terminal that emits SGR-styled
+			mouse reporting. Works with xterm version 277 or
+			later.

 	The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm|
 	|+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|.
@@ -7373,6 +7448,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	or "xterm2" already.  The main use of this option is to set it to
 	"xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can
 	handle xterm mouse codes.
+	The "sgr" value will be set if the xterm version is 277 or later.
 	The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be
 	95 or higher.  This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse|
 	feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the
@@ -7424,7 +7500,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|.
 	The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from
 	before a reload to be saved for undo.
-	WARNING: this is a very new feature.  Use at your own risk!
+	When 'undofile' is turned off the undo file is NOT deleted.

 						*'undolevels'* *'ul'*
 'undolevels' 'ul'	number	(default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS,
@@ -7577,15 +7653,18 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	parameter.  The following is a list of the identifying characters and
 	the effect of their value.
 	CHAR	VALUE	~
+							*viminfo-!*
 	!	When included, save and restore global variables that start
 		with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
 		letter.  Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
 		and "_K_L_M" are not.  Nested List and Dict items may not be
 		read back correctly, you end up with an empty item.
+							*viminfo-quote*
 	"	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  Old name of
 		the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
 		backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
 		start of a comment!
+							*viminfo-%*
 	%	When included, save and restore the buffer list.  If Vim is
 		started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
 		restored.  If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
@@ -7595,38 +7674,48 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum
 		number of buffers that are stored.  Without a number all
 		buffers are stored.
+							*viminfo-'*
 	'	Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
 		are remembered.  This parameter must always be included when
 		'viminfo' is non-empty.
 		Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the
 		|changelist| are stored in the viminfo file.
+							*viminfo-/*
 	/	Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
 		saved.  If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
 		patterns are also saved.  When not included, the value of
 		'history' is used.
+							*viminfo-:*
 	:	Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
 		saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
+							*viminfo-<*
 	<	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  If zero then
 		registers are not saved.  When not included, all lines are
 		saved.  '"' is the old name for this item.
 		Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte.
+							*viminfo-@*
 	@	Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
 		saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
+							*viminfo-c*
 	c	When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the
 		'encoding' used when writing the file to the current
 		'encoding'.  See |viminfo-encoding|.
+							*viminfo-f*
 	f	Whether file marks need to be stored.  If zero, file marks ('0
 		to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored.  When not present or when
 		non-zero, they are all stored.  '0 is used for the current
 		cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo").
+							*viminfo-h*
 	h	Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo
 		file.  When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
 		has been used since the last search command.
+							*viminfo-n*
 	n	Name of the viminfo file.  The name must immediately follow
 		the 'n'.  Must be the last one!  If the "-i" argument was
 		given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one
 		given here with 'viminfo'.  Environment variables are expanded
 		when opening the file, not when setting the option.
+							*viminfo-r*
 	r	Removable media.  The argument is a string (up to the next
 		',').  This parameter can be given several times.  Each
 		specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
@@ -7635,6 +7724,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp".  Case is
 		ignored.  Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50
 		characters.
+							*viminfo-s*
 	s	Maximum size of an item in Kbyte.  If zero then registers are
 		not saved.  Currently only applies to registers.  The default
 		"s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text.
@@ -7786,9 +7876,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
 			feature}
 	A list of file patterns.  A file that matches with one of these
-	patterns is ignored when completing file or directory names, and
-	influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and |globpath()| unless
-	a flag is passed to disable this.
+	patterns is ignored when expanding |wildcards|, completing file or
+	directory names, and influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and
+	|globpath()| unless a flag is passed to disable this.
 	The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
 	Also see 'suffixes'.
 	Example: >
@@ -8090,8 +8180,13 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Make a backup before overwriting a file.  The backup is removed after
 	the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
-	also on.  Reset this option if your file system is almost full.  See
-	|backup-table| for another explanation.
+	also on.
+	WARNING: Switching this option off means that when Vim fails to write
+	your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you
+	lose both the original file and what you were writing.  Only reset
+	this option if your file system is almost full and it makes the write
+	fail (and make sure not to exit Vim until the write was successful).
+	See |backup-table| for another explanation.
 	When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
 	NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is
 	set.
--- a/runtime/doc/os_vms.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/os_vms.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_vms.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Aug 16
+*os_vms.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Aug 14


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL
@@ -38,9 +38,6 @@ You can download the Vim source code by ftp from the official Vim site:
 Or use one of the mirrors:
 	ftp://ftp.vim.org/pub/vim/MIRRORS

-You will need both the Unix and Extra archives to build vim.exe for VMS.
-For using Vim's full power you will need the runtime files as well.
-
 You can download precompiled executables from:
 	http://www.polarhome.com/vim/
 	ftp://ftp.polarhome.com/pub/vim/
@@ -75,7 +72,7 @@ See the file [.SRC]INSTALLVMS.TXT.
 4. Problems						*vms-problems*

 The code has been tested under Open VMS 6.2 - 8.2 on Alpha, VAX and IA64
-platforms with the DEC C compiler.  It should work without bigger problems.
+platforms with the DEC C compiler.  It should work without big problems.
 If your system does not have some include libraries you can tune up in
 OS_VMS_CONF.H file.

@@ -88,11 +85,11 @@ Also GTK, XPM library paths should be configured in MAKE_VMS.MMS

 Note: Under VAX it should work with the DEC C compiler without problems.  The
 VAX C compiler is not fully ANSI C compatible in pre-processor directives
-semantics, therefore you have to use a converter program what will do the lion
+semantics, therefore you have to use a converter program that will do the lion
 part of the job.  For detailed instructions read file INSTALLvms.txt

-MMS_VIM.EXE is build together with VIM.EXE, but for XD.EXE you should
-change to subdirectory and build it separately.
+MMS_VIM.EXE is build together with VIM.EXE, but for XXD.EXE you should
+change to a subdirectory and build it separately.

 CTAGS is not part of the Vim source distribution anymore, however the OpenVMS
 specific source might contain CTAGS source files as described above.
@@ -184,9 +181,9 @@ You may want to create .vimrc and .gvimrc files in your home directory

 The easiest way is just rename example files.  You may leave the menu file
 (MENU.VIM) and files vimrc and gvimrc in the original $VIM directory.  It will
-be default setup for all users, and for users it is enough just to have their
-own additions or resetting in their home directory in files .vimrc and .gvimrc.
-It should work without problems.
+be the default setup for all users, and for users it is enough to just have
+their own additions or resetting in their home directory in files .vimrc and
+.gvimrc.  It should work without problems.

 Note: Remember, system rc files (default for all users) don't have a leading
 ".".  So, system rc files are: >
@@ -200,7 +197,7 @@ and user customized rc files are: >
 	sys$login:.vimrc
 	sys$login:.gvimrc

-You can check that everything is on the right place with the :version command.
+You can check that everything is at the right place with the :version command.

 Example LOGIN.COM: >

@@ -209,15 +206,15 @@ Example LOGIN.COM: >
 	$ gv*im:== spawn/nowait/input=NLA0 mcr VIM:VIM.EXE -g -GEOMETRY 80x40
 	$ set disp/create/node=192.168.5.223/trans=tcpip

-Note: This set-up should be enough, if you are working on standalone server or
-clustered environment, but if you want to use Vim as internode editor in
+Note: This set-up should be enough, if you are working on a standalone server or
+clustered environment, but if you want to use Vim as an internode editor in
 DECNET environment, it will satisfy as well.
 You just have to define the "whole" path: >

 	$ define VIM "<server_name>[""user password""]::device:<path>"
 	$ vi*m :== "mcr VIM:VIM.EXE"

-As for example: >
+For example: >

 	$ define VIM "PLUTO::RF10:[UTIL.VIM]"
 	$ define VIM "PLUTO""ZAY mypass""::RF10:[UTIL.VIM]" ! if passwd required
@@ -300,12 +297,12 @@ For more information type $help set disp in VMS prompt.

 4) If you are working on MS-Windows or some other non X/Window environment
   you need to set up one X server and run Vim as in point 2.
-   For MS-Windows there are available free X servers as MIX , Omni X etc.,
+   For MS-Windows there are available free X servers as MIX, Omni X etc.,
   as well as excellent commercial products as eXcursion or ReflectionX with
   built-in DEC support.

 Please note, that executables without GUI are slightly faster during startup
-then with enabled GUI in character mode. Therefore, if you do not use GUI
+than with enabled GUI in character mode. Therefore, if you do not use GUI
 features, it is worth to choose non GUI executables.

 ==============================================================================
@@ -326,8 +323,8 @@ features, it is worth to choose non GUI executables.
 8.12 diff-mode
 8.13 Allow '$' in C keywords
 8.14 VIMTUTOR for beginners
-8.15 Slow start in console mode issue 
-8.16 Common VIM directory - different architectures 
+8.15 Slow start in console mode issue
+8.16 Common VIM directory - different architectures

 8.1 Backspace/delete

@@ -360,7 +357,7 @@ number, try these settings. >
 	:set nowritebackup   " does not have any purpose on VMS.  It's the
 			     " default.

-Recovery is working perfect as well from the default swap file.
+Recovery is working perfectly as well from the default swap file.
 Read more with :help swapfile

 (Claude Marinier <ClaudeMarinier@xwavesolutions.com> Vim 5.5, Zoltan Arpadffy
@@ -386,7 +383,7 @@ Note: You may use <,> brackets as well (device:<path>file.ext;version) as
 rf10:<user.zay.work>test.c;1

 (David Elins <delins@foliage.com>, Jerome Lauret
-<JLAURET@mail.chem.sunysb.edu> Vim 5.6 )
+<JLAURET@mail.chem.sunysb.edu> Vim 5.6)


 8.5 Remote host invocation
@@ -445,14 +442,14 @@ Terminal entry not found in termcap
    builtin_dumb
 defaulting to 'vt320'
 ---
-The solution is to define default terminal name: >
+The solution is to define the default terminal name: >

 	$ ! unknown terminal name.  Let us use vt320 or ansi instead.
 	$ ! Note: it's case sensitive
 	$ define term "vt320"

-Terminals from VT100 to VT320 (as V300, VT220, VT200 ) do not need any extra
-keyboard mappings.  They should work perfect as they are, including arrows,
+Terminals from VT100 to VT320 (as V300, VT220, VT200) do not need any extra
+keyboard mappings.  They should work perfectly as they are, including arrows,
 Ins, Del buttons etc., except Backspace in GUI mode.  To solve it, add to
 .gvimrc: >

@@ -465,8 +462,8 @@ your .vimrc file: >

 	set ttyfast	" set fast terminal

-Note: if you're using Vim on remote host or through very slow connection, it's
-recommended to avoid fast terminal option with: >
+Note: if you're using Vim on remote host or through a very slow connection, it's
+recommended to avoid the fast terminal option with: >

 	set nottyfast   " set terminal to slow mode

@@ -483,8 +480,8 @@ special commands to execute executables: >

 OpenVMS users always have to be aware that the Vim command :! "just" drop them
 to DCL prompt.  This feature is possible to use without any problem with all
-DCL commands, but if we want to execute some program as XXD, CTAGS, JTAGS etc.
-we're running into trouble if we follow the Vim documentation (see: help
+DCL commands, but if we want to execute some programs such as XXD, CTAGS, JTAGS,
+etc.  we're running into trouble if we follow the Vim documentation (see: help
 xxd).

 Solution: Execute with the MC command and add the full path to the executable.
@@ -534,7 +531,7 @@ Example: >

 	$define SYS$PRINT HP5ANSI

-You can print out whole buffer or just the marked area.
+You can print out the whole buffer or just the marked area.
 More info under :help hardcopy

 (Zoltan Arpadffy, Vim 6.0c)
@@ -561,16 +558,16 @@ will be confused after a window-resize.
 From 6.0 diff functionality has been implemented, but OpenVMS does not use
 GNU/Unix like diff therefore built in diff does not work.
 There is a simple solution to solve this anomaly.  Install a Unix like diff
-and Vim will work perfect in diff mode too.  You just have to redefine your
+and Vim will work perfectly in diff mode too.  You just have to redefine your
 diff program as: >

 	define /nolog diff <GNU_PATH>diff.exe

 Another, more sophisticated solution is described below (8.12 diff-mode)
-There are some other programs as patch, make etc that may cause same problems.
-At www.polarhome.com is possible to download an GNU package for Alpha and VAX
-boxes that is meant to solve GNU problems on OpenVMS.
-( Zoltan Arpadffy, Vim 6.1)
+There are other programs such as patch, make etc that may cause the same
+problems.  At www.polarhome.com is possible to download an GNU package for
+Alpha and VAX boxes that is meant to solve GNU problems on OpenVMS.
+(Zoltan Arpadffy, Vim 6.1)


 8.12 diff-mode
@@ -632,7 +629,7 @@ You can now compare files in 4 ways: >
    3. VIM  diff:  $ VIMDIFF  <FILE1> <FILE2>
    4. GVIM diff:  $ GVIMDIFF <FILE1> <FILE2>

-( Coen Engelbarts, Vim 6.1)
+(Coen Engelbarts, Vim 6.1)


 8.13 Allow '$' in C keywords
@@ -653,35 +650,36 @@ Now word-based commands, e.g. the '*'-search-command and the CTRL-]
 tag-lookup, work on the whole identifier.  (Ctags on VMS also supports '$' in
 C keywords since ctags version 5.1.)

-( Coen Engelbarts, Vim 6.1)
+(Coen Engelbarts, Vim 6.1)

 8.14 VIMTUTOR for beginners

-It exits VIMTUTOR.COM DCL script that can help Vim beginners to learn/make
-first steps with Vim on OpenVMS.  Depending of binary distribution you may
-start it with: >
+The VIMTUTOR.COM DCL script can help Vim beginners to learn/make their first
+steps with Vim on OpenVMS.  Depending of binary distribution you may start it
+with: >

 	@vim:vimtutor

 (Thomas.R.Wyant III, Vim 6.1)

-8.14 Slow start in console mode issue
+8.16 Slow start in console mode issue

 As GUI/GTK Vim works equally well in console mode, many administrators
 deploy those executables system wide.
 Unfortunately, on a remote slow connections GUI/GTK executables behave rather
-slow when user wants to run Vim just in the console mode - because of X environment detection timeout.
+slow when user wants to run Vim just in the console mode - because of X
+environment detection timeout.

 Luckily, there is a simple solution for that. Administrators need to deploy
 both GUI/GTK build and just console build executables, like below: >

    |- vim73
    |----- doc
-    |----- syntax        
+    |----- syntax
       vimrc    (system rc files)
       gvimrc
-       gvim.exe (the renamed GUI or GTK built vim.exe)      
-       vim.exe  (the console only executable) 
+       gvim.exe (the renamed GUI or GTK built vim.exe)
+       vim.exe  (the console only executable)

 Define system symbols like below in for ex in LOGIN.COM or SYLOGIN.COM: >

@@ -692,7 +690,7 @@ Define system symbols like below in for ex in LOGIN.COM or SYLOGIN.COM: >
 	$ gv*im :== spawn/nowait/input=NLA0 mcr VIM:GVIM.EXE -g -GEOMETRY 80x40


-Like this, users that do not have X environment and want to use Vim just in 
+Like this, users that do not have X environment and want to use Vim just in
 console mode can avoid performance problems.

 (Zoltan Arpadffy, Vim 7.2)
@@ -714,8 +712,8 @@ View of Cluster from system ID 11655  node: TOR
 +---------------------------------+

 It is convenient to have a common VIM directory but execute different
-executables. 
-There are more solutions for this problem:
+executables.
+There are several solutions for this problem:

 Solution 1.  All executables in the same directory with different names
 This is easily done with the following script that can be added
@@ -769,7 +767,7 @@ GNU_TOOLS.ZIP package downloadable from http://www.polarhome.com/vim/
 Version 7.3
 - CTAGS 5.8 included
 - VMS compile warnings fixed - floating-point overflow warning corrected on VAX
- filepath completition corrected - too many chars were escaped in filename
+- filepath completion corrected - too many chars were escaped in filename
  and shell commands
 - the following plugins are included into VMS runtime:
 	genutils 2.4, multiselect 2.2, multvals 3.1, selectbuf 4.3,
@@ -784,10 +782,10 @@ Version 7.3
 Version 7.2 (2008 Aug 9)
 - VCF files write corrected
 - CTAGS 5.7 included
- corrected make_vms.mms (on VAX gave syntax error) 
+- corrected make_vms.mms (on VAX gave syntax error)

 Version 7.1 (2007 Jun 15)
- create TAGS file from menu 
+- create TAGS file from menu

 Version 7 (2006 May 8)
 - Improved low level char input (affects just console mode)
--- a/runtime/doc/os_win32.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/os_win32.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_win32.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 28
+*os_win32.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 May 18


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by George Reilly
@@ -314,13 +314,13 @@ A. When using :! to run an external command, you can run it with "start": >
   not have to be closed before Vim.
   To avoid this special treatment, use ":! start".
   There are two optional arguments (see the next Q):
-       /min  the window will be minimized.
-       /b"   no console window will be opened
-   You can only one of these flags at a time.  A second second one will be
+       /min  the window will be minimized
+       /b    no console window will be opened
+   You can use only one of these flags at a time.  A second one will be
   treated as the start of the command.

 Q. How do I avoid getting a window for programs that I run asynchronously?
-A. You have two possible solutions depending on what exactly do you want:
+A. You have two possible solutions depending on what you want:
   1) You may use the /min flag in order to run program in a minimized state
      with no other changes. It will work equally for console and GUI
      applications.
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ A. You have two possible solutions depending on what exactly do you want:
      console window for them (GUI applications are not affected). But you
      should use this flag only if the application you run doesn't require any
      input.  Otherwise it will get an EOF error because its input stream
-      (stdin) would be redirected to \\.\NUL (stdoud and stderr too).
+      (stdin) would be redirected to \\.\NUL (stdout and stderr too).

   Example for a console application, run Exuberant ctags: >
        :!start /min ctags -R .
--- a/runtime/doc/pattern.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pattern.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 25
+*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 May 18


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ explanations are in chapter 27 |usr_27.txt|.
 10. Highlighting matches	|match-highlight|

 ==============================================================================
-1. Search commands				*search-commands* *E486*
+1. Search commands				*search-commands*

 							*/*
 /{pattern}[/]<CR>	Search forward for the [count]'th occurrence of
@@ -150,6 +150,11 @@ use <Esc> to abandon the search.
 All matches for the last used search pattern will be highlighted if you set
 the 'hlsearch' option.  This can be suspended with the |:nohlsearch| command.

+When no match is found you get the error: *E486* Pattern not found
+Note that for the |:global| command this behaves like a normal message, for Vi
+compatibility.  For the |:s| command the "e" flag can be used to avoid the
+error message |:s_flags|.
+
 					*search-offset* *{offset}*
 These commands search for the specified pattern.  With "/" and "?" an
 additional offset may be given.  There are two types of offsets: line offsets
@@ -632,10 +637,10 @@ overview.
 							*/\@!*
 \@!	Matches with zero width if the preceding atom does NOT match at the
 	current position. |/zero-width| {not in Vi}
-	Like '(?!pattern)" in Perl.
+	Like "(?!pattern)" in Perl.
 	Example			matches ~
 	foo\(bar\)\@!		any "foo" not followed by "bar"
-	a.\{-}p\@!		"a", "ap", "aap", "app", etc. not immediately
+	a.\{-}p\@!		"a", "ap", "app", "appp", etc. not immediately
 				followed by a "p"
 	if \(\(then\)\@!.\)*$	"if " not followed by "then"

@@ -643,7 +648,7 @@ overview.
 	does not match.  "a.*p\@!" will match from an "a" to the end of the
 	line, because ".*" can match all characters in the line and the "p"
 	doesn't match at the end of the line.  "a.\{-}p\@!" will match any
-	"a", "ap", "aap", etc. that isn't followed by a "p", because the "."
+	"a", "ap", "app", etc. that isn't followed by a "p", because the "."
 	can match a "p" and "p\@!" doesn't match after that.

 	You can't use "\@!" to look for a non-match before the matching
@@ -662,7 +667,7 @@ overview.
 							*/\@<=*
 \@<=	Matches with zero width if the preceding atom matches just before what
 	follows. |/zero-width| {not in Vi}
-	Like '(?<=pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
+	Like "(?<=pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
 	Example			matches ~
 	\(an\_s\+\)\@<=file	"file" after "an" and white space or an
 				end-of-line
@@ -686,7 +691,7 @@ overview.
 	before what follows.  Thus this matches if there is no position in the
 	current or previous line where the atom matches such that it ends just
 	before what follows.  |/zero-width| {not in Vi}
-	Like '(?<!pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
+	Like "(?<!pattern)" in Perl, but Vim allows non-fixed-width patterns.
 	The match with the preceding atom is made to end just before the match
 	with what follows, thus an atom that ends in ".*" will work.
 	Warning: This can be slow (because many positions need to be checked
@@ -932,7 +937,7 @@ match ASCII characters, as indicated by the range.
 \l	lowercase character:		[a-z]		*/\l*
 \L	non-lowercase character:	[^a-z]		*/\L*
 \u	uppercase character:		[A-Z]		*/\u*
-\U	non-uppercase character		[^A-Z]		*/\U*
+\U	non-uppercase character:	[^A-Z]		*/\U*

 	NOTE: Using the atom is faster than the [] form.

--- a/runtime/doc/pi_getscript.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_getscript.txt
@@ -1,15 +1,21 @@
-*pi_getscript.txt*  For Vim version 7.0.  Last change: 2011 May 31
+*pi_getscript.txt*  For Vim version 7.0.  Last change: 2011 Jun 23
 >
 		GETSCRIPT REFERENCE MANUAL  by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
 <
 Authors:  Charles E. Campbell, Jr.  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamilyA.Mbiz>
 	  (remove NOSPAM from the email address)
 						*GetLatestVimScripts-copyright*
-Copyright: (c) 2004-2010 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.	*glvs-copyright*
-           The VIM LICENSE applies to getscript.vim and
-           pi_getscript.txt (see |copyright|) except use
-           "getscript" instead of "Vim".  No warranty, express or implied.
-	   Use At-Your-Own-Risk.
+Copyright: (c) 2004-2012 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.	*glvs-copyright*
+	The VIM LICENSE (see |copyright|) applies to the files in this
+	package, including getscriptPlugin.vim, getscript.vim,
+	GetLatestVimScripts.dist, and pi_getscript.txt, except use "getscript"
+	instead of "VIM".  Like anything else that's free, getscript and its
+	associated files are provided *as is* and comes with no warranty of
+	any kind, either expressed or implied.  No guarantees of
+	merchantability.  No guarantees of suitability for any purpose.  By
+	using this plugin, you agree that in no event will the copyright
+	holder be liable for any damages resulting from the use of this
+	software. Use at your own risk!

 Getscript is a plugin that simplifies retrieval of the latest versions of the
 scripts that you yourself use!  Typing |:GLVS| will invoke getscript; it will
@@ -374,6 +380,8 @@ The AutoInstall process will:
 ==============================================================================
 9. GetLatestVimScripts History		*getscript-history* *glvs-hist* {{{1

+v44 Jun 23, 2011 : * handles additional decompression options for tarballs
+                     (tgz taz tbz txz)
 v33 May 31, 2011 : * using fnameescape() instead of escape()
 		   * *.xz support
 v32 Jun 19, 2010 : * (Jan Steffens) added support for xz compression
--- a/runtime/doc/pi_gzip.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_gzip.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_gzip.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2002 Oct 29
+*pi_gzip.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jul 19


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -25,6 +25,8 @@ with these extensions:
 	*.Z		compress (Lempel-Ziv)
 	*.gz		gzip
 	*.bz2		bzip2
+	*.lzma		lzma
+	*.xz		xz

 That's actually the only thing you need to know.  There are no options.

--- a/runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt
--- a/runtime/doc/pi_tar.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_tar.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_tar.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 31
+*pi_tar.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 17

 		       +====================+
 		       | Tar File Interface |
@@ -6,9 +6,16 @@

 Author:  Charles E. Campbell, Jr.  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
 	  (remove NOSPAM from Campbell's email first)
-Copyright 2005-2010: The GPL (gnu public license) applies to	*tar-copyright*
-	   tar.vim, tarPlugin.vim, and pi_tar.txt.
-	   No warranty, express or implied.  Use At-Your-Own-Risk.
+Copyright 2005-2012:					*tar-copyright*
+	The VIM LICENSE (see |copyright|) applies to the files in this
+	package, including tarPlugin.vim, tar.vim, and pi_tar.txt.  Like
+	anything else that's except use "tar.vim" instead of "VIM".  Like
+	anything else that's free, tar.vim and its associated files are
+	provided *as is* and comes with no warranty of any kind, either
+	expressed or implied.  No guarantees of merchantability.  No
+	guarantees of suitability for any purpose.  By using this plugin, you
+	agree that in no event will the copyright holder be liable for any
+	damages resulting from the use of this software. Use at your own risk!

 ==============================================================================
 1. Contents					*tar* *tar-contents*
@@ -83,6 +90,7 @@ Copyright 2005-2010: The GPL (gnu public license) applies to	*tar-copyright*
 4. History						*tar-history*


+   v28 Jun 23, 2011 * a few more decompression options (tbz tb2 txz)
   v27 May 31, 2011 * moved cygwin detection before g:tar_copycmd handling
   		    * inserted additional |:keepj| modifiers
 		    * changed silent  to  sil!  (|:silent|)
--- a/runtime/doc/pi_vimball.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_vimball.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_vimball.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Apr 02
+*pi_vimball.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 17

 			       ----------------
 			       Vimball Archiver
@@ -6,16 +6,22 @@

 Author:  Charles E. Campbell, Jr.  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
 	  (remove NOSPAM from Campbell's email first)
-Copyright: (c) 2004-2011 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.	*Vimball-copyright*
-	   The VIM LICENSE applies to Vimball.vim, and Vimball.txt
-	   (see |copyright|) except use "Vimball" instead of "Vim".
-	   No warranty, express or implied.
-	   Use At-Your-Own-Risk!
+Copyright: (c) 2004-2012 by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.	*Vimball-copyright*
+	The VIM LICENSE (see |copyright|) applies to the files in this
+	package, including vimballPlugin.vim, vimball.vim, and pi_vimball.txt.
+	except use "vimball" instead of "VIM".  Like anything else that's free,
+	vimball.vim and its associated files are provided *as is* and comes with
+	no warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied.  No guarantees
+	of merchantability.  No guarantees of suitability for any purpose.  By
+	using this plugin, you agree that in no event will the copyright
+	holder be liable for any damages resulting from the use of this
+	software. Use at your own risk!

 ==============================================================================
 1. Contents				*vba* *vimball* *vimball-contents*

 	1. Contents......................................: |vimball-contents|
+	2. Vimball Introduction..........................: |vimball-intro|
 	3. Vimball Manual................................: |vimball-manual|
 	   MkVimball.....................................: |:MkVimball|
 	   UseVimball....................................: |:UseVimball|
@@ -176,6 +182,8 @@ WINDOWS							*vimball-windows*
 ==============================================================================
 4. Vimball History					*vimball-history* {{{1

+	34 : Sep 22, 2011 * "UseVimball path" now supports a non-full path by
+			    prepending the current directory to it.
 	33 : Apr 02, 2011 * Gave priority to *.vmb over *.vba
 			  * Changed silent! to sil! (shorter)
 			  * Safed |'swf'| setting (during vimball extraction,
--- a/runtime/doc/pi_zip.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/pi_zip.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_zip.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 24
+*pi_zip.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jan 17

 				+====================+
 				| Zip File Interface |
@@ -7,14 +7,15 @@
 Author:  Charles E. Campbell, Jr.  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
 	  (remove NOSPAM from Campbell's email first)
 Copyright: Copyright (C) 2005-2011 Charles E Campbell, Jr *zip-copyright*
-           Permission is hereby granted to use and distribute this code,
-	   with or without modifications, provided that this copyright
-	   notice is copied with it. Like anything else that's free,
-	   zip.vim, zipPlugin.vim, and pi_zip.txt are provided *as is*
-	   and it comes with no warranty of any kind, either expressed or
-	   implied. By using this plugin, you agree that in no event will
-	   the copyright holder be liable for any damages resulting from
-	   the use of this software.
+	The VIM LICENSE (see |copyright|) applies to the files in this
+	package, including zipPlugin.vim, zip.vim, and pi_zip.vim.  except use
+	"zip.vim" instead of "VIM".  Like anything else that's free, zip.vim
+	and its associated files are provided *as is* and comes with no
+	warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied.  No guarantees of
+	merchantability.  No guarantees of suitability for any purpose.  By
+	using this plugin, you agree that in no event will the copyright
+	holder be liable for any damages resulting from the use of this
+	software. Use at your own risk!

 ==============================================================================
 1. Contents						*zip* *zip-contents*
@@ -69,12 +70,11 @@ Copyright: Copyright (C) 2005-2011 Charles E Campbell, Jr *zip-copyright*
 	let g:loaded_zipPlugin= 1
 	let g:loaded_zip      = 1
 <
-<

 ==============================================================================
 3. Additional Extensions					*zip-extension*

-   Apparently there are a number of archivers who generate zip files that
+   Apparently there are a number of archivers which generate zip files that
   don't use the .zip extension (.jar, .xpi, etc).  To handle such files,
   place a line in your <.vimrc> file: >

@@ -85,6 +85,8 @@ Copyright: Copyright (C) 2005-2011 Charles E Campbell, Jr *zip-copyright*

 ==============================================================================
 4. History							*zip-history* {{{1
+   v25 Jun 27, 2011 * using keepj with unzip -Z
+		      (consistent with the -p variant)
   v24 Jun 21, 2010 * (Cédric Bosdonnat) unzip seems to need its filenames
 		      fnameescape'd as well as shellquote'd
 		    * (Motoya Kurotsu) inserted keepj before 0d to protect
--- a/runtime/doc/quickfix.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/quickfix.txt
@@ -561,7 +561,9 @@ commands can be combined to create a NewGrep command: >
 					*:vim* *:vimgrep* *E682* *E683*
 :vim[grep][!] /{pattern}/[g][j] {file} ...
 			Search for {pattern} in the files {file} ... and set
-			the error list to the matches.
+			the error list to the matches.  Files matching
+			'wildignore' are ignored; files in 'suffixes' are
+			searched last.
 			Without the 'g' flag each line is added only once.
 			With 'g' every match is added.

@@ -913,8 +915,8 @@ Basic items
 	%n		error number (finds a number)
 	%m		error message (finds a string)
 	%r		matches the "rest" of a single-line file message %O/P/Q
-	%p		pointer line (finds a sequence of '-', '.' or ' ' and
-			uses the length for the column number)
+	%p		pointer line (finds a sequence of '-', '.', ' ' or
+			tabs and uses the length for the column number)
 	%*{conv}	any scanf non-assignable conversion
 	%%		the single '%' character
 	%s		search text (finds a string)
--- a/runtime/doc/quickref.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/quickref.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jun 12
+*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Feb 22


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -851,6 +851,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'shellslash'	  'ssl'     use forward slash for shell file names
 'shelltemp'	  'stmp'    whether to use a temp file for shell commands
 'shelltype'	  'st'	    Amiga: influences how to use a shell
+'shellxescape'	  'sxe'     characters to escape when 'shellxquote' is (
 'shellxquote'	  'sxq'     like 'shellquote', but include redirection
 'shiftround'	  'sr'	    round indent to multiple of shiftwidth
 'shiftwidth'	  'sw'	    number of spaces to use for (auto)indent step
--- a/runtime/doc/repeat.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/repeat.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jan 06
+*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Mar 23


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ q			Stops recording.  (Implementation note: The 'q' that
 			it was the result of a mapping)  {Vi: no recording}

 							*@*
-@{0-9a-z".=*}		Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*} [count]
+@{0-9a-z".=*+}		Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*+} [count]
 			times.  Note that register '%' (name of the current
 			file) and '#' (name of the alternate file) cannot be
 			used.
@@ -123,8 +123,8 @@ q			Stops recording.  (Implementation note: The 'q' that
 							*@@* *E748*
@@			Repeat the previous @{0-9a-z":*} [count] times.

-:[addr]*{0-9a-z".=}						*:@* *:star*
-:[addr]@{0-9a-z".=*}	Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*} as an Ex
+:[addr]*{0-9a-z".=+}						*:@* *:star*
+:[addr]@{0-9a-z".=*+}	Execute the contents of register {0-9a-z".=*+} as an Ex
 			command.  First set cursor at line [addr] (default is
 			current line).  When the last line in the register does
 			not have a <CR> it will be added automatically when
--- a/runtime/doc/sign.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/sign.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*sign.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Oct 14
+*sign.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Jul 10


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ DEFINING A SIGN.			*:sign-define* *E255* *E160* *E612*

 		Accepted arguments:

-	icon={pixmap}
+	icon={bitmap}
 		Define the file name where the bitmap can be found.  Should be
 		a full path.  The bitmap should fit in the place of two
 		characters.  This is not checked.  If the bitmap is too big it
@@ -86,6 +86,8 @@ DEFINING A SIGN.			*:sign-define* *E255* *E160* *E612*
 			GTK 1		pixmap (.xpm)
 			GTK 2		many
 			Motif		pixmap (.xpm)
+			Win32		.bmp, .ico, .cur
+					pixmap (.xpm) |+xpm_w32|

 	linehl={group}
 		Highlighting group used for the whole line the sign is placed
@@ -151,8 +153,14 @@ REMOVING SIGNS						*:sign-unplace* *E159*
 		Remove the previously placed sign {id} from file {fname}.
 		See remark above about {fname} |:sign-fname|.

+:sign unplace * file={fname}
+		Remove all placed signs in file {fname}.
+
 :sign unplace {id} buffer={nr}
-		Same, but use buffer {nr}.
+		Remove the previously placed sign {id} from buffer {nr}.
+
+:sign unplace * buffer={nr}
+		Remove all placed signs in buffer {nr}.

 :sign unplace {id}
 		Remove the previously placed sign {id} from all files it
--- a/runtime/doc/starting.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/starting.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Sep 18
+*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Mar 16


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -248,7 +248,8 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		{not in Vi}

 							*-g*
-g		Start Vim in GUI mode.  See |gui|.  {not in Vi}
+-g		Start Vim in GUI mode.  See |gui|. For the opposite see |-v|.
+		{not in Vi}

 							*-v*
 -v		Start Ex in Vi mode.  Only makes a difference when the
@@ -424,12 +425,7 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		"-d con:30/10/600/150".  But you can also use it to start
 		editing on another device, e.g., AUX:.  {not in Vi}
 							*-f*
-f		Amiga: Do not restart Vim to open a new window.  This
-		option should be used when Vim is started by a program that
-		will wait for the edit session to finish (e.g., mail or
-		readnews).  See |amiga-window|.
-
-		GUI: Do not disconnect from the program that started Vim.
+-f		GUI: Do not disconnect from the program that started Vim.
 		'f' stands for "foreground".  If omitted, the GUI forks a new
 		process and exits the current one.  "-f" should be used when
 		gvim is started by a program that will wait for the edit
@@ -437,8 +433,14 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 		never to fork, include 'f' in 'guioptions' in your |gvimrc|.
 		Careful: You can use "-gf" to start the GUI in the foreground,
 		but "-fg" is used to specify the foreground color.  |gui-fork|
+
+		Amiga: Do not restart Vim to open a new window.  This
+		option should be used when Vim is started by a program that
+		will wait for the edit session to finish (e.g., mail or
+		readnews).  See |amiga-window|.
 		{not in Vi}

+
 							*--nofork*
 --nofork	GUI: Do not fork.  Same as |-f|.
 							*-u* *E282*
--- a/runtime/doc/syntax.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/syntax.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jul 18
+*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 28


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -199,7 +199,8 @@ REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE			*mysyntaxfile-replace*
 If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
 version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above.  Just make sure
 that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
-Vim will only load the first syntax file found.
+Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
+b:current_syntax.


 NAMING CONVENTIONS		    *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*
@@ -379,194 +380,23 @@ settings, depending on which syntax is active.	Example: >
 This is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
 window into HTML.  Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.

+After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser.  The
+colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim.
+
 You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
 Source the script to convert the current file: >

 	:runtime! syntax/2html.vim
 <
-							*:TOhtml*
-Or use the ":TOhtml" user command.  It is defined in a standard plugin.
-":TOhtml" also works with a range and in a Visual area: >
-
-	:10,40TOhtml
-
-Warning: This can be slow! The script must process every character of every
-line. Because it can take a long time, by default a progress bar is displayed
-in the statusline for each major step in the conversion process. If you don't
-like seeing this progress bar, you can disable it and get a very minor speed
-improvement with: >
-
-	let g:html_no_progress = 1
-
-":TOhtml" has another special feature: if the window is in diff mode, it will
-generate HTML that shows all the related windows.  This can be disabled by
-setting the g:html_diff_one_file variable: >
-
-	let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
-
-After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser.  The
-colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim.
-
-To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
-command, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first and
-last line to be converted.  Example, using the last set Visual area: >
-
-	:let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
-	:let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
-
-The lines are numbered according to 'number' option and the Number
-highlighting.  You can force lines to be numbered in the HTML output by
-setting "html_number_lines" to non-zero value: >
-   :let g:html_number_lines = 1
-Force to omit the line numbers by using a zero value: >
-   :let g:html_number_lines = 0
-Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
-   :unlet g:html_number_lines
-
-By default, valid HTML 4.01 using cascading style sheets (CSS1) is generated.
-If you need to generate markup for really old browsers or some other user
-agent that lacks basic CSS support, use: >
-   :let g:html_use_css = 0
-
-Concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with the appropriate
-character from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' depending on the current value of
-'conceallevel'. If you always want to display all text in your document,
-either set 'conceallevel' to zero before invoking 2html, or use: >
-   :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
-
-Similarly, closed folds are put in the HTML as they are displayed.  If you
-don't want this, use the |zR| command before invoking 2html, or use: >
-   :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
-
-You may want to generate HTML that includes all the data within the folds, and
-allow the user to view the folded data similar to how they would in Vim. To
-generate this dynamic fold information, use: >
-   :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
-
-Using html_dynamic_folds will imply html_use_css, because it would be far too
-difficult to do it for old browsers. However, html_ignore_folding overrides
-html_dynamic_folds.
-
-Using html_dynamic_folds will default to generating a foldcolumn in the html
-similar to Vim's foldcolumn, that will use javascript to open and close the
-folds in the HTML document. The width of this foldcolumn starts at the current
-setting of |'foldcolumn'| but grows to fit the greatest foldlevel in your
-document. If you do not want to show a foldcolumn at all, use: >
-   :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
-
-Using this option, there will be no foldcolumn available to open the folds in
-the HTML. For this reason, another option is provided: html_hover_unfold.
-Enabling this option will use CSS 2.0 to allow a user to open a fold by
-hovering the mouse pointer over it. Note that old browsers (notably Internet
-Explorer 6) will not support this feature.  Browser-specific markup for IE6 is
-included to fall back to the normal CSS1 code so that the folds show up
-correctly for this browser, but they will not be openable without a
-foldcolumn. Note that using html_hover_unfold will allow modern browsers with
-disabled javascript to view closed folds. To use this option, use: >
-   :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
-
-Setting html_no_foldcolumn with html_dynamic_folds will automatically set
-html_hover_unfold, because otherwise the folds wouldn't be dynamic.
-
-By default "<pre>" and "</pre>" are used around the text. When 'wrap' is set
-in the window being converted, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
-used to wrap the text. You can explicitly enable the wrapping with: >
-   :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
-or disable with >
-   :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
-This generates HTML that looks very close to the Vim window, but unfortunately
-there can be minor differences such as the lack of a 'showbreak' option in in
-the HTML, or where line breaks can occur.
-
-Another way to obtain text wrapping in the HTML, at the risk of making some
-things look even more different, is to use: >
-   :let g:html_no_pre = 1
-This will use <br> at the end of each line and use "&nbsp;" for repeated
-spaces. Doing it this way is more compatible with old browsers, but modern
-browsers support the "white-space" method.
-
-If you do stick with the default "<pre>" tags, <Tab> characters in the text
-are included in the generated output if they will have no effect on the
-appearance of the text and it looks like they are in the document
-intentionally. This allows for the HTML output to be copied and pasted from a
-browser without losing the actual whitespace used in the document.
-
-Specifically, <Tab> characters will be included if the 'tabstop' option is set
-to the default of 8, 'expandtab' is not set, and if neither the foldcolumn nor
-the line numbers are included in the HTML output (see options above). When any
-of these conditions are not met, any <Tab> characters in the text are expanded
-to the appropriate number of spaces in the HTML output.
-
-When "<pre>" is included, you can force |:TOhtml| to keep the tabs even if the
-other conditions are not met with: >
-   :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
-Note that this can easily break text alignment and indentation in the HTML.
-
-Force tabs to be expanded even when they would be kept using: >
-   :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
-
-For diff mode on a single file (with g:html_diff_one_file) a sequence of more
-than 3 filler lines is displayed as three lines with the middle line
-mentioning the total number of inserted lines.  If you prefer to see all the
-inserted lines as with the side-by-side diff, use: >
-    :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
-And to go back to displaying up to three lines again: >
-    :unlet g:html_whole_filler
-
-For most buffers, TOhtml uses the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or
-'encoding' if not, to determine the charset and 'fileencoding' of the HTML
-file. 'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. In general, this
-works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in |encoding-names|,
-but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings which are widely
-supported. However, you can override this to support specific encodings that
-may not be automatically detected by default.
-
-To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
-name of the charset to be used. TOhtml will try to determine the appropriate
-'fileencoding' setting from the charset, but you may need to set it manually
-if TOhtml cannot determine the encoding. It is recommended to set this
-variable to something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be
-hosting on a webserver: >
-   :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
-You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
-entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string: >
-   :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
-To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the g:html_use_encoding
-variable: >
-   :unlet g:html_use_encoding
-
-If you specify a charset with g:html_use_encoding for which TOhtml cannot
-automatically detect the corresponding 'fileencoding' setting, you can use
-g:html_encoding_override to allow TOhtml to detect the correct encoding.
-This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
-pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs. For
-example, to allow TOhtml to detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" properly as
-the encoding "8bit-cp1252", use: >
-   :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
-<
-The g:html_charset_override is similar, it allows TOhtml to detect the HTML
-charset for any 'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected
-automatically. You can also use it to override specific existing
-encoding-charset pairs. For example, TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all
-Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16 and UTF-32 instead, use: >
-   :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
-
-Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
-compatibility problems with at least one major browser.
-
-					    *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML*
-If you do not like plain HTML, an alternative is to have the script generate
-XHTML (XML compliant HTML). To do this set the "html_use_xhtml" variable: >
-    :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
-
-Any of the on/off options listed above can be enabled or disabled by setting
-them explicitly to the desired value, or restored to their default by removing
-the variable using |:unlet|.
+Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
+options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
+the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
+|:unlet|.

 Remarks:
 - Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
 - From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
- This version of TOhtml may work with older versions of Vim, but some
+- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
  features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
  incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.

@@ -574,6 +404,311 @@ Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
 Unix shell: >
   for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
 <
+					*g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
+To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
+command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
+and last line to be converted.  Example, using the last set Visual area: >
+
+	:let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
+	:let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
+	:runtime! syntax/2html.vim
+<
+							*:TOhtml*
+:[range]TOhtml		The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
+			This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
+			range is given, set |g:html_start_line| and
+			|g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the range,
+			respectively. Default range is the entire buffer.
+
+			If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
+			|g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
+			all windows which are part of the diff in the current
+			tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
+			in the generated HTML.
+
+			Examples: >
+
+	:10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
+	:'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
+	:TOhtml      " convert entire buffer
+<
+							*g:html_diff_one_file*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab page are converted
+to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element.
+When 1, only the current buffer is converted.
+Example: >
+
+	let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
+<
+							 *g:html_whole_filler*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
+is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
+of inserted lines.
+When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
+not set.
+>
+    :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
+<
+				     *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
+2html.vim conversion process.
+When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
+but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
+files it can take a long time!
+Example: >
+
+	let g:html_no_progress = 1
+<
+You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
+run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
+moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >
+
+  vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
+<
+Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
+need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
+conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
+script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
+specifying each command separately.
+
+							 *g:html_number_lines*
+Default: current 'number' setting.
+When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
+When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
+highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
+Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
+   :let g:html_number_lines = 1
+Force to omit the line numbers: >
+   :let g:html_number_lines = 0
+Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
+   :unlet g:html_number_lines
+<
+							      *g:html_use_css*
+Default: 1.
+When 1, generate valid HTML 4.01 markup with CSS1 styling, supported in all
+modern browsers and most old browsers.
+When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
+recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
+forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
+Example: >
+   :let g:html_use_css = 0
+<
+						       *g:html_ignore_conceal*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
+from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
+value of 'conceallevel'.
+When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
+|conceal|ed.
+
+Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
+included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
+   :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
+   :setl conceallevel=0
+<
+						       *g:html_ignore_folding*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
+Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
+the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
+When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
+text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.
+
+Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
+in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
+   zR
+   :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
+<
+							*g:html_dynamic_folds*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
+When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
+in Vim.
+
+Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
+regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.
+
+This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
+>
+   :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
+<
+							*g:html_no_foldcolumn*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
+Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
+open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
+'foldcolumn' setting.
+When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
+folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
+>
+   :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
+<
+				*TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
+Default: empty string.
+This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
+when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
+for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
+line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
+affected in this way as follows:
+	f:	fold column
+	n:	line numbers (also within fold text)
+	t:	fold text
+	d:	diff filler
+
+Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
+	:let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
+<
+This feature is currently implemented by inserting read-only <input> elements
+into the markup to contain the uncopyable areas. This does not work well in
+all cases. When pasting to some applications which understand HTML, the
+<input> elements also get pasted. But plain-text paste destinations should
+always work.
+
+							   *g:html_no_invalid*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, an invalid attribute is
+intentionally inserted into the <input> element for the uncopyable areas. This
+increases the number of applications you can paste to without also pasting the
+<input> elements. Specifically, Microsoft Word will not paste the <input>
+elements if they contain this invalid attribute.
+When 1, no invalid markup is ever intentionally inserted, and the generated
+page should validate. However, be careful pasting into Microsoft Word when
+|g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty; it can be hard to get rid of the <input>
+elements which get pasted.
+
+							 *g:html_hover_unfold*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
+|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
+When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
+cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
+disabled javascript to view the folded text.
+
+Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
+feature.  Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
+normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
+they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
+>
+   :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
+<
+					  *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
+Default: current 'wrap' setting.
+When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
+not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
+When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
+used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
+window.
+Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
+   :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
+Explicitly disable wrapping: >
+   :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
+Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
+   :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
+<
+							       *g:html_no_pre*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
+tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
+characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
+When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
+used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
+references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
+text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
+old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
+the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
+>
+   :let g:html_no_pre = 1
+<
+							  *g:html_expand_tabs*
+Default: 1 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, and no fold column or line
+		numbers occur in the generated HTML;
+	 0 otherwise.
+When 0, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
+number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
+When 1, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
+are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
+allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
+the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
+indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.
+
+Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
+   :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
+<
+Force tabs to be expanded: >
+   :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
+<
+				    *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
+It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
+|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.
+
+If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
+for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
+'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
+set to match the chosen document encoding.
+
+Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
+|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
+wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
+encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
+below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.
+
+Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
+the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:
+
+	http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
+	http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark
+
+							 *g:html_use_encoding*
+Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
+To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
+name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
+something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
+webserver: >
+   :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
+You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
+entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
+   :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
+To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
+variable: >
+   :unlet g:html_use_encoding
+<
+						    *g:html_encoding_override*
+Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
+		mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
+This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
+specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
+list of conversions.
+
+This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
+pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.
+
+Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
+   :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
+<
+						     *g:html_charset_override*
+Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
+		mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
+		browser support.
+This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
+'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
+use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
+TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
+and UTF-32 instead, use: >
+   :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
+
+Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
+compatibility problems with some major browsers.
+
+			*convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
+Default: 0.
+When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
+When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
+>
+    :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
+<

 ABEL						*abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*

@@ -649,7 +784,11 @@ The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
 	asmsyntax=nasm
 Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax.  This line must be
 one of the first five lines in the file.  No non-white text must be
-immediately before or after this text.
+immediately before or after this text.  Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
+equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
+between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
+particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
+highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).

 The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
 b:asmsyntax variable: >
@@ -754,10 +893,12 @@ c_no_ansi		don't do standard ANSI types and constants
 c_ansi_typedefs		 ... but do standard ANSI types
 c_ansi_constants	 ... but do standard ANSI constants
 c_no_utf		don't highlight \u and \U in strings
-c_syntax_for_h		use C syntax for *.h files, instead of C++
+c_syntax_for_h		for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
+			syntax instead of objcpp
 c_no_if0		don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
 c_no_cformat		don't highlight %-formats in strings
 c_no_c99		don't highlight C99 standard items
+c_no_c11		don't highlight C11 standard items

 When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
 become a fold.  If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
@@ -949,6 +1090,10 @@ Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
 or: >
 	:set filetype=docbkxml

+You can specify the DocBook version: >
+	:let docbk_ver = 3
+When not set 4 is used.
+

 DOSBATCH				*dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*

@@ -985,9 +1130,9 @@ Example: >
 or >
 	// vim:syntax=c.doxygen

-It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C# and IDL files by setting the
-global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax.  This is done by adding
-the following to your .vimrc. >
+It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting
+the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax.  This is done by
+adding the following to your .vimrc. >
 	:let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1

 There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and
@@ -1155,14 +1300,12 @@ conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction.
 FORTRAN					*fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax*

 Default highlighting and dialect ~
-Highlighting appropriate for f95 (Fortran 95) is used by default.  This choice
-should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 95 is a
-superset of Fortran 90 and almost a superset of Fortran 77. Support for 
-Fortran 2003 and Fortran 2008 features has been introduced and is
-automatically available in the default (f95) highlighting.
+Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default.  This choice
+should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is 
+almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77). 

 Fortran source code form ~
-Fortran 9x code can be in either fixed or free source form.  Note that the
+Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form.  Note that the
 syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set.

 When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source
@@ -1243,52 +1386,54 @@ recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall
 construct.

 Non-default fortran dialects ~
-The syntax script supports five Fortran dialects: f95, f90, f77, the Lahey
-subset elf90, and the Imagine1 subset F.
+The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably
+find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory.  A few legacy constructs
+deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo
+items.

-If you use f77 with extensions, even common ones like do/enddo loops, do/while
-loops and free source form that are supported by most f77 compilers including
-g77 (GNU Fortran), then you will probably find the default highlighting
-satisfactory.  However, if you use strict f77 with no extensions, not even free
-source form or the MIL STD 1753 extensions, then the advantages of setting the
-dialect to f77 are that names such as SUM are recognized as user variable
-names and not highlighted as f9x intrinsic functions, that obsolete constructs
-such as ASSIGN statements are not highlighted as todo items, and that fixed
-source form will be assumed.
+If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that
+other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and
+that free source form will be assumed. 

-If you use elf90 or F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is
-that f90 features excluded from these dialects will be highlighted as todo
-items and that free source form will be assumed as required for these
-dialects.
+The dialect can be selected in various ways.  If all your fortran files use
+the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior
+to your syntax on statement.  The case-sensitive, permissible values of
+fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F".  Invalid values of fortran_dialect are
+ignored.

-The dialect can be selected by setting the variable fortran_dialect.  The
-permissible values of fortran_dialect are case-sensitive and must be "f95",
-"f90", "f77", "elf" or "F".  Invalid values of fortran_dialect are ignored.
-
-If all your fortran files use the same dialect, set fortran_dialect in your
-.vimrc prior to your syntax on statement.  If the dialect depends upon the file
-extension, then it is most convenient to set it in a ftplugin file.  For more
-information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|.  For example, if all your
-fortran files with an .f90 extension are written in the elf subset, your
-ftplugin file should contain the code >
+If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to
+set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file.  For more information on
+ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|.  For example, if all your fortran files with
+an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should
+contain the code >
    let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
    if s:extfname ==? "f90"
-	let fortran_dialect="elf"
+	let b:fortran_dialect="F"
    else
-	unlet! fortran_dialect
+	unlet! b:fortran_dialect
    endif
 Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
 precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.

 Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify
-the dialect.  You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis, by
-including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=f77 or
-elf or F or f90 or f95) in one of the first three lines in your file.  For
-example, your older .f files may be written in extended f77 but your newer
-ones may be F codes, and you would identify the latter by including in the
-first three lines of those files a Fortran comment of the form >
+the dialect.  You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis,
+by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or
+f08) in one of the first three lines in your file.  For example, your older .f
+files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would
+identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a
+Fortran comment of the form >
  ! fortran_dialect=F
-F overrides elf if both directives are present.
+
+For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the
+now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be
+silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F"
+instead. 
+
+The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to
+comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some
+non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted
+or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo
+items. 

 Limitations ~
 Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses.  Hollerith
@@ -1603,11 +1748,6 @@ which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug
 strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively.  I
 have opted to chose another background for those statements.

-In order to help you write code that can be easily ported between Java and
-C++, all C++ keywords can be marked as an error in a Java program.  To
-have this add this line in your .vimrc file: >
-	:let java_allow_cpp_keywords = 0
-
 Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and
 creates HTML pages.  The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code
 similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|).  You can even add Javascript
@@ -1746,19 +1886,10 @@ instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike

 LUA						*lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax*

-This syntax file may be used for Lua 4.0, Lua 5.0 or Lua 5.1 (the latter is
+The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is
 the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables
 lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua
-4.0 syntax highlighting, use this command: >
-
-	:let lua_version = 4
-
-If you are using Lua 5.0, use these commands: >
-
-	:let lua_version = 5
-	:let lua_subversion = 0
-
-To restore highlighting for Lua 5.1: >
+5.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this:

 	:let lua_version = 5
 	:let lua_subversion = 1
@@ -2362,6 +2493,12 @@ This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
 later, and part earlier) adds.


+RESTRUCTURED TEXT			*rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*
+
+You may set what syntax definitions should be used for code blocks via
+	let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
+
+
 REXX						*rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*

 If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
@@ -2605,8 +2742,41 @@ reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set.  Example: >
 The default is to use the twice sh_minlines.  Set it to a smaller number to
 speed up displaying.  The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear.

+						*g:sh_isk* *g:sh_noisk*
+The shell languages appear to let "." be part of words, commands, etc;
+consequently it should be in the isk for sh.vim.  As of v116 of syntax/sh.vim,
+syntax/sh.vim will append the "." to |'iskeyword'| by default; you may control
+this behavior with: >
+	let g:sh_isk  = '..whatever characters you want as part of iskeyword'
+	let g:sh_noisk= 1  " otherwise, if this exists, the isk will NOT chg
+<
+						*sh-embed*  *sh-awk*
+ Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~

-SPEEDUP (AspenTech plant simulator)		*spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
+You may wish to embed languages into sh.  I'll give an example courtesy of
+Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
+file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
+
+    " AWK Embedding: {{{1
+    " ==============
+    " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
+    if exists("b:current_syntax")
+      unlet b:current_syntax
+    endif
+    syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim
+    syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained
+    syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode
+    syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded
+    hi def link AWKCommand Type
+<
+This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: >
+	awk '...awk code here...'
+be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax.  Clearly this may be
+extended to other languages.
+
+
+SPEEDUP						*spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
+(AspenTech plant simulator)

 The Speedup syntax file has some options:

@@ -2689,6 +2859,8 @@ sections, subsections, etc are supported.  Put >
 in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax.  I suggest doing the latter via a
 modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: >
 	% vim: fdm=syntax
+If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into >
+ 	http://vim.wikia.com/wiki/Keep_folds_closed_while_inserting_text
 <
 								*tex-nospell*
 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~
@@ -2697,7 +2869,14 @@ Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
 prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files.  To do
 this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
      let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
-<
+The comment lines >
+	% nospell{
+	...
+	% nospell}
+will suppress spell checking between them.  These comment lines spelling
+control are known to be fragile; for example, don't include any of the section
+commands (\part, \chapter, \section, \paragraph, etc) inside nospell blocks
+or interleave environments (such as math) across nospell blocks.
 								*tex-verb*
 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~

@@ -2729,6 +2908,9 @@ If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for >
 increase them.	This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group,
 if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?).

+Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see
+|tex-folding| for a way around this.
+
 					    *tex-morecommands* *tex-package*
 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~

@@ -2737,7 +2919,9 @@ of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts.  If you're using such a
 package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support
 it.  However, clearly this is impractical.  So please consider using the
 techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided
-by syntax/tex.vim.
+by syntax/tex.vim.  Please consider uploading any extensions that you write,
+which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to
+http://vim.sf.net/.

 								*tex-error*
 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~
@@ -2799,6 +2983,7 @@ You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
 following sets of characters: >

 	a = accents/ligatures
+	b = bold and italic
 	d = delimiters
 	m = math symbols
 	g = Greek
@@ -2807,6 +2992,18 @@ following sets of characters: >
 By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
 substitution will not be made.

+						*g:tex_isk*
+ Tex: Controlling What's In A Keyword~
+
+(La)Tex keywords normally use the characters 0-9,a-z,A-Z,192-255 only
+but the "_" is the only one that causes problems.  So, by default,
+syntax/tex.vim overrides the usual |'iskeyword'| setting (using |:setlocal|)
+with one that works for LaTeX.
+
+However, one may override this iskeyword re-setting by setting the
+variable, g:tex_isk, in one's .vimrc to whatever one wishes and
+it will be used instead.
+ 

 TF						*tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*

@@ -2860,7 +3057,7 @@ Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
   g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python   script
   g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby     script
   g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl      script
-
+<
 							*g:vimsyn_noerror*
 Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; VimL is a
 difficult language to highlight correctly.  A way to suppress error
@@ -3881,7 +4078,7 @@ First syncing method:			*:syn-sync-first*
 The file will be parsed from the start.  This makes syntax highlighting
 accurate, but can be slow for long files.  Vim caches previously parsed text,
 so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time.  However,
-when making changes some part of the next needs to be parsed again (worst
+when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst
 case: to the end of the file).

 Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number.
@@ -4394,6 +4591,8 @@ IncSearch	'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
 							*hl-LineNr*
 LineNr		Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
 		or 'relativenumber' option is set.
+							*hl-CursorLineNr*
+CursorLineNr	Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set for the cursor line.
 							*hl-MatchParen*
 MatchParen	The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
 		is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|
--- a/runtime/doc/tabpage.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/tabpage.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*tabpage.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Jul 31
+*tabpage.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 08


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ something else.
 		this is a "safe" command.

 :tabc[lose][!] {count}
-		Close tab page {count}.  Fails in the same way as ':tabclose"
+		Close tab page {count}.  Fails in the same way as `:tabclose`
 		above.

 							*:tabo* *:tabonly*
@@ -173,10 +173,20 @@ Other commands:
 REORDERING TAB PAGES:

 :tabm[ove] [N]						*:tabm* *:tabmove*
+:[N]tabm[ove]
 		Move the current tab page to after tab page N.  Use zero to
 		make the current tab page the first one.  Without N the tab
 		page is made the last one.

+:tabm[ove] +[N]
+:tabm[ove] -[N]
+		Move the current tab page N places to the right (with +) or to
+		the left (with -).
+
+Note that although it is possible to move a tab behind the N-th one by using
+:Ntabmove, it is impossible to move it by N places by using :+Ntabmove. For
+clarification what +N means in this context see |[range]|.
+

 LOOPING OVER TAB PAGES:

--- a/runtime/doc/tags
+++ b/runtime/doc/tags
@@ -281,6 +281,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'go-F'	options.txt	/*'go-F'*
 'go-L'	options.txt	/*'go-L'*
 'go-M'	options.txt	/*'go-M'*
+'go-P'	options.txt	/*'go-P'*
 'go-R'	options.txt	/*'go-R'*
 'go-T'	options.txt	/*'go-T'*
 'go-a'	options.txt	/*'go-a'*
@@ -783,6 +784,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'shellslash'	options.txt	/*'shellslash'*
 'shelltemp'	options.txt	/*'shelltemp'*
 'shelltype'	options.txt	/*'shelltype'*
+'shellxescape'	options.txt	/*'shellxescape'*
 'shellxquote'	options.txt	/*'shellxquote'*
 'shiftround'	options.txt	/*'shiftround'*
 'shiftwidth'	options.txt	/*'shiftwidth'*
@@ -852,6 +854,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'swf'	options.txt	/*'swf'*
 'switchbuf'	options.txt	/*'switchbuf'*
 'sws'	options.txt	/*'sws'*
+'sxe'	options.txt	/*'sxe'*
 'sxq'	options.txt	/*'sxq'*
 'syn'	options.txt	/*'syn'*
 'synmaxcol'	options.txt	/*'synmaxcol'*
@@ -1183,7 +1186,9 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 +mouse_gpm	various.txt	/*+mouse_gpm*
 +mouse_netterm	various.txt	/*+mouse_netterm*
 +mouse_pterm	various.txt	/*+mouse_pterm*
+mouse_sgr	various.txt	/*+mouse_sgr*
 +mouse_sysmouse	various.txt	/*+mouse_sysmouse*
+mouse_urxvt	various.txt	/*+mouse_urxvt*
 +mouse_xterm	various.txt	/*+mouse_xterm*
 +mouseshape	various.txt	/*+mouseshape*
 +multi_byte	various.txt	/*+multi_byte*
@@ -1242,6 +1247,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 +writebackup	various.txt	/*+writebackup*
 +xfontset	various.txt	/*+xfontset*
 +xim	various.txt	/*+xim*
+xpm_w32	various.txt	/*+xpm_w32*
 +xsmp	various.txt	/*+xsmp*
 +xsmp_interact	various.txt	/*+xsmp_interact*
 +xterm_clipboard	various.txt	/*+xterm_clipboard*
@@ -1831,6 +1837,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :X	editing.txt	/*:X*
 :XMLent	insert.txt	/*:XMLent*
 :XMLns	insert.txt	/*:XMLns*
+:[range]	motion.txt	/*:[range]*
 :\bar	cmdline.txt	/*:\\bar*
 :_!	cmdline.txt	/*:_!*
 :_#	cmdline.txt	/*:_#*
@@ -2092,6 +2099,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :display	change.txt	/*:display*
 :dj	tagsrch.txt	/*:dj*
 :djump	tagsrch.txt	/*:djump*
+:dl	change.txt	/*:dl*
 :dli	tagsrch.txt	/*:dli*
 :dlist	tagsrch.txt	/*:dlist*
 :do	autocmd.txt	/*:do*
@@ -2612,6 +2620,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :resize	windows.txt	/*:resize*
 :ret	change.txt	/*:ret*
 :retab	change.txt	/*:retab*
+:retab!	change.txt	/*:retab!*
 :retu	eval.txt	/*:retu*
 :return	eval.txt	/*:return*
 :rew	editing.txt	/*:rew*
@@ -3203,6 +3212,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 <line1>	map.txt	/*<line1>*
 <line2>	map.txt	/*<line2>*
 <lt>	intro.txt	/*<lt>*
+<nomodeline>	autocmd.txt	/*<nomodeline>*
 <q-args>	map.txt	/*<q-args>*
 <reg>	map.txt	/*<reg>*
 <register>	map.txt	/*<register>*
@@ -3401,6 +3411,7 @@ CmdwinLeave	autocmd.txt	/*CmdwinLeave*
 ColorScheme	autocmd.txt	/*ColorScheme*
 Command-line	cmdline.txt	/*Command-line*
 Command-line-mode	cmdline.txt	/*Command-line-mode*
+CompleteDone	autocmd.txt	/*CompleteDone*
 Contents	quickref.txt	/*Contents*
 Cscope	if_cscop.txt	/*Cscope*
 CursorHold	autocmd.txt	/*CursorHold*
@@ -3624,9 +3635,6 @@ E287	mbyte.txt	/*E287*
 E288	mbyte.txt	/*E288*
 E289	mbyte.txt	/*E289*
 E29	change.txt	/*E29*
-E290	mbyte.txt	/*E290*
-E291	mbyte.txt	/*E291*
-E292	mbyte.txt	/*E292*
 E293	message.txt	/*E293*
 E294	message.txt	/*E294*
 E295	message.txt	/*E295*
@@ -4233,7 +4241,16 @@ E848	syntax.txt	/*E848*
 E849	syntax.txt	/*E849*
 E85	options.txt	/*E85*
 E850	change.txt	/*E850*
+E851	gui_x11.txt	/*E851*
+E852	gui_x11.txt	/*E852*
+E853	eval.txt	/*E853*
+E854	options.txt	/*E854*
+E855	autocmd.txt	/*E855*
+E858	eval.txt	/*E858*
+E859	eval.txt	/*E859*
 E86	windows.txt	/*E86*
+E860	eval.txt	/*E860*
+E861	eval.txt	/*E861*
 E87	windows.txt	/*E87*
 E88	windows.txt	/*E88*
 E89	message.txt	/*E89*
@@ -4416,6 +4433,7 @@ QuickFixCmdPost	autocmd.txt	/*QuickFixCmdPost*
 QuickFixCmdPost-example	quickfix.txt	/*QuickFixCmdPost-example*
 QuickFixCmdPre	autocmd.txt	/*QuickFixCmdPre*
 Quickfix	quickfix.txt	/*Quickfix*
+QuitPre	autocmd.txt	/*QuitPre*
 R	change.txt	/*R*
 RISC-OS	os_risc.txt	/*RISC-OS*
 RISCOS	os_risc.txt	/*RISCOS*
@@ -4447,6 +4465,11 @@ Syntax	autocmd.txt	/*Syntax*
 T	motion.txt	/*T*
 TCL	if_tcl.txt	/*TCL*
 TERM	starting.txt	/*TERM*
+TOhtml-encoding	syntax.txt	/*TOhtml-encoding*
+TOhtml-encoding-detect	syntax.txt	/*TOhtml-encoding-detect*
+TOhtml-performance	syntax.txt	/*TOhtml-performance*
+TOhtml-uncopyable-text	syntax.txt	/*TOhtml-uncopyable-text*
+TOhtml-wrap-text	syntax.txt	/*TOhtml-wrap-text*
 TSQL	ft_sql.txt	/*TSQL*
 TTpro-telnet	syntax.txt	/*TTpro-telnet*
 Tab	intro.txt	/*Tab*
@@ -4682,6 +4705,7 @@ alt	intro.txt	/*alt*
 alt-input	debugger.txt	/*alt-input*
 alternate-file	editing.txt	/*alternate-file*
 amiga-window	starting.txt	/*amiga-window*
+and()	eval.txt	/*and()*
 anonymous-function	eval.txt	/*anonymous-function*
 ant.vim	syntax.txt	/*ant.vim*
 ap	motion.txt	/*ap*
@@ -4736,6 +4760,7 @@ autocmds-kept	version5.txt	/*autocmds-kept*
 autocommand	autocmd.txt	/*autocommand*
 autocommand-events	autocmd.txt	/*autocommand-events*
 autocommand-pattern	autocmd.txt	/*autocommand-pattern*
+autoformat	change.txt	/*autoformat*
 autoload	eval.txt	/*autoload*
 autoload-functions	eval.txt	/*autoload-functions*
 avoid-hit-enter	version5.txt	/*avoid-hit-enter*
@@ -4784,6 +4809,7 @@ beval_col-variable	eval.txt	/*beval_col-variable*
 beval_lnum-variable	eval.txt	/*beval_lnum-variable*
 beval_text-variable	eval.txt	/*beval_text-variable*
 beval_winnr-variable	eval.txt	/*beval_winnr-variable*
+bitwise-function	usr_41.txt	/*bitwise-function*
 blockwise-examples	visual.txt	/*blockwise-examples*
 blockwise-operators	visual.txt	/*blockwise-operators*
 blockwise-register	change.txt	/*blockwise-register*
@@ -4963,7 +4989,6 @@ cino-(	indent.txt	/*cino-(*
 cino-)	indent.txt	/*cino-)*
 cino-+	indent.txt	/*cino-+*
 cino-/	indent.txt	/*cino-\/*
-cino-2	indent.txt	/*cino-2*
 cino-:	indent.txt	/*cino-:*
 cino-=	indent.txt	/*cino-=*
 cino->	indent.txt	/*cino->*
@@ -4983,6 +5008,7 @@ cino-g	indent.txt	/*cino-g*
 cino-h	indent.txt	/*cino-h*
 cino-i	indent.txt	/*cino-i*
 cino-j	indent.txt	/*cino-j*
+cino-k	indent.txt	/*cino-k*
 cino-l	indent.txt	/*cino-l*
 cino-m	indent.txt	/*cino-m*
 cino-n	indent.txt	/*cino-n*
@@ -4990,6 +5016,7 @@ cino-p	indent.txt	/*cino-p*
 cino-star	indent.txt	/*cino-star*
 cino-t	indent.txt	/*cino-t*
 cino-u	indent.txt	/*cino-u*
+cino-w	indent.txt	/*cino-w*
 cino-{	indent.txt	/*cino-{*
 cino-}	indent.txt	/*cino-}*
 cinoptions-values	indent.txt	/*cinoptions-values*
@@ -4998,6 +5025,13 @@ clearmatches()	eval.txt	/*clearmatches()*
 client-server	remote.txt	/*client-server*
 clientserver	remote.txt	/*clientserver*
 clipboard	gui.txt	/*clipboard*
+clipboard-autoselect	options.txt	/*clipboard-autoselect*
+clipboard-autoselectml	options.txt	/*clipboard-autoselectml*
+clipboard-autoselectplus	options.txt	/*clipboard-autoselectplus*
+clipboard-exclude	options.txt	/*clipboard-exclude*
+clipboard-html	options.txt	/*clipboard-html*
+clipboard-unnamed	options.txt	/*clipboard-unnamed*
+clipboard-unnamedplus	options.txt	/*clipboard-unnamedplus*
 cmdarg-variable	eval.txt	/*cmdarg-variable*
 cmdbang-variable	eval.txt	/*cmdbang-variable*
 cmdline-arguments	vi_diff.txt	/*cmdline-arguments*
@@ -5258,6 +5292,7 @@ develop-spell	develop.txt	/*develop-spell*
 develop-spell-suggestions	develop.txt	/*develop-spell-suggestions*
 develop.txt	develop.txt	/*develop.txt*
 development	develop.txt	/*development*
+dgn	motion.txt	/*dgn*
 dh	change.txt	/*dh*
 diB	motion.txt	/*diB*
 diW	motion.txt	/*diW*
@@ -5690,8 +5725,10 @@ ft-ptcap-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-ptcap-syntax*
 ft-python-indent	indent.txt	/*ft-python-indent*
 ft-python-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-python-syntax*
 ft-quake-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-quake-syntax*
+ft-r-indent	indent.txt	/*ft-r-indent*
 ft-readline-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-readline-syntax*
 ft-rexx-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-rexx-syntax*
+ft-rst-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-rst-syntax*
 ft-ruby-omni	insert.txt	/*ft-ruby-omni*
 ft-ruby-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-ruby-syntax*
 ft-scheme-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-scheme-syntax*
@@ -5756,6 +5793,7 @@ g-	undo.txt	/*g-*
 g0	motion.txt	/*g0*
 g8	various.txt	/*g8*
 g:NetrwTopLvlMenu	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:NetrwTopLvlMenu*
+g:Netrw_corehandler	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:Netrw_corehandler*
 g:Netrw_funcref	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:Netrw_funcref*
 g:ada#Comment	ft_ada.txt	/*g:ada#Comment*
 g:ada#Ctags_Kinds	ft_ada.txt	/*g:ada#Ctags_Kinds*
@@ -5799,6 +5837,27 @@ g:gnat.Project_File	ft_ada.txt	/*g:gnat.Project_File*
 g:gnat.Set_Project_File()	ft_ada.txt	/*g:gnat.Set_Project_File()*
 g:gnat.Tags()	ft_ada.txt	/*g:gnat.Tags()*
 g:gnat.Tags_Command	ft_ada.txt	/*g:gnat.Tags_Command*
+g:html_charset_override	syntax.txt	/*g:html_charset_override*
+g:html_diff_one_file	syntax.txt	/*g:html_diff_one_file*
+g:html_dynamic_folds	syntax.txt	/*g:html_dynamic_folds*
+g:html_encoding_override	syntax.txt	/*g:html_encoding_override*
+g:html_end_line	syntax.txt	/*g:html_end_line*
+g:html_expand_tabs	syntax.txt	/*g:html_expand_tabs*
+g:html_hover_unfold	syntax.txt	/*g:html_hover_unfold*
+g:html_ignore_conceal	syntax.txt	/*g:html_ignore_conceal*
+g:html_ignore_folding	syntax.txt	/*g:html_ignore_folding*
+g:html_no_foldcolumn	syntax.txt	/*g:html_no_foldcolumn*
+g:html_no_invalid	syntax.txt	/*g:html_no_invalid*
+g:html_no_pre	syntax.txt	/*g:html_no_pre*
+g:html_no_progress	syntax.txt	/*g:html_no_progress*
+g:html_number_lines	syntax.txt	/*g:html_number_lines*
+g:html_pre_wrap	syntax.txt	/*g:html_pre_wrap*
+g:html_prevent_copy	syntax.txt	/*g:html_prevent_copy*
+g:html_start_line	syntax.txt	/*g:html_start_line*
+g:html_use_css	syntax.txt	/*g:html_use_css*
+g:html_use_encoding	syntax.txt	/*g:html_use_encoding*
+g:html_use_xhtml	syntax.txt	/*g:html_use_xhtml*
+g:html_whole_filler	syntax.txt	/*g:html_whole_filler*
 g:netrw_alto	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_alto*
 g:netrw_altv	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_altv*
 g:netrw_banner	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_banner*
@@ -5814,6 +5873,8 @@ g:netrw_cygwin	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_cygwin*
 g:netrw_dav_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_dav_cmd*
 g:netrw_decompress	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_decompress*
 g:netrw_dirhistmax	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_dirhistmax*
+g:netrw_dynamic_maxfilenamelen	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_dynamic_maxfilenamelen*
+g:netrw_errorlvl	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_errorlvl*
 g:netrw_fastbrowse	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_fastbrowse*
 g:netrw_fetch_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_fetch_cmd*
 g:netrw_fname_escape	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_fname_escape*
@@ -5821,6 +5882,7 @@ g:netrw_ftp	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp*
 g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject*
 g:netrw_ftp_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_cmd*
 g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd*
+g:netrw_ftp_options	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_options*
 g:netrw_ftp_sizelist_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_sizelist_cmd*
 g:netrw_ftp_timelist_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_timelist_cmd*
 g:netrw_ftpextracmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftpextracmd*
@@ -5835,17 +5897,19 @@ g:netrw_keepdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_keepdir*
 g:netrw_list_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_list_cmd*
 g:netrw_list_hide	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_list_hide*
 g:netrw_liststyle	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_liststyle*
-g:netrw_local_mkdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_local_mkdir*
-g:netrw_local_rmdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_local_rmdir*
 g:netrw_localcopycmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localcopycmd*
+g:netrw_localmkdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localmkdir*
 g:netrw_localmovecmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localmovecmd*
+g:netrw_localrmdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_localrmdir*
 g:netrw_maxfilenamelen	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_maxfilenamelen*
 g:netrw_menu	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_menu*
 g:netrw_mkdir_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_mkdir_cmd*
 g:netrw_mousemaps	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_mousemaps*
+g:netrw_nobeval	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_nobeval*
 g:netrw_nogx	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_nogx*
 g:netrw_preview	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_preview*
 g:netrw_rcp_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rcp_cmd*
+g:netrw_remote_mkdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_remote_mkdir*
 g:netrw_retmap	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_retmap*
 g:netrw_rm_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rm_cmd*
 g:netrw_rmdir_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_rmdir_cmd*
@@ -5873,6 +5937,8 @@ g:netrw_use_nt_rcp	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_use_nt_rcp*
 g:netrw_win95ftp	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_win95ftp*
 g:netrw_winsize	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_winsize*
 g:netrw_xstrlen	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_xstrlen*
+g:sh_isk	syntax.txt	/*g:sh_isk*
+g:sh_noisk	syntax.txt	/*g:sh_noisk*
 g:syntax_on	syntax.txt	/*g:syntax_on*
 g:tar_browseoptions	pi_tar.txt	/*g:tar_browseoptions*
 g:tar_cmd	pi_tar.txt	/*g:tar_cmd*
@@ -5883,6 +5949,7 @@ g:tar_readoptions	pi_tar.txt	/*g:tar_readoptions*
 g:tar_secure	pi_tar.txt	/*g:tar_secure*
 g:tar_writeoptions	pi_tar.txt	/*g:tar_writeoptions*
 g:tex_conceal	syntax.txt	/*g:tex_conceal*
+g:tex_isk	syntax.txt	/*g:tex_isk*
 g:var	eval.txt	/*g:var*
 g:vimball_home	pi_vimball.txt	/*g:vimball_home*
 g:vimball_mkdir	pi_vimball.txt	/*g:vimball_mkdir*
@@ -5913,6 +5980,7 @@ gF	editing.txt	/*gF*
 gH	visual.txt	/*gH*
 gI	insert.txt	/*gI*
 gJ	change.txt	/*gJ*
+gN	visual.txt	/*gN*
 gP	change.txt	/*gP*
 gQ	intro.txt	/*gQ*
 gR	change.txt	/*gR*
@@ -5933,6 +6001,7 @@ g`a	motion.txt	/*g`a*
 ga	various.txt	/*ga*
 garbagecollect()	eval.txt	/*garbagecollect()*
 gd	pattern.txt	/*gd*
+gdb	debug.txt	/*gdb*
 ge	motion.txt	/*ge*
 get()	eval.txt	/*get()*
 get-ms-debuggers	debug.txt	/*get-ms-debuggers*
@@ -5996,6 +6065,7 @@ glvs-options	pi_getscript.txt	/*glvs-options*
 glvs-plugins	pi_getscript.txt	/*glvs-plugins*
 glvs-usage	pi_getscript.txt	/*glvs-usage*
 gm	motion.txt	/*gm*
+gn	visual.txt	/*gn*
 gnat#Insert_Tags_Header()	ft_ada.txt	/*gnat#Insert_Tags_Header()*
 gnat#New()	ft_ada.txt	/*gnat#New()*
 gnat-xref	ft_ada.txt	/*gnat-xref*
@@ -6022,6 +6092,7 @@ gtk-tooltip-colors	gui_x11.txt	/*gtk-tooltip-colors*
 gu	change.txt	/*gu*
 gugu	change.txt	/*gugu*
 gui	gui.txt	/*gui*
+gui-IME	gui.txt	/*gui-IME*
 gui-clipboard	gui_w32.txt	/*gui-clipboard*
 gui-colors	syntax.txt	/*gui-colors*
 gui-extras	gui.txt	/*gui-extras*
@@ -6120,6 +6191,7 @@ helpfile_name.txt	helphelp.txt	/*helpfile_name.txt*
 helphelp	helphelp.txt	/*helphelp*
 helphelp.txt	helphelp.txt	/*helphelp.txt*
 hex-editing	tips.txt	/*hex-editing*
+hex-number	eval.txt	/*hex-number*
 hidden-buffer	windows.txt	/*hidden-buffer*
 hidden-changed	version5.txt	/*hidden-changed*
 hidden-menus	gui.txt	/*hidden-menus*
@@ -6161,6 +6233,7 @@ hl-Cursor	syntax.txt	/*hl-Cursor*
 hl-CursorColumn	syntax.txt	/*hl-CursorColumn*
 hl-CursorIM	syntax.txt	/*hl-CursorIM*
 hl-CursorLine	syntax.txt	/*hl-CursorLine*
+hl-CursorLineNr	syntax.txt	/*hl-CursorLineNr*
 hl-DiffAdd	syntax.txt	/*hl-DiffAdd*
 hl-DiffChange	syntax.txt	/*hl-DiffChange*
 hl-DiffDelete	syntax.txt	/*hl-DiffDelete*
@@ -6230,6 +6303,7 @@ i)	motion.txt	/*i)*
 i<	motion.txt	/*i<*
 i>	motion.txt	/*i>*
 iB	motion.txt	/*iB*
+iBus	gui.txt	/*iBus*
 iW	motion.txt	/*iW*
 i[	motion.txt	/*i[*
 i]	motion.txt	/*i]*
@@ -6425,6 +6499,7 @@ internet	intro.txt	/*internet*
 intro	intro.txt	/*intro*
 intro.txt	intro.txt	/*intro.txt*
 inverse	syntax.txt	/*inverse*
+invert()	eval.txt	/*invert()*
 ip	motion.txt	/*ip*
 iquote	motion.txt	/*iquote*
 is	motion.txt	/*is*
@@ -6485,6 +6560,13 @@ last-pattern	pattern.txt	/*last-pattern*
 last-position-jump	eval.txt	/*last-position-jump*
 last_buffer_nr()	eval.txt	/*last_buffer_nr()*
 lc_time-variable	eval.txt	/*lc_time-variable*
+lcs-conceal	options.txt	/*lcs-conceal*
+lcs-eol	options.txt	/*lcs-eol*
+lcs-extends	options.txt	/*lcs-extends*
+lcs-nbsp	options.txt	/*lcs-nbsp*
+lcs-precedes	options.txt	/*lcs-precedes*
+lcs-tab	options.txt	/*lcs-tab*
+lcs-trail	options.txt	/*lcs-trail*
 left-right-motions	motion.txt	/*left-right-motions*
 len()	eval.txt	/*len()*
 less	various.txt	/*less*
@@ -6535,11 +6617,18 @@ lpc.vim	syntax.txt	/*lpc.vim*
 lua	if_lua.txt	/*lua*
 lua-buffer	if_lua.txt	/*lua-buffer*
 lua-commands	if_lua.txt	/*lua-commands*
+lua-dict	if_lua.txt	/*lua-dict*
+lua-eval	if_lua.txt	/*lua-eval*
+lua-list	if_lua.txt	/*lua-list*
+lua-luaeval	if_lua.txt	/*lua-luaeval*
 lua-vim	if_lua.txt	/*lua-vim*
 lua-window	if_lua.txt	/*lua-window*
 lua.vim	syntax.txt	/*lua.vim*
+luaeval()	eval.txt	/*luaeval()*
 m	motion.txt	/*m*
 m'	motion.txt	/*m'*
+m<	motion.txt	/*m<*
+m>	motion.txt	/*m>*
 m[	motion.txt	/*m[*
 m]	motion.txt	/*m]*
 m`	motion.txt	/*m`*
@@ -6753,6 +6842,7 @@ netrw-R	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-R*
 netrw-S	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-S*
 netrw-T	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-T*
 netrw-U	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-U*
+netrw-X	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-X*
 netrw-a	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-a*
 netrw-activate	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-activate*
 netrw-bookmark	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-bookmark*
@@ -6762,6 +6852,7 @@ netrw-browse-cmds	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browse-cmds*
 netrw-browse-maps	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browse-maps*
 netrw-browser	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browser*
 netrw-browser-options	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browser-options*
+netrw-browser-settings	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browser-settings*
 netrw-browser-var	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browser-var*
 netrw-browsing	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browsing*
 netrw-c	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-c*
@@ -6810,6 +6901,7 @@ netrw-history	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-history*
 netrw-horiz	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-horiz*
 netrw-i	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-i*
 netrw-incompatible	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-incompatible*
+netrw-internal-variables	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-internal-variables*
 netrw-intro-browse	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-intro-browse*
 netrw-leftmouse	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-leftmouse*
 netrw-list	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-list*
@@ -6887,8 +6979,10 @@ netrw-rexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-rexplore*
 netrw-rightmouse	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-rightmouse*
 netrw-s	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-s*
 netrw-settings	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-settings*
+netrw-settings-window	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-settings-window*
 netrw-sexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-sexplore*
 netrw-sort	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-sort*
+netrw-sort-sequence	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-sort-sequence*
 netrw-sortsequence	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-sortsequence*
 netrw-source	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-source*
 netrw-ssh-hack	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-ssh-hack*
@@ -6910,6 +7004,8 @@ netrw-v	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-v*
 netrw-var	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-var*
 netrw-variables	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-variables*
 netrw-vexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-vexplore*
+netrw-windows-netrc	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-windows-netrc*
+netrw-windows-s	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-windows-s*
 netrw-write	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-write*
 netrw-x	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-x*
 netrw-xfer	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-xfer*
@@ -7021,7 +7117,8 @@ objects	index.txt	/*objects*
 obtaining-exted	netbeans.txt	/*obtaining-exted*
 ocaml.vim	syntax.txt	/*ocaml.vim*
 octal	eval.txt	/*octal*
-octal-number	options.txt	/*octal-number*
+octal-nrformats	options.txt	/*octal-nrformats*
+octal-number	eval.txt	/*octal-number*
 oldfiles-variable	eval.txt	/*oldfiles-variable*
 ole-activation	if_ole.txt	/*ole-activation*
 ole-eval	if_ole.txt	/*ole-eval*
@@ -7046,6 +7143,7 @@ options	options.txt	/*options*
 options-changed	version5.txt	/*options-changed*
 options.txt	options.txt	/*options.txt*
 optwin	options.txt	/*optwin*
+or()	eval.txt	/*or()*
 oracle	ft_sql.txt	/*oracle*
 os2	os_os2.txt	/*os2*
 os2ansi	os_os2.txt	/*os2ansi*
@@ -7191,7 +7289,10 @@ pterm-mouse	options.txt	/*pterm-mouse*
 pumvisible()	eval.txt	/*pumvisible()*
 put	change.txt	/*put*
 put-Visual-mode	change.txt	/*put-Visual-mode*
+py3eval()	eval.txt	/*py3eval()*
+pyeval()	eval.txt	/*pyeval()*
 python	if_pyth.txt	/*python*
+python-bindeval	if_pyth.txt	/*python-bindeval*
 python-buffer	if_pyth.txt	/*python-buffer*
 python-buffers	if_pyth.txt	/*python-buffers*
 python-command	if_pyth.txt	/*python-command*
@@ -7203,6 +7304,7 @@ python-eval	if_pyth.txt	/*python-eval*
 python-examples	if_pyth.txt	/*python-examples*
 python-input	if_pyth.txt	/*python-input*
 python-output	if_pyth.txt	/*python-output*
+python-pyeval	if_pyth.txt	/*python-pyeval*
 python-range	if_pyth.txt	/*python-range*
 python-vim	if_pyth.txt	/*python-vim*
 python-window	if_pyth.txt	/*python-window*
@@ -7327,6 +7429,7 @@ rileft.txt	rileft.txt	/*rileft.txt*
 riscos	os_risc.txt	/*riscos*
 rot13	change.txt	/*rot13*
 round()	eval.txt	/*round()*
+rst.vim	syntax.txt	/*rst.vim*
 rsync	pi_netrw.txt	/*rsync*
 ruby	if_ruby.txt	/*ruby*
 ruby-buffer	if_ruby.txt	/*ruby-buffer*
@@ -7378,6 +7481,8 @@ save-file	editing.txt	/*save-file*
 save-settings	starting.txt	/*save-settings*
 scheme.vim	syntax.txt	/*scheme.vim*
 scp	pi_netrw.txt	/*scp*
+screencol()	eval.txt	/*screencol()*
+screenrow()	eval.txt	/*screenrow()*
 script	usr_41.txt	/*script*
 script-here	if_perl.txt	/*script-here*
 script-local	map.txt	/*script-local*
@@ -7442,12 +7547,16 @@ setuid	change.txt	/*setuid*
 setwinvar()	eval.txt	/*setwinvar()*
 sftp	pi_netrw.txt	/*sftp*
 sgml.vim	syntax.txt	/*sgml.vim*
+sgr-mouse	options.txt	/*sgr-mouse*
+sh-awk	syntax.txt	/*sh-awk*
+sh-embed	syntax.txt	/*sh-embed*
 sh.vim	syntax.txt	/*sh.vim*
 shell-window	tips.txt	/*shell-window*
 shell_error-variable	eval.txt	/*shell_error-variable*
 shellescape()	eval.txt	/*shellescape()*
 shift	intro.txt	/*shift*
 shift-left-right	change.txt	/*shift-left-right*
+shiftwidth()	eval.txt	/*shiftwidth()*
 short-name-changed	version4.txt	/*short-name-changed*
 showing-menus	gui.txt	/*showing-menus*
 sign-commands	sign.txt	/*sign-commands*
@@ -8050,6 +8159,7 @@ unix	os_unix.txt	/*unix*
 unlisted-buffer	windows.txt	/*unlisted-buffer*
 up-down-motions	motion.txt	/*up-down-motions*
 uppercase	change.txt	/*uppercase*
+urxvt-mouse	options.txt	/*urxvt-mouse*
 use-cpo-save	usr_41.txt	/*use-cpo-save*
 use-visual-cmds	version4.txt	/*use-visual-cmds*
 useful-mappings	tips.txt	/*useful-mappings*
@@ -8225,11 +8335,13 @@ v_d	change.txt	/*v_d*
 v_g?	change.txt	/*v_g?*
 v_gF	editing.txt	/*v_gF*
 v_gJ	change.txt	/*v_gJ*
+v_gN	visual.txt	/*v_gN*
 v_gV	visual.txt	/*v_gV*
 v_g]	tagsrch.txt	/*v_g]*
 v_g_CTRL-G	editing.txt	/*v_g_CTRL-G*
 v_g_CTRL-]	tagsrch.txt	/*v_g_CTRL-]*
 v_gf	editing.txt	/*v_gf*
+v_gn	visual.txt	/*v_gn*
 v_gq	change.txt	/*v_gq*
 v_gv	visual.txt	/*v_gv*
 v_gw	change.txt	/*v_gw*
@@ -8332,13 +8444,27 @@ vimdev	intro.txt	/*vimdev*
 vimdiff	diff.txt	/*vimdiff*
 vimfiles	options.txt	/*vimfiles*
 viminfo	starting.txt	/*viminfo*
+viminfo-!	options.txt	/*viminfo-!*
+viminfo-%	options.txt	/*viminfo-%*
+viminfo-'	options.txt	/*viminfo-'*
+viminfo-/	options.txt	/*viminfo-\/*
+viminfo-:	options.txt	/*viminfo-:*
+viminfo-<	options.txt	/*viminfo-<*
+viminfo-@	options.txt	/*viminfo-@*
+viminfo-c	options.txt	/*viminfo-c*
 viminfo-encoding	starting.txt	/*viminfo-encoding*
 viminfo-errors	starting.txt	/*viminfo-errors*
+viminfo-f	options.txt	/*viminfo-f*
 viminfo-file	starting.txt	/*viminfo-file*
 viminfo-file-marks	starting.txt	/*viminfo-file-marks*
 viminfo-file-name	starting.txt	/*viminfo-file-name*
+viminfo-h	options.txt	/*viminfo-h*
+viminfo-n	options.txt	/*viminfo-n*
+viminfo-quote	options.txt	/*viminfo-quote*
+viminfo-r	options.txt	/*viminfo-r*
 viminfo-read	starting.txt	/*viminfo-read*
 viminfo-read-write	starting.txt	/*viminfo-read-write*
+viminfo-s	options.txt	/*viminfo-s*
 viminfo-write	starting.txt	/*viminfo-write*
 vimrc	starting.txt	/*vimrc*
 vimrc-filetype	usr_05.txt	/*vimrc-filetype*
@@ -8378,6 +8504,7 @@ vt100-cursor-keys	term.txt	/*vt100-cursor-keys*
 vt100-function-keys	term.txt	/*vt100-function-keys*
 w	motion.txt	/*w*
 w32-clientserver	remote.txt	/*w32-clientserver*
+w32-xpm-support	gui_w32.txt	/*w32-xpm-support*
 w:current_syntax	syntax.txt	/*w:current_syntax*
 w:quickfix_title	quickfix.txt	/*w:quickfix_title*
 w:var	eval.txt	/*w:var*
@@ -8488,6 +8615,7 @@ xiterm	syntax.txt	/*xiterm*
 xml-folding	syntax.txt	/*xml-folding*
 xml-omni-datafile	insert.txt	/*xml-omni-datafile*
 xml.vim	syntax.txt	/*xml.vim*
+xor()	eval.txt	/*xor()*
 xpm.vim	syntax.txt	/*xpm.vim*
 xterm-8-bit	term.txt	/*xterm-8-bit*
 xterm-8bit	term.txt	/*xterm-8bit*
--- a/runtime/doc/tagsrch.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/tagsrch.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*tagsrch.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2009 Feb 18
+*tagsrch.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Oct 28


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -770,12 +770,12 @@ CTRL-W i		Open a new window, with the cursor on the first line
 			{not in Vi}

 							*:dli* *:dlist*
-:[range]dl[ist][!] [/]string[/]
+:[range]dli[st][!] [/]string[/]
 			Like "[D"  and "]D", but search in [range] lines
 			(default: whole file).
 			See |:search-args| for [/] and [!].  {not in Vi}
 			Note that ":dl" works like ":delete" with the "l"
-			flag.
+			register.

 							*[_CTRL-D*
 [ CTRL-D		Jump to the first macro definition that contains the
--- a/runtime/doc/todo.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/todo.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jul 15
+*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Dec 05


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -34,21 +34,255 @@ not be repeated below, unless there is extra information.
 							*known-bugs*
 -------------------- Known bugs and current work -----------------------

-Go through more coverity reports.
+On external command get the message: 
+     SIGCHLD handler called (some thread has SIGCHLD unblocked)
+From MzScheme

-Crash in autocomplete, valgrind log. (Greg Weber, 2011 Apr 22)
+Go through more coverity reports.

 Discussion about canonicalization of Hebrew. (Ron Aaron, 2011 April 10)

+Checking runtime scripts: Thilo Six, 2012 Jun 6.
+
+GTK: problem with 'L' in 'guioptions' changing the window width.
+(Aaron Cornelius, 2012 Feb 6)
+
+Javascript file where indent gets stuck on: GalaxyMaster, 2012 May 3.
+
+The CompleteDone autocommand needs some info passed to it:
+- The word that was selected (empty if abandoned complete)
+- Type of completion: tag, omnifunc, user func.
+
+Patch for matchit.vim. (Mike Morearty, 2012 Nov 28)
+
+Patch to fix that the QuitPre autocommand clears the quitmore flag. (Techlive
+Zheng, 2012 Nov 28)
+
+":gundo" command: global undo.  Undoes changes spread over multiple files in
+the order they were made.  Also ":gredo".  Both with a count.  Useful when
+tests fail after making changes and you forgot in which files.
+
+Patch to make updating tabline faster. (Arseny Kapoulkine, 2012 Oct 3)
+Also remove the "rc" variable.
+
+Patch to make "- register not always used. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Nov 28)
+
+Crash with vimdiff. (Don Cruickshank, 2012 Sep 23)
+
+Patch to support subdirectories for help files. (Charles Campbell, 2012 Nov
+21)
+
+Patch for mzscheme.  (Sergey Khorev, 2012 Nov 19)
+What about ignoring SEGV?
+
+Win32: use 'guifontwide' for IME composition. (Taro Muraoka, 2012 Sep 30)
+Update Oct 2.
+
+Patch to fix :s command with confirm and typing "a". (Christian Brabandt, 2012
+Oct 28)
+
+/[^\n] does match at a line break.  Expected to do the same as /.
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2012 Dec 1.
+Test files in archive in another message.
+
+Patch to make multibyte input work on Win32 console when codepage differs from
+'encoding'. (Ken Takata, 2012 Sep 29)
+
+It's possible to defined an input() function that overrides the built-in one.
+(ZyX, 2012 Sep 28)
+
+Win32: When a directory name contains an exclamation mark, completion doesn't
+complete the contents of the directory.  No escaping for the "!"? (Jan
+Stocker, 2012 Jan 5)
+
+Problem parsing expression with function(). (Andy Wokula, 2012 Nov 22)
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, Nov 22.  Tests in another patch, Nov 23.
+
+Problem caused by patch 7.3.638: window->open does not update window
+correctly. Issue 91.
+
+Do allow real tags above the !_TAG entries. Undo older patch. Issue 90.
+
+Patch to support 'u' in interactive substitute. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Sep
+28)  With tests: Oct 9.
+
+Patch for IME handling, adds 'imactivatefunc' and 'imstatusfunc' option.
+(Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2012 Aug 16)
+Patch to improve IME handling. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2012 Jul 18)
+
+Issue 54: document behavior of -complete, also expands arg.
+
+New syntax files for apt. (quidame, 2012 Sep 21)
+
+'ff' is wrong for one-line file without EOL. (Issue 77)
+
+Patch for if_lua. (Luis Carvalho, 2012 Aug 26, update Aug 29, another Aug 30,
+then Sep 1, reminder Oct 14)
+
+Issue 72: 'autochdir' causes problems for :vimgrep.
+
+Undo problem: line not removed as expected when using setline() from Insert
+mode. (Israel Chauca, 2010 May 13, more in second msg)
+Break undo when CTRL-R = changes the text?  Or save more lines?
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2012 Nov 16.
+
+In the ATTENTION message about an existing swap file, mention the name of the
+process that is running.  It might actually be some other program, e.g. after
+a reboot.
+
+MS-Windows: Crash opening very long file name starting with "\\".
+(Christian Brock, 2012 Jun 29)
+
+It's probably a good idea to make a negative value for 'sts' use the value of
+'sw'.  Patch by So8res, Oct 3 2012
+
+Syntax update problem in one buffer opened in two windows, bottom window is
+not correctly updated. (Paul Harris, 2012 Feb 27)
+
+Patch to add assignments in cscope. (Uli Meis, Estabrooks, 2012 Sep 1)
+Alternate patch by Gary Johnson, Sep 4.
+
+Patch to add getsid(). (Tyru, 2011 Oct 2)  Do we want this?  Update Oct 4.
+Or use expand('<sid>')?
+
+Patch for :tabcloseleft, after closing a tab go to left tab. (William Bowers,
+2012 Aug 4)
+
+Patch with suggestions for starting.txt. (Tony Mechelynck, 2012 Oct 24)
+But use Gnome instead of GTK?
+
+Should be possible to enable/disable matchparen per window or buffer.
+Add a check for b:no_match_paren in Highlight_matching_Pair() (Marcin
+Szamotulski, 2012 Nov 8)
+
+Crash in autocmd that unloads buffers in a BufUnload event. (Andrew Pimlott,
+2012 Aug 11)  Disallow :new when BufUnload is being handled?
+
+MS-Windows ACL support doesn't work well.  Patch from Ken Takata, 2012 Aug 29.
+Update Aug 31.
+
+MS-Windows resizing problems:
+- Windows window on screen positioning: Patch by Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2012 Jun
+  20.  Uses getWindowRect() instead of GetWindowPlacement()
+- Win32: When the taskbar is at the top of the screen creating the tabbar
+  causes the window to move unnecessarily. (William E. Skeith III, 2012 Jan
+  12) Patch: 2012 Jan 13  Needs more work (2012 Feb 2)
+
+'iminsert' global value set when using ":setlocal iminsert"? (Wu, 2012 Jun 23)
+
+Help for b:undo_indent'. (Thilo Six, 2012 May 28)
+Also question if examples are correct.
+
+It should be possible to make globpath() return a list instead of a string,
+like with glob(). (Greg Novack, 2012 Nov 2)
+
+The input map for CTRL-O in mswin.vim causes problems after CTRL-X CTRL-O.
+Suggestion for another map. (Philip Mat, 2012 Jun 18)
+But use "gi" instead of "a".  Or use CTRL-\ CTRL-O.
+
+Patch to support user name completion on MS-Windows. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2012
+Aug 16)
+
+Have an option for spell checking to not mark any Chinese, Japanese or other
+double-width characters as error.  Or perhaps all characters above 256.
+(Bill Sun)  Helps a lot for mixed Asian and latin text.
+
+When there are no command line arguments ":next" and ":argu" give E163, which
+is confusing.  Should say "the argument list is empty".
+
+URXVT:
+- will get stuck if byte sequence does not contain the expected semicolon.
+- Use urxvt mouse support also in xterm.  Explanations:
+  http://www.midnight-commander.org/ticket/2662
+
+MS-Windows: test 17 fails.  Analysis by Michael Soyka, 2012 Nov 5.
+
+Patch to add tests for if_xcmdsrv.c., Jul 8, need some more work. (Brian Burns)
+New tests Jul 13.   Update Jul 17.  Discussion Jul 18.
+
+When running Vim in silent ex mode, an existing swapfile causes Vim to wait
+for a user action without a prompt. (Maarten Billemont, 2012 Feb 3)
+Do give the prompt? Quit with an error?
+
+Patch for 'backupcopy' default behavior for symlinks on Windows. (David Pope,
+2012 Mar 21, update Mar 31)
+With fix for memory leak: Ken Takata, 2012 Aug 24
+Another update Sep 24.
+
+Patch to list user digraphs. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Apr 14)
+
+Patch for input method status. (Hirohito Higashi, 2012 Apr 18)
+
+Patch to print the result of a :python command. (Maxim Philippov
+<philippovmi@gmail.com>, 2012 Aug 16)  Update Aug 17.
+
+Problem with winfixheight and resizing. (Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2011 Sep 17)
+Patch Sep 18.
+
+Patch for IME problems. Remove hacking code for old IM. (Yukihiro Nakadaira,
+2012 Jul 20)
+
+Patch for has('unnamedplus') docs. (Tony Mechelynck, 2011 Sep 27)
+And one for gui_x11.txt.
+
+-   Patch for 'breakindent' option: repeat indent for wrapped line. (Vaclav
+    Smilauer, 2004 Sep 13, fix Oct 31, update 2007 May 30)
+    Version for latest MacVim: Tobia Conforto, 2009 Nov 23
+    More recent version: https://retracile.net/wiki/VimBreakIndent
+    Posted to vim-dev by Taylor Hedberg, 2011 Nov 25
+
+Problem with starting Visual block mode with :norm when 'virtualedit' is set.
+(David glts, 2012 Jun 5)
+
+":cd" doesn't work when current directory path contains "**".
+finddir() has the same problem.  (Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2012 Jan 10)
+Requires a rewrite of the file_file_in_path code.
+
+Problem with l: dictionary being locked in a function. (ZyX, 2011 Jul 21)
+
+Should use has("browsefilter") in ftplugins.  Requires patch 7.3.593.
+
+Issue 48: foldopen error can't be caught by try/catch
+
+"dg_" deletes including the last character, "d:normal! g_" doesn't.
+(Nomen Nescio, 2012 Jun 27)
+
+Patch to sort functions starting with '<' after others.  Omit dict functions,
+they can't be called. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2011 Oct 11)
+
+Patch to pass list to or(), and() and xor(). (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2012 Feb 8)
+
+Patch to improve "it" and "at" text object matching. (Christian Brabandt, 2011
+Nov 20)
+
+Patch to improve GUI find/replace dialog. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 May 26)
+Update Jun 2.
+
+Patch to add ":py3do". (Lilydjwg, 2012 Apr 7)
+
+`[ moves to character after insert, instead of the last inserted character.
+(Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2011 Dec 9)
+
+Plugin for Modeleasy. (Massimiliano Tripoli, 2011 Nov 29)
+
+Updated syntax file for ssh_config, maintainer doesn't respond.
+(Leonard Ehrenfried, 2011 Sep 26)
+
+BufWinLeave triggers too late when quitting last window in a tab page. (Lech
+Lorens, 2012 Feb 21)
+
+Patch for 'transparency' option. (Sergiu Dotenco, 2011 Sep 17)
+Only for MS-Windows.  No documentation.  Do we want this?
+
+Patch to support cursor shape in Cygwin console. (Ben bgold, 2011 Dec 27)
+
 Patch to support UTF-8 for Hangul. (Shawn Y.H. Kim, 2011 May 1)
-Needs more work.
+Needs more work.  Pinged 2012 Jan 4.

-With "unamedplus" in 'clipboard' pasting in Visual mode causes error for empty
-register. (Michael Seiwald, 2011 Jun 28)
+Issue 64: when 'incsearch' is on can't paste LF on command line.

-The :z command doesn't work exactly as it should. (ChangZhuo Chen, 2011 Mar 2)
-Compare with how old Vi works and with posix spec.  terminal is 80 x 24,
-'scroll' option set to 11.
+On MS-Windows a temp dir with a & init causes system() to fail. (Ben Fritz,
+2012 Jun 19)

 'cursorline' is displayed too short when there are concealed characters and
 'list' is set.  (Dennis Preiser)
@@ -63,29 +297,39 @@ Syntax region with 'concealends' and a 'cchar' value, 'conceallevel' set to 2,
 only one of the two ends gets the cchar displayed. (Brett Stahlman, 2010 Aug
 21, Ben Fritz, 2010 Sep 14)

-When opening file from windows explorer, characters inside [] cause
-problems, even though double quotes are used. (Manuel Stol, 2011 Mar 9)
+'cursorline' is drawn incorrectly in diff mode. Patch by Christian Brabandt,
+2012 Apr 2.

-Patch to change the meaning of \n in substitute(). (motoya kurotsu, 2011 Mar 8)
+'cursorline' works on a text line only.  Add 'cursorscreenline' for
+highlighting the screen line. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Mar 31)

-Gui menu edit/paste in block mode insert only inserts in one line (Bjorn
-Winckler, 2011 May 11)
-Use function to set paste option and restore it, use CTRL-R+ to paste.
+Win32: Does building a 64 bit version with VC9 give warnings for int
+conversions? (Mike Williams)

-Help file foldexpr (ZyX)
+Win32: Patch to use task dialogs when available. (Sergiu Dotenco, 2011 Sep 17)
+New feature, requires testing.  Made some remarks.
+
+Win32: Patch for alpha-blended icons and toolbar height. (Sergiu Dotenco, 2011
+Sep 17)  Asked for feedback from others.
+
+Win32: Cannot cd into a directory that starts with a space. (Andy Wokula, 2012
+Jan 19)
+
+Win32: default for 'backupcopy' is wrong for a symbolic link. (mklink one
+two). (Benjamin Fritz, 2012 Mar 15)
+
+Need to escape $HOME on Windows?  (ZyX, 2011 Jul 21)
+
+"2" in 'formatopions' not working in comments. (Christian Corneliussen, 2011
+Oct 26)

 Bug in repeating Visual "u". (Lawrence Kesteloot, 2010 Dec 20)

-Patch to automatically get version number into NSIS. (Guopeng Wen, 2011 May
-27)
+Using "p" in Visual mode while specifying the small delete register "-
+overwrites the register before it is put. (Marcin Szamotulski, 2012 Nov 23)

-Patch to add more command completions (Dominique Pelle, 2011 Jun 25)
-
-Patch to have GvimExt not use "edit with existing Vim" entries.
-(Jerome Vuarand, 2011 Jun 22)
-
-Patch to make character classes work with multi-byte characters.
-(Dominique Pelle, 2011 May 31, update July 11)
+With "unamedplus" in 'clipboard' pasting in Visual mode causes error for empty
+register. (Michael Seiwald, 2011 Jun 28)  I can't reproduce it.

 In GTK Gvim, setting 'lines' and 'columns' to 99999 causes a crash (Tony
 Mechelynck, 2011 Apr 25).  Can reproduce the crash sometimes:
@@ -102,39 +346,39 @@ The error was 'RenderBadPicture (invalid Picture parameter)'.
   backtrace from your debugger if you break on the gdk_x_error() function.)
 Check that number of pixels doesn't go above 65535?

-8   Add an event like CursorHold that is triggered repeatedly, not just once
-    after typing something.
-Need for CursorHold that retriggers.  Use a key that doesn't do anything, or a
-function that resets did_cursorhold.
-Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2011 May 6.
-
 popup completion menu closes quickly when there is a fold in the buffer. (Jan
 Christoph Ebersbach, 2011 Jul 3)

-CursorHold repeats typed key when it's the start of a mapping.
-(Will Gray, 2011 Mar 23)
-Christian Brabandt: problem is that OP_PENDING isn't set.
-
 Windows keys not set properly on Windows 7?  (cncyber, 2010 Aug 26)

-This line hangs Vim, because of syntax HL:
-call append(line, "INFO  ....12....18....24....30....36....42....48....54....60....66....72....78%$")
-
 When using a Vim server, a # in the path causes an error message.
 (Jeff Lanzarotta, 2011 Feb 17)

+Setting $HOME on MS-Windows is not very well documented.  Suggestion by Ben
+Fritz (2011 Oct 27).
+
 Bug: E685 error for func_unref(). (ZyX, 2010 Aug 5)

 Bug: Windows 7 64 bit system freezes  when 'clipboard' set to "unnamed" and
 doing ":g/test/d".  Putting every delete on the clipboard? (Robert Chan, 2011
 Jun 17)

+When there is a ">" in a line that "gq" wraps to the start of the next line,
+then the following line will pick it up as a leader.  Should get the leader
+from the first line, not a wrapped line. (Matt Ackeret, 2012 Feb 27)
+
 Using ":break" or something else that stops executing commands inside a
 ":finally" does not rethrow a previously uncaught exception. (ZyX, 2010 Oct
 15)

 Vim using lots of memory when joining lines. (John Little, 2010 Dec 3)

+Changes to manpage plugin. (Elias Toivanen, 2011 Jul 25)
+
+Patch to make "z=" work when 'spell' is off.  Does this have nasty side
+effects?  (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Aug 5)
+Would also need to do this for spellbadword() and spellsuggest().
+
 On 64 bit MS-Windows "long" is only 32 bits, but we sometimes need to store a
 64 bits value.  Change all number options to use nropt_T and define it to the
 right type.
@@ -142,24 +386,23 @@ right type.
 string() can't parse back "inf" and "nan".  Fix documentation or fix code?
 (ZyX, 2010 Aug 23)

+Make 'formatprg' global-local. (Sung Pae)
+
 When doing "redir => s:foo" in a script and then "redir END" somewhere else
 (e.g. in a function) it can't find s:foo.

+When setqflist() uses a filename that triggers a BufReadCmd autocommand Vim
+doesn't jump to the correct line with :cfirst. (ZyX,  2011 Sep 18)
+
+7   Make "ga" show the digraph for a character, if it exists.
+Patch from Christian Brabandt, 2011 Aug 19.
+
 maparg() does not show the <script> flag.  When temporarily changing a
 mapping, how to restore the script ID?

-Patch to fix \%V item in regexp. (Christian Brabandt, 2010 Nov 8)
-Update Nov 19.  James Vega: still not right.  Christian: it's difficult.
-
-Patch to add up to 99 match groups. (Christian Brabandt, 2010 Dec 22)
-Also add named groups: \%{name}(re)  and \%{name}g
-
 Bug in try/catch: return with invalid compare throws error that isn't caught.
 (ZyX, 2011 Jan 26)

-Highlighting stops working after changing it many times.  Script to reproduce
-it: Pablo Contreras, 2010 Oct 12  Windows XP and 7.  Font is never freed?
-
 When setting a local option value from the global value, add a script ID that
 indicates this, so that ":verbose set" can give a hint.  Check with options in
 the help file.
@@ -171,16 +414,14 @@ Build problem with small features on Mac OS X 10.6. (Rainer, 2011 Jan 24)

 "0g@$" puts '] on last byte of multi-byte. (ZyX, 2011 Jan 22)

-Deleting a linewise selection that includes the last line of the file leaves
-an empty line. (Ben Schmidt, 2011 Mar 17)
-Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2011 Mar 19.
-
 Patch to support sorting on floating point number.  (Alex Jakushev, 2010 Oct
 30)

 Patch to addd TextDeletePost and TextYankPost events. (Philippe Vaucher, 2011
 May 24)  Update May 26.

+Patch for :tabrecently. (Hirokazu Yoshida, 2012 Jan 30)
+
 When a script contains "redir => s:foo" but doesn't end redirection, a
 following "redir" command gives an error for not being able to access s:foo.
 (ZyX, 2011 Mar 27)
@@ -194,6 +435,29 @@ With a filler line in diff mode, it isn't displayed in the column with line
 number, but it is in the sign column.  Doesn't look right. (ZyX 2011 Jun 5)
 Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2011 Jun 5.  Introduces new problems.

+8   Add a command to jump to the next character highlighted with "Error".
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, uses ]e [e ]t and [t. 2011 Aug 9.
+
+8   Add an event like CursorHold that is triggered repeatedly, not just once
+    after typing something.
+Need for CursorHold that retriggers.  Use a key that doesn't do anything, or a
+function that resets did_cursorhold.
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2011 May 6.
+
+7   Use "++--", "+++--" for different levels instead of "+---" "+----".
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2011 Jul 27.
+Update by Ben Fritz, with fix for TOhtml. (2011 Jul 30)
+
+9   Add %F to 'errorformat': file name without spaces.  Useful on Unix to
+    avoid matching something up to a time 11:22:33.
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2011 Jul 27.
+
+Patch to fix \%V item in regexp. (Christian Brabandt, 2010 Nov 8)
+Update Nov 19.  James Vega: still not right.  Christian: it's difficult.
+
+Patch to add up to 99 match groups. (Christian Brabandt, 2010 Dec 22)
+Also add named groups: \%{name}(re)  and \%{name}g
+
 In the sandbox it's not allowed to do many things, but it's possible to change
 or set variables.  Add a way to prevent variables from being changed in the
 sandbox?  E.g.: ":protect g:restore_settings".
@@ -217,21 +481,19 @@ Searching mixed with Visual mode doesn't redraw properly. (James Vega, 2010 Nov

 New esperanto spell file can't be processed. (Dominique Pelle, 2011 Jan 30)
 - move compflags to separate growarray?
- instead of a regexp use a hashtable.  Expand '?', '*", '+'.  What would be
+- instead of a regexp use a hashtable.  Expand '?', '*', '+'.  What would be
  the maximum repeat for * and +?

 "L'Italie" noted as a spell error at start of the sentence. (Dominique Pelle,
 2011 Feb 27)

-Patch to fail if configure can't find an interface, such as Python.
-(Shlomi Fish, 2011 Jul 11)
-
 Copy/paste between Vim and Google chrome doesn't work well for multi-byte
 characters. (Ben Haskell, 2010 Sep 17)
 When putting text in the cut buffer (when exiting) and conversion doesn't work
 properly, Prepend "ENC==={value of 'enc'}:" to the text and don't convert?
 Then it should at least work from Vim to Vim and in other applications it's
 clear why it doesn't work.
+Experimental patch by Christian Brabandt, 2012 Apr 19.

 Editing a file with a ^M with 'ff' set to "mac", opening a help file, then the
 ^M is displayed as ^J sometimes.  Getting 'ff' value from wrong window/buffer?
@@ -257,6 +519,8 @@ the system encoding (usually utf-8).
 Problem producing tags file when hebrew.frx is present.  It has a BOM.
 Results in E670. (Tony Mechelynck, 2010 May 2)

+'beval' option should be global-local.
+
 Ruby: ":ruby print $buffer.number" returns zero.

 setpos() does not restore cursor position after :normal. (Tyru, 2010 Aug 11)
@@ -289,6 +553,10 @@ mkdir().

 'cindent' not correct when 'list' is set. (Zdravi Korusef, 2010 Apr 15)

+C-indenting: A matching { in a comment is ignored, but intermediate { are not
+checked to be in a comment.  Implement FM_SKIPCOMM flag of findmatchlimit().
+Issue 46.
+
 When 'paste' is changed with 'pastetoggle', the ruler doesn't reflect this
 right away. (Samuel Ferencik, 2010 Dec 7)

@@ -309,26 +577,20 @@ Echo starts in the wrong column:

 Patch for GVimExt to show an icon. (Dominik Riebeling, 2010 Nov 7)

-GvimExt sets $LANG in the wrong way.  Patch by Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2011 Jun
-15.  This will fix issue no 11.
-
 When writing a file > 2Gbyte, the reported number of bytes is negative.
 (Antonio Colombo, 2010 Dec 18)

 Patch: Let rare word highlighting overrule good word highlighting.
 (Jakson A. Aquino, 2010 Jul 30, again 2011 Jul 2)

-Patch to make more characters work in dialogs. (Yankwei Jia, 2010 Aug 4)
-
-Patch for VisVim, pass file name to VimOpenFile. (Jiri Sedlak, 2010 Nov 12)
-
 When 'lines' is 25 and 'scrolloff' is 12, "j" scrolls zero or two lines
 instead of one. (Constantin Pan, 2010 Sep 10)

 Crash in setqflist(). (Benoit Mortgat, 2010 Nov 18)

-Patch to handle resizing when tab is opened, when at full size. (Yukihiro
-Nakadaira, 2010 Jan 6)
+Gui menu edit/paste in block mode insert only inserts in one line (Bjorn
+Winckler, 2011 May 11)
+Requires a map mode for Insert mode started from blockwise Visual mode.

 Writing nested List and Dict in viminfo gives error message and can't be read
 back. (Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2010 Nov 13)
@@ -367,12 +629,19 @@ Add local time at start of --startuptime output.
 Requires configure check for localtime().
 Use format year-month-day hr:min:sec.

+Patch to add "combine" to :syntax, combines highlight attributes. (Nate
+Soares, 2012 Dec 3)
+
+Patch to make ":hi link" also take arguments. (Nate Soares, 2012 Dec 4)
+
 Shell not recognized properly if it ends in "csh -f". (James Vega, 2009 Nov 3)
 Find tail?  Might have a / in argument.  Find space?  Might have space in
 path.

 Test 51 fails when language set to German. (Marco, 2011 Jan 9)
-Dominique can't reproduc it.
+Dominique can't reproduce it.
+
+'ambiwidth' should be global-local.

 ":function f(x) keepjumps" creates a function where every command is executed
 like it has ":keepjumps" before it.
@@ -386,10 +655,6 @@ Patch to support :undo absolute jump to file save number. (Christian Brabandt,
 Patch to use 'foldnextmax' also for "marker" foldmethod. (Arnaud Lacombe, 2011
 Jan 7)

-When setting 'undofile' while the file is already loaded, but unchanged, try
-to read the undo file.  Requires computing a checksum of the text. (Andy
-Wokula)
-
 Bug with 'incsearch' going to wrong line. (Wolfram Kresse, 2009 Aug 17)
 Only with "vim -u NONE".

@@ -407,38 +672,24 @@ Problem with stop directory in findfile(). (Adam Simpkins, 2009 Aug 26)
 Using ']' as the end of a range in a pattern requires double escaping:
     /[@-\\]]  (Andy Wokula, 2011 Jun 28)

-Undo problem: line not removed as expected when using setline() from Insert
-mode. (Israel Chauca, 2010 May 13, more in second msg)
-Break undo when CTRL-R = changes the text?  Or save more lines?
-
 Slow combination of folding and PHP syntax highlighting.  Script to reproduce
 it.  Caused by "syntax sync fromstart" in combination with patch 7.2.274.
 (Christian Brabandt, 2010 May 27)
 Generally, folding with 'foldmethod' set to "syntax" is slow.  Do profiling to
 find out why.

+Syntax priority problem. (Charles Campbell, 2011 Sep 15)
+
 When completion inserts the first match, it may trigger the line to be folded.
 Disable updating folds while completion is active? (Peter Odding, 2010 Jun 9)

 Using ":call foo#d.f()" doesn't autoload the "foo.vim" file.  Works OK for
 echo, just not for  ":call" and ":call call()". (Ted, 2011 Mar 17)

-Cannot use getchar() inside :normal and using an expression mapping.  Is this
-supposed to work?  (XyX, 2010 Sep 22)
-
-When using an expression mapping with a multi-byte character each byte is
-converted to a utf-8 character. (ZyX, 2011 Jan 4)
-Patch for possible solution. (Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2011 Jan 5)
-
 When a:base in 'completefunc' starts with a number it's passed as a number,
 not a string. (Sean Ma)  Need to add flag to call_func_retlist() to force a
 string value.

-There is no command line completion for ":lmap".
-
-":e ~br<Tab>" does not complete to ":e /home/bram/".  Would need to use
-getpwent() to find all the matches.
-
 Invalid read error in Farsi mode. (Dominique Pelle, 2009 Aug 2)

 For running gvim on an USB stick: avoid the OLE registration.  Use a command
@@ -473,6 +724,8 @@ Win32: Expanding 'path' runs into a maximum size limit. (bgold12, 2009 Nov 15)
 Win32: Patch for enabling quick edit mode in console. (Craig Barkhouse, 2010
 Sep 1)

+Win32: Patch for using .png files for icons. (Charles Peacech, 2012 Feb 5)
+
 Putting a Visual block while 'visualedit' is "all" does not leave the cursor
 on the first character. (John Beckett, 2010 Aug 7)

@@ -521,10 +774,6 @@ Now that colnr_T is int instead of unsigned, more type casts can be removed.
 'delcombine' does not work for the command line. (Tony Mechelynck, 2009 Jul
 20)

-Unwanted file name escaping: ":echo input('file:' , '', 'file')"
-And use file name completion on a file with spaces. (Frederic Hardy, 2009 Mar
-23)
-
 Don't load macmap.vim on startup, turn it into a plugin. (Ron Aaron,
 2009 Apr 7)  Reminder Apr 14.

@@ -564,10 +813,6 @@ Support a 'systemencoding' option (for Unix).  It specifies the encoding of
 file names. (Kikuchan, 2010 Oct 5).  Useful on a latin1 or double-byte Asian
 system when 'encoding' is "utf-8".

-Win32: A --remote command that has a directory name starting with a ( doesn't
-work, the backslash is removed, assuming that it escapes the (. (Valery
-Kondakoff, 2009 May 13)
-
 Win32 GUI: Changing manifest helps for dpi changes (Joe Castro, 2009 Mar 27)

 Win32 GUI: last message from startup doesn't show up when there is an echoerr
@@ -585,7 +830,7 @@ very high. (Yegappan Lakshmanan, 2010 Jul 22, Michael Peeters, 2010 Jul 22)
 Directory wrong in session file, caused by ":lcd" in BufEnter autocommand.
 (Felix Kater, 2009 Mar 3)

-Session file generates error upon loading, cause bu --remote-silent-tab.
+Session file generates error upon loading, cause by --remote-silent-tab.
 (7tommm (ytommm) 2010 Nov 24)

 Using ~ works OK on 'a' with composing char, but not on 0x0418  with composing
@@ -698,8 +943,6 @@ the buffer to be unmodified.
 Unfinished patch by Ian Kelling, 2008 Jul 11.  Followup Jul 14, need to have
 another look at it.

-Patch for c.vim and cpp.vim syntax files. (Chung-chieh Shan, 2008 Nov 26)
-
 c.vim: XXX in a comment is colored yellow, but not when it's after "#if 0".
 (Ilya Dogolazky, 2009 Aug 7)

@@ -708,8 +951,6 @@ error message?  Or is this easy to implement?  (Nathan Stratton Treadway, 2008
 Aug 20)  This is in ucs2bytes(), search for 0xBF.  Using the ++bad argument is
 at the other match for 0xBF.

-Fix for matchparen HL doesn't work.  beep.
-
 When adding "-complete=file" to a user command this also changes how the
 argument is processed for <f-args>. (Ivan Tishchenko, 2008 Aug 19)

@@ -755,11 +996,15 @@ escaping characters where the backslash is not removed later.  Asked Chris for
 an alternate solution, also for src/ex_getln.c.
 This also fails when the file or directory name contains "%". (Thoml, 2008
 July 7)
+Using --remote-silent while the current directory has a # in the name does not
+work, the # needs to be escaped. (Tramblay Bruno, 2012 Sep 15)

-The str2special() function doesn't handle multi-byte characters properly.
-Patch from Vladimir Vichniakov, 2007 Apr 24.
-Should clean up the whole function.  Also allow modifiers like <S-Char-32>?
-find_special_key() also has this problem.
+When using remote-silent the -R flag is not passed on. (Axel Bender, 2012 May
+31)
+
+Win32: A --remote command that has a directory name starting with a ( doesn't
+work, the backslash is removed, assuming that it escapes the (. (Valery
+Kondakoff, 2009 May 13)

 Problem with 'langmap' being used on the rhs of a mapping. (Nikolai Weibull,
 2008 May 14)
@@ -836,14 +1081,9 @@ try/catch not working for argument of return. (Matt Wozniski, 2008 Sep 15)

 try/catch not working when inside a for loop. (ZyX, 2011 Jan 25)

-Recognize and ignore BOM in error file. (Aleksey Baibarin)
-
 ":tab help" always opens a new tab, while ":help" re-uses an existing window.
 Would be more consistent when an existing tab is re-used. (Tony Mechelynck)

-":tab drop filename" doesn't work nicely when "filename" is open in a window
-in another tab. (Tony Mechelynck, 2009 Feb 13)
-
 Add ":nofold".  Range will apply without expanding to closed fold.

 Including NFA regexp code:
@@ -854,6 +1094,7 @@ Performance tests:
 - ~/vim/test/slowsearch
 - ~/vim/test/rgb.vim
 - ~/vim/text/FeiqCfg.xml (file from Netjune)
+- ~/vim/text/edl.svg  (also XML)
 - search for  a.*e*exn  in the vim executable.  Go to last line to use
  'hlsearch'.

@@ -871,9 +1112,6 @@ Can't easily close the help window, like ":pc" closes the preview window and
 ":ccl" closes the quickfix window.  Add ":hclose". (Chris Gaal)
 Patch for :helpclose, Christian Brabandt, 2010 Sep 6.

-Patch for :lmake not updating the quickfix window title. (Lech Lorens, 2011
-Mar 26)
-
 When 'diffopt' has "context:0" a single deleted line causes two folds to merge
 and mess up syncing. (Austin Jennings, 2008 Jan 31)

@@ -934,9 +1172,6 @@ popup menu over it, first draw the new popup menu, remember its position and
 size and then redraw the text, skipping the characters under the popup menu.
 This should avoid flicker.  Other solution by A.Politz, 2007 Aug 22.

-When the popup menu is close to the edge of the window it is truncated.  Patch
-to anchor the popup menu in a different way. (James Vega, 2008 Jul 30)
-
 Windows 98: pasting from the clipboard with text from another application has
 a trailing NUL.  (Joachim Hofmann)  Perhaps the length specified for CF_TEXT
 isn't right?
@@ -988,6 +1223,16 @@ Latest version: 2011 May 18
 8   Windows install with NSIS: make it possible to do a silent install, see
    http://nsis.sourceforge.net/Docs/Chapter4.html#4.12
    Version from Guopeng Wen that does this (2010 Dec 27)
+Alternative: MSI installer: https://github.com/petrkle/vim-msi/
+
+Windows installer should install 32-bit version of right-click handler also on
+64-bit systems. (Brian Cunningham, 2011 Dec 28)
+
+Windows installer could add a "open in new tab of existing Vim" menu entry.
+Gvimext: patch to add "Edit with single Vim &tabbed" menu entry.
+Just have two choices, always using one Vim and selecting between using an
+argument list or opening each file in a separate tab.
+(Erik Falor, 2008 May 21, 2008 Jun 26)

 Windows installer: licence text should not use indent, causes bad word wrap.
 (Benjamin Fritz, 2010 Aug 16)
@@ -1042,16 +1287,6 @@ pointer in long and seek offset in 64 bit var.

 Win32: patch for fullscreen mode. (Liushaolin, 2008 April 17)

-Win32: When 'shell' is cmd.exe this command fails:
-	echo system('"c:/path/echo.exe" "foo bar"')
-Should we set the default for 'shellxquote' to a double quote, when 'shell'
-contains "cmd" in the tail?  (Benjamin Fritz, 2008 Oct 13)
-Also set 'shellcmdflag' to include /s.
-
-Win32: When there is 4 Gbyte of memory mch_avail_mem() doesn't work properly.
-Unfinished patch by Jelle Geerts, 2008 Aug 24.
-Let mch_avail_mem() return Kbyte instead?
-
 Win32: When 'shell' is bash shellescape() doesn't always do the right thing.
 Depends on 'shellslash', 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote', but shellescape()
 only takes 'shellslash' into account.
@@ -1075,9 +1310,6 @@ If the variable "g:x#y#z" exists completion after ":echo g:x#" doesn't work.
 Feature request: Command to go to previous tab, like what CTRL-W p does for
 windows. (Adam George)

-When using input() in a loop and then ":echo" the display column isn't right.
-(Benjamin Fritz, 2008 Aug 28)  Patch by Ben Schmidt, 2008 Sep 2.
-
 F1 - F4 in an xterm produce a different escape sequence when used with a
 modifier key.  Need to catch three different sequences.  Use K_ZF1, like
 K_ZHOME? (Dickey, 2007 Dec 2)
@@ -1158,12 +1390,6 @@ When unloading a buffer in a BufHidden autocommand the hidden flag is reset?
 Substituting an area with a line break with almost the same area does change
 the Visual area.  Can this be fixed? (James Vega, 2006 Sept 15)

-Windows installer could add a "open in new tab of existing Vim" menu entry.
-Gvimext: patch to add "Edit with single Vim &tabbed" menu entry.
-Just have two choices, always using one Vim and selecting between using an
-argument list or opening each file in a separate tab.
-(Erik Falor, 2008 May 21, 2008 Jun 26)
-
 GUI: When combining fg en bg make sure they are not equal.

 Spell checking: Add a way to specify punctuation characters.  Add the
@@ -1370,6 +1596,9 @@ Win32, NTFS: When editing a specific infostream directly and 'backupcopy' is
 name is something like "c:\path\foo.txt:bar", includes a colon.  (Alex
 Jakushev, 2008 Feb 1)

+printf() uses the field width in bytes. Can it be made character width,
+perhaps with a modifier?  What does Posix say?
+
 Small problem displaying diff filler line when opening windows with a script.
 (David Luyer, 2007 Mar 1 ~/Mail/oldmail/mool/in.15872 )

@@ -1438,6 +1667,8 @@ Patch to support horizontal scroll wheel in GTK. Untested. (Bjorn Winckler,
 At next release:
 -   Rename src/Makefile and create a new one like toplevel Makefile that
    creates auto/config.mk when it's not there? (Ben Schmidt, 2011 Feb 11)
+-   Improve plugin handling: Automatic updates, handle dependencies?
+    E.g. Vundle: https://github.com/gmarik/vundle


 More patches:
@@ -1500,10 +1731,6 @@ Awaiting updated patches:
 7   Completion of network shares, patch by Yasuhiro Matsumoto.
    Update 2004 Sep 6.
    How does this work?  Missing comments.
-   Patch for 'breakindent' option: repeat indent for wrapped line. (Vaclav
-    Smilauer, 2004 Sep 13, fix Oct 31, update 2007 May 30)
-    Version for latest MacVim: Tobia Conforto, 2009 Nov 23
-    More recent version: https://retracile.net/wiki/VimBreakIndent
 8   Add a few more command names to the menus.  Patch from Jiri Brezina
    (28 feb 2002).  Will mess the translations...
 7   ATTENTION dialog choices are more logical when "Delete it' appears
@@ -1659,18 +1886,6 @@ Win32 GUI known bugs:
    the wide functions.
 8   On Windows 98 the unicows library is needed to support functions with UCS2
    file names.  Can we load unicows.dll dynamically?
-8   Win32: With two monitors, gvim partly on both, and adding/removing a
-    scrollbar Vim resizes and moves to one of the monitors. (Chris Monkiewicz,
-    2008 Oct)
-8   When the primary monitor is below or right of the secondary monitor and
-    Vim is on the secondary monitor it will often move to the primary monitor.
-    Window position coordinates can be negative. (James Harvey)
-    When the primary monitor is on the right, coordinates on the left monitor
-    are negative.  Clamping to zero means gvim jups to the primary monitor.
-    (Michael Wookey, 2010 Aug 17)
-    Probably the same issue: When the GUI tab pages line is displayed Vim
-    jumps from the secondary to the primary monitor. (Afton Lewis, 2007 Mar 9)
-    Possible solution using GetSystemMetrics() (Sergey Khorev, 2010 Aug 18)
 8   The -P argument doesn't work very well with many MDI applications.
    The last argument of CreateWindowEx() should be used, see MSDN docs.
    Tutorial: http://win32assembly.online.fr/tut32.html
@@ -2533,8 +2748,6 @@ Tab pages:
    font, etc.)
 8   Make GUI menu in tab pages line configurable.  Like the popup menu.
 8   balloons for the tab page labels that are shortened to show the full path.
-8   :tabmove +N	 move tab page N pages forward
-8   :tabmove -N	 move tab page N pages backward
 7   :tabdup	 duplicate the tab with all its windows.
 7   Option to put tab line at the left or right?  Need an option to specify
    its width.  It's like a separate window with ":tabs" output.
@@ -2662,7 +2875,6 @@ Folding:
 8   Add "z/" and "z?" for searching in not folded text only.
 9   Add search pattern item to only match in closed or open fold and/or fold
    with certain level.  Allows doing ":g/pat/cmd" to work on closed folds.
-7   Use "++--", "+++--" for different levels instead of "+---" "+----".
 8   When a closed fold is displayed open because of 'foldminlines', the
    behavior of commands is still like the fold is closed.  How to make the
    user aware of this?
@@ -2837,12 +3049,13 @@ Syntax highlighting:
    this isn't reset.  Add a special keyword definition for the syntax rules?
    When this is done, use vim.vim syntax highlighting for help file examples,
    but without ":" in 'iskeyword' for syntax.
+    Also need a separate 'iskeyword' for the command line, e.g., in a help
+    window ":e /asdf/asdf/" CTRL-W works different.
 8   Add specific syntax item to match with parens/braces that don't have a
    "%" match.  :syntax nomatch cMatchError (,{,[,),},] [contained]
 8   Highlight the text between two matching parens (e.g., with a grey
    background) when on one of the parens or in between them.
    Option for the matchparen plugin?
-8   Add a command to jump to the next character highlighted with "Error".
 8   When using a cterm, and no ctermfg or ctermbg are defined, use start/stop
    sequences.	Add remark in docs that :if 'term' == "term-name" should be
    used.
@@ -3143,10 +3356,6 @@ Performance:
    Add command to compile a vim script and add it to the file in-place.
    Split Ex command executing into a parsing and executing phase.
    Use compiled code for functions, while loops, etc.
-8   When editing a file with extremely long lines (e.g., an executable), the
-    "linerest" in readfile() is allocated twice to be able to copy what was
-    read so far.  Use realloc() instead?  Or split the line when allocating
-    memory fails and "linerest" is big (> 100000)?
 8   When defining autocommands (e.g., from $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim), need to
    compare each pattern with all existing patterns.  Use a hash code to avoid
    using strcmp() too often?
@@ -3842,7 +4051,6 @@ Insert mode:
 -   Add option to 'cindent' to set indent for comments outside of {}?
 -   Make a command to line up a comment after a code line with a previous
    comment after a code line.	Can 'cindent' do this automatically?
-7   Add 'j' flag to 'formatoptions': Remove comment leader when joining lines.
 -   When 'cindent'ing a '}', showmatch is done before fixing the indent.  It
    looks better when the indent is fixed before the showmatch. (Webb)
 -   Add option to make indenting work in comments too (for commented-out
@@ -4395,9 +4603,6 @@ Sessions:
 Options:
 7   ":with option=value | command": temporarily set an option value and
    restore it after the command has executed.
-7   Setting an option always sets "w_set_curswant", while this is only
-    required for a few options.  Only do it for those options to avoid the
-    side effect.
 8   Make "old" number options that really give a number of effects into string
    options that are a comma separated list.  The old number values should
    also be supported.
@@ -4479,11 +4684,8 @@ Marks:


 Digraphs:
-7   Make "ga" show the digraph for a character, if it exists.
-    Also the keymap?
+7   Make "ga" show the keymap for a character, if it exists.
    Also show the code of the character after conversion to 'filenecoding'.
-   Make it possible to enter "r<C-E>" and "r<C-Y>" (get character from line
-    below/above).
 -   Use digraph table to tell Vim about the collating sequence of special
    characters?
 8   Add command to remove one or more (all) digraphs. (Brown)
@@ -4601,8 +4803,6 @@ Debug mode:
 Various improvements:
 9   Python: be able to define a Python function that can be called directly
    from Vim script.  Requires converting the arguments and return value.
-8   ":sign unplace * file={filename}" should work.  Also: ":sign unplace *
-    buffer={bufnr}".  So one can remove all signs for one file/buffer.
 7   Add plugins for formatting?  Should be able to make a choice depending on
    the language of a file (English/Korean/Japanese/etc.).
    Setting the 'langformat' option to "chinese" would load the
@@ -4620,8 +4820,6 @@ Various improvements:
 7   Instead of filtering errors with a shell script it should be possible to
    do this with Vim script.  A function that filters the raw text that comes
    from the 'makeprg'?
-9   Add %F to 'errorformat': file name without spaces.  Useful on Unix to
-    avoid matching something up to a time 11:22:33.
 -   Add %b to 'errorformat': buffer number. (Yegappan Lakshmanan / Suresh
    Govindachar)
 7   Add a command that goes back to the position from before jumping to the
@@ -4809,6 +5007,7 @@ Various improvements:
 -   Make it possible for the 'showbreak' to be displayed at the end of the
    line.  Use a comma to separate the part at the end and the start of the
    line?  Highlight the linebreak characters, add flag in 'highlight'.
+    Make 'showbreak' local to a window.
 -   Some string options should be expanded if they have wildcards, e.g.
    'dictionary' when it is "*.h".
 -   Use a specific type for number and boolean options, making it possible to
--- a/runtime/doc/uganda.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/uganda.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*uganda.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Aug 07
+*uganda.txt*    For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Dec 02


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -238,6 +238,7 @@ Canada:		Contact Kibaale Children's Fund (KCF) in Surrey, Canada.  They
 Holland:	Transfer to the account of "Stichting ICCF Holland" in Lisse.
 		This will allow for tax deduction if you live in Holland.
 			Postbank, nr. 4548774
+			IBAN: NL95 INGB 0004 5487 74

 Germany:	It is possible to make donations that allow for a tax return.
 		Check the ICCF web site for the latest information:
@@ -266,7 +267,7 @@ Credit Card:	You can use PayPal to send money with a Credit card.  This is
 Others:		Transfer to one of these accounts if possible:
 		    Postbank, account 4548774
 				Swift code: INGB NL 2A
-				IBAN: NL47 PSTB 0004 5487 74
+				IBAN: NL95 INGB 0004 5487 74
 			under the name "stichting ICCF Holland", Lisse
 		    If that doesn't work:
 		    Rabobank Lisse, account 3765.05.117
--- a/runtime/doc/undo.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/undo.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*undo.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Dec 19
+*undo.txt*      For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Mar 04


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -35,8 +35,10 @@ CTRL-R			Redo [count] changes which were undone.  {Vi: redraw
 :red[o]			Redo one change which was undone.  {Vi: no redo}

 							*U*
-U			Undo all latest changes on one line.  {Vi: while not
-			moved off of it}
+U			Undo all latest changes on one line, the line where
+			the latest change was made. |U| itself also counts as
+			a change, and thus |U| undoes a previous |U|.
+			{Vi: while not moved off of the last modified line}

 The last changes are remembered.  You can use the undo and redo commands above
 to revert the text to how it was before each change.  You can also apply the
@@ -248,7 +250,7 @@ detect if an undo file is no longer synchronized with the file it was written
 for (with a hash of the file contents) and ignore it when the file was changed
 after the undo file was written, to prevent corruption.  An undo file is also
 ignored if its owner differs from the owner of the edited file.  Set 'verbose'
-to get a message about that.
+to get a message about that when opening a file.

 Undo files are normally saved in the same directory as the file.  This can be
 changed with the 'undodir' option.
@@ -265,7 +267,12 @@ respectively:
 		(the magic number at the start of the file is wrong), then
 		this fails, unless the ! was added.
 		If it exists and does look like an undo file it is
-		overwritten.
+		overwritten. If there is no undo-history, nothing will be 
+		written.
+		Implementation detail: Overwriting happens by first deleting
+		the existing file and then creating a new file with the same
+		name. So it is not possible to overwrite an existing undofile
+		in a write-protected directory.
 		{not in Vi}

 :rundo {file}	Read undo history from {file}.
--- a/runtime/doc/usr_05.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/usr_05.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2009 Jun 04
+*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 20

 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar

@@ -49,8 +49,7 @@ For MS-DOS and MS-Windows you can use one of these:

 The vimrc file can contain all the commands that you type after a colon.  The
 most simple ones are for setting options.  For example, if you want Vim to
-always start with the 'incsearch' option on, add this line you your vimrc
-file: >
+always start with the 'incsearch' option on, add this line your vimrc file: >

 	set incsearch

--- a/runtime/doc/usr_21.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/usr_21.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_21.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Nov 09
+*usr_21.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 02

 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar

@@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ example, use: >
 SESSION HERE, SESSION THERE

 The obvious way to use sessions is when working on different projects.
-Suppose you store you session files in the directory "~/.vim".  You are
+Suppose you store your session files in the directory "~/.vim".  You are
 currently working on the "secret" project and have to switch to the "boring"
 project: >

@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ is saved, using ":mksession!".  This overwrites the previous session.  The
 next time you load the secret session you can continue where you were at this
 point.  And finally you load the new "boring" session.

-If you open help windows, split and close various window, and generally mess
+If you open help windows, split and close various windows, and generally mess
 up the window layout, you can go back to the last saved session: >

 	:source ~/.vim/boring.vim
@@ -423,10 +423,10 @@ and nine numbered 1 to 9.
 A VIEW WITH A NAME

 The second basic way to use views is by storing the view in a file with a name
-you chose.  This view can be loaded while editing another file.  Vim will then
-switch to editing the file specified in the view.  Thus you can use this to
-quickly switch to editing another file, with all its options set as you saved
-them.
+you choose.  This view can be loaded while editing another file.  Vim will
+then switch to editing the file specified in the view.  Thus you can use this
+to quickly switch to editing another file, with all its options set as you
+saved them.
   For example, to save the view of the current file: >

 	:mkview ~/.vim/main.vim
--- a/runtime/doc/usr_22.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/usr_22.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_22.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Feb 21
+*usr_22.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Nov 15

 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar

@@ -326,9 +326,9 @@ shorter to type: >

 The output could look like this:

-  1 #h	"help.txt"			line 62 ~
-  2 %a+	"usr_21.txt"			line 1 ~
-  3	"usr_toc.txt"			line 1 ~
+  1 #h   "help.txt"			line 62 ~
+  2 %a + "usr_21.txt"			line 1 ~
+  3      "usr_toc.txt"			line 1 ~

 The first column contains the buffer number.  You can use this to edit the
 buffer without having to type the name, see below.
--- a/runtime/doc/usr_41.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/usr_41.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Jun 19
+*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Oct 13

 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar

@@ -670,6 +670,12 @@ Floating point computation:				*float-functions*
 	cosh()			hyperbolic cosine
 	tanh()			hyperbolic tangent

+Other computation:					*bitwise-function*
+	and()			bitwise AND
+	invert()		bitwise invert
+	or()			bitwise OR
+	xor()			bitwise XOR
+
 Variables:						*var-functions*
 	type()			type of a variable
 	islocked()		check if a variable is locked
@@ -1575,7 +1581,7 @@ Here the comment part will be ignored.  However, Vim will try to unmap

 RESTORING THE VIEW

-Sometimes you want to make a change and go back to where cursor was.
+Sometimes you want to make a change and go back to where the cursor was.
 Restoring the relative position would also be nice, so that the same line
 appears at the top of the window.
   This example yanks the current line, puts it above the first line in the
@@ -1675,7 +1681,7 @@ in your plugin file!
 HEADER

 You will probably add new corrections to the plugin and soon have several
-versions laying around.  And when distributing this file, people will want to
+versions lying around.  And when distributing this file, people will want to
 know who wrote this wonderful plugin and where they can send remarks.
 Therefore, put a header at the top of your plugin: >

@@ -1704,6 +1710,7 @@ make the script work for most people.  It is done like this: >
 12	set cpo&vim
 ..
 42	let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+ 43	unlet s:save_cpo

 We first store the old value of 'cpoptions' in the s:save_cpo variable.  At
 the end of the plugin this value is restored.
@@ -1950,6 +1957,7 @@ Here is the resulting complete example: >
 40	endif
 41
 42	let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+ 43	unlet s:save_cpo

 Line 33 wasn't explained yet.  It applies the new correction to the word under
 the cursor.  The |:normal| command is used to use the new abbreviation.  Note
--- a/runtime/doc/various.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/various.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 May 19
+*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Dec 05


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -136,6 +136,9 @@ g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
 			then twice the value of the 'scroll' option is used,
 			otherwise the current window height minus 3 is used.

+			If there is a {count} the 'window' option is set to
+			its value.
+
 			:z can be used either alone or followed by any of
 			several punctuation marks.  These have the following
 			effect:
@@ -352,6 +355,8 @@ N  *+mouse_gpm*		Unix only: Linux console mouse handling |gpm-mouse|
 B  *+mouse_netterm*	Unix only: netterm mouse handling |netterm-mouse|
 N  *+mouse_pterm*	QNX only: pterm mouse handling |qnx-terminal|
 N  *+mouse_sysmouse*	Unix only: *BSD console mouse handling |sysmouse|
+B  *+mouse_sgr*		Unix only: sgr mouse handling |sgr-mouse|
+B  *+mouse_urxvt*	Unix only: urxvt mouse handling |urxvt-mouse|
 N  *+mouse_xterm*	Unix only: xterm mouse handling |xterm-mouse|
 B  *+multi_byte*	16 and 32 bit characters |multibyte|
   *+multi_byte_ime*	Win32 input method for multibyte chars |multibyte-ime|
@@ -411,6 +416,7 @@ S  *+windows*		more than one window
 m  *+writebackup*	|'writebackup'| is default on
 m  *+xim*		X input method |xim|
   *+xfontset*		X fontset support |xfontset|
+m  *+xpm_w32*		Win32 GUI only: pixmap support |w32-xpm-support|
   *+xsmp*		XSMP (X session management) support
   *+xsmp_interact*	interactive XSMP (X session management) support
 N  *+xterm_clipboard*	Unix only: xterm clipboard handling
@@ -602,6 +608,10 @@ K			Run a program to lookup the keyword under the
 			"gs" stands for "goto sleep".
 			While sleeping the cursor is positioned in the text,
 			if at a visible position.  {not in Vi}
+			Also process the received netbeans messages. {only
+			available when compiled with the |+netbeans_intg|
+			feature}
+

 							*g_CTRL-A*
 g CTRL-A		Only when Vim was compiled with MEM_PROFILING defined
--- a/runtime/doc/version5.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/version5.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*version5.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2008 Dec 17
+*version5.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 08


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 Welcome to Vim Version 5.0!

 This document lists the differences between Vim 4.x and Vim 5.0.
-Although 5.0 is mentioned here, this is also for version 5.1, 5.2, etc..
+Although 5.0 is mentioned here, this is also for version 5.1, 5.2, etc.
 See |vi_diff.txt| for an overview of differences between Vi and Vim 5.0.
 See |version4.txt| for differences between Vim 3.0 and Vim 4.0.

@@ -3888,7 +3888,7 @@ character is typed.  Helps to close a /* */ comment in C. (Webb)
 When expand() has a second argument which is non-zero, don't use 'suffixes'
 and 'wildignore', return all matches.

-'O' flag in 'cpoptions: When not included, Vim will not overwrite a file, if
+'O' flag in 'cpoptions' When not included, Vim will not overwrite a file, if
 it didn't exist when editing started but it does exist when the buffer is
 written to the file.  The file must have been created outside of Vim, possibly
 without the user knowing it.  When this is detected after a shell command,
@@ -4499,7 +4499,7 @@ Could not get all windows back when using a smaller terminal screen.  Didn't
 restore all windows when "winsize" was not in 'sessionoptions'. (Webb)

 Command line completion for ":buffer" depended on 'ignorecase' for Unix, but
-not for DOS et al..  Now don't use 'ignorecase', but let it depend on whether
+not for DOS et al.  Now don't use 'ignorecase', but let it depend on whether
 file names are case sensitive or not (like when expanding file names).

 Win32 GUI: (Negri)
--- a/runtime/doc/version6.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/version6.txt
@@ -2452,7 +2452,7 @@ differently.

 ":n *.c" ":cd .." ":n" didn't use the original directory of the file.  Vi only
 does it for the current file (looks like a bug).  Now remember the buffer used
-for the entry in the argument list and use it's name (adjusted when doing
+for the entry in the argument list and use its name (adjusted when doing
 ":cd"), unless it's deleted.

 When inserting a special key as its name ("<F8>" as four characters) after
@@ -3675,7 +3675,7 @@ When double clicking on the first character of a word while 'selection' is


 Patch 6.0.001
-Problem:    Loading the sh.vim syntax file causes error messages . (Corinna
+Problem:    Loading the sh.vim syntax file causes error messages. (Corinna
 	    Vinschen)
 Solution:   Add an "if". (Charles Campbell)
 Files:	    runtime/syntax/sh.vim
@@ -9091,7 +9091,7 @@ Files:	    src/Make_w16.mak, src/testdir/Make_dos.mak
 Patch 6.1.402
 Problem:    When evaluating a function name with curly braces, an error
 	    is not handled consistently.
-Solution:   Accept the result of an curly braces expression when an
+Solution:   Accept the result of a curly braces expression when an
 	    error was encountered.  Skip evaluating an expression in curly
 	    braces when skipping.  (Servatius Brandt)
 Files:	    src/eval.c
--- a/runtime/doc/version7.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/version7.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*version7.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Nov 03
+*version7.txt*  For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 08


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -3587,7 +3587,7 @@ Files:	    src/eval.c, src/getchar.c, src/globals.h, src/main.c

 Patch 7.0.085
 Problem:    When doing "make test" the viminfo file is modified.
-Solution:   Use another viminfo file after setting 'compatible.
+Solution:   Use another viminfo file after setting 'compatible'.
 Files:	    src/testdir/test56.in

 Patch 7.0.086
@@ -7314,8 +7314,6 @@ Command line completion for :lmap and :lunmap.

 Support syntax and filetype completion for user commands. (Christian Brabandt)

-Add completion for ":ownsyntax" and improve completion for ":filetype".
-
 Avoid use of the GTK main_loop() so that the GtkFileChooser can be used.
 (James Vega)

@@ -9072,7 +9070,7 @@ Patch 7.2.280
 Problem:    A redraw in a custom statusline with %! may cause a crash.
 	    (Yukihiro Nakadaira)
 Solution:   Make a copy of 'statusline'.  Also fix typo in function name
-	    redraw_custum_statusline. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
+	    redraw_custom_statusline. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
 Files:	    src/screen.c

 Patch 7.2.281
--- a/runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt
+++ b/runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*vi_diff.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2010 Oct 11
+*vi_diff.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2012 Aug 08


 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -88,8 +88,8 @@ Maximum display width	   Unix and Win32: 1024 characters, otherwise 255
 			   characters
 Maximum lhs of a mapping   50 characters.
 Number of different highlighting types: over 30000
-Range of a Number variable:  -2147483648 to 2147483647 (more on 64 bit
-			   systems)
+Range of a Number variable:  -2147483648 to 2147483647 (might be more on 64
+			   bit systems)
 Maximum length of a line in a tags file: 512 bytes.

 Information for undo and text in registers is kept in memory, thus when making
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Syntax highlighting.					|:syntax|

 Spell checking.						|spell|
 	When the 'spell' option is set Vim will highlight spelling mistakes.
-	About 40 languages are currently supported, selected with the
+	About 50 languages are currently supported, selected with the
 	'spelllang' option.  In source code only comments and strings are
 	checked for spelling.

@@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ You can backspace, CTRL-U and CTRL-W over line breaks if the 'backspace' (bs)
 option includes "eol".  You can backspace over the start of insert if the
 'backspace' option includes "start".

-When the 'paste' option is set, a few option are reset and mapping in insert
+When the 'paste' option is set, a few options are reset and mapping in insert
 mode and abbreviation are disabled.  This allows for pasting text in windowing
 systems without unexpected results.  When the 'paste' option is reset, the old
 option values are restored.
--- a/runtime/doc/vim-de.1
+++ b/runtime/doc/vim-de.1
@@ -0,0 +1,478 @@
+.\"*******************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" This file was generated with po4a. Translate the source file.
+.\"
+.\"*******************************************************************
+.\" Translated by bw1 (2008) and Florian Rehnisch <fm-r@gmx.de> (2012)
+.\" Kudos to the folks on vim-dev and debian-l10n-german
+.TH VIM 1 "2006 Apr 11"  
+.SH BEZEICHNUNG
+vim \- Vi IMproved, ein Text\-Editor f<>r Programmierer
+.SH <EFBFBD>BERSICHT
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] [Datei ...]
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] \-
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] \-t Tag
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] \-q [Fehlerdatei]
+.PP
+.br
+\fBex\fP
+.br
+\fBview\fP
+.br
+\fBgvim\fP \fBgview\fP \fBevim\fP \fBeview\fP
+.br
+\fBrvim\fP \fBrview\fP \fBrgvim\fP \fBrgview\fP
+.SH BESCHREIBUNG
+\fBVim\fP ist ein Text\-Editor, der aufw<66>rtskompatibel zu Vi ist. Er kann
+verwendet werden, um alle Arten von Klartext zu bearbeiten. Er ist besonders
+n<EFBFBD>tzlich, um Programme zu bearbeiten.
+.PP
+Vim hat einige Erweiterungen gegen<65>ber Vi, z.B.: R<>ckg<6B>ngigmachen in
+mehreren Schritten, mehrere Fenster und Puffer, Syntax\-Hervorhebung,
+Bearbeiten der Befehlszeile, Dateinamenerg<72>nzung, eingebaute Hilfe, visuelle
+Auswahl, usw. ... Siehe <20>:help vi_diff.txt<78> f<>r eine <20>bersicht der
+Unterschiede zwischen \fBVim\fP und Vi.
+.PP
+Im laufenden \fBVim\fP kann mit dem Befehl <20>:help<6C> viel Hilfe durch das
+eingebaute Hilfesystem erlangt werden. Siehe den Abschnitt EINGEBAUTE HILFE
+weiter unten.
+.PP
+Meistens wird \fBVim\fP zum Editieren einer einzigen Datei mit dem folgende
+Befehl gestartet:
+.PP
+  vim Datei
+.PP
+Allgemeiner betrachtet, wird \fBVim\fP folgenderma<6D>en gestartet:
+.PP
+  vim [Optionen] [Dateiliste]
+.PP
+Bei einer fehlenden Dateiliste startet der Editor mit einem leeren
+Puffer. Andernfalls werden nach den folgenden vier M<>glichkeiten eine oder
+mehrere Dateien bearbeitet:
+.TP  12
+Datei ...
+Eine Liste von Dateinamen. Die erste Datei wird in den Puffer geladen und
+zur aktuellen. Der Cursor wird auf der ersten Zeile des Puffers
+platziert. Zu den anderen Dateien kann mit dem Befehl <20>:next<78> gelangt
+werden. Falls einer der Dateinamen mit einem Bindestrich beginnt, stellen
+Sie der Dateiliste <20>\-\-<EFBFBD> voran.
+.TP 
+\-
+Die zu bearbeitende Datei wird von der Standardeingabe gelesen. Befehle
+werden von der Standardfehlerausgabe gelesen, die ein Text\-Terminal sein
+sollte.
+.TP 
+\-t {Tag}
+Die zu editierende Datei und die anf<6E>ngliche Cursor\-Position h<>ngen von
+einem <20>Tag<61> ab, einer Art Sprungmarke. {Tag} wird in der Tag\-Datei
+nachgeschlagen, die zugeh<65>rige Datei wird zur aktuellen und der zugeh<65>rige
+Befehl wird ausgef<65>hrt. Dies wird meistens f<>r Programme in der Sprache <20>C<EFBFBD>
+benutzt, wobei {Tag} ein Funktionsname sein k<>nnte. Die Wirkung dieses
+Befehls ist, dass die Datei, die die Funktion enth<74>lt, als aktuelle im
+Editor ge<67>ffnet und angezeigt wird und der Cursor auf dem Beginn der
+Funktion positioniert wird. Siehe <20>:help tag\-commands<EFBFBD>.
+.TP 
+\-q [Fehlerdatei]
+Startet im QuickFix\-Modus. Die Datei [Fehlerdatei] wird gelesen und der
+erste Fehler wird angezeigt. Falls [Fehlerdatei] ausgelassen wird, wird der
+Dateiname aus der Option 'errorfile' verwendet (bei AmigaOS ist dies
+vorgabem<EFBFBD><EFBFBD>ig <20>AztecC.Err<72>, sowie "errors.err<72> bei anderen). Weitere Fehler
+k<EFBFBD>nnen mit dem <20>:cn<63>\-Befehl angesprungen werden. Siehe ":help quickfix<69>.
+.PP
+\fBVim\fP reagiert unterschiedlich auf den Namen, der verwendet wird, um Vim zu
+starten (die ausf<73>hrbare Datei kann dieselbe sein).
+.TP  10
+vim
+der <20>normale<6C> Weg, alles ist standardm<64><6D>ig
+.TP 
+ex
+Startet im Ex\-Modus. Mit dem Befehl <20>:vi<76> gelangt man in den normalen
+Modus. Funktioniert auch mit dem Argument <20>\-e<EFBFBD>.
+.TP 
+view
+Startet im Nur\-Lesen\-Modus. Die Datei wird vor dem <20>berschreiben
+gesch<EFBFBD>tzt. Dasselbe wird mit dem Parameter <20>\-R<EFBFBD> erreicht.
+.TP 
+gvim gview
+Die grafische Version: <20>ffnet ein neues Fenster. Dasselbe wird mit dem
+Parameter <20>\-g<EFBFBD> erreicht.
+.TP 
+evim eview
+Die grafische Version im einfachen Modus: <20>ffnet ein neues Fenster. Dasselbe
+wird mit dem Parameter <20>\-y<EFBFBD> erreicht.
+.TP 
+rvim rview rgvim rgview
+Wie die obigen, aber mit Beschr<68>nkungen: Es ist nicht m<>glich, Shell\-Befehle
+aufzurufen oder mit Unterbrechung in eine Shell zur<75>ckzuspringen. Dasselbe
+wird mit dem Parameter <20>\-Z<EFBFBD> erreicht.
+.SH OPTIONEN
+Die Optionen k<>nnen in beliebiger Reihenfolge vor oder nach den Dateinamen
+angegeben werden. Optionen ohne Parameter k<>nnen hinter einem einzigen
+Bindestrich gruppiert werden.
+.TP  12
+[Nummer]
+In der ersten Datei wird der Cursor auf die Zeile [Nummer] gesetzt. Falls
+[Nummer] nicht angegeben wird, wird der Cursor in die letzte Zeile der Datei
+gesetzt.
+.TP 
+/{Suchmuster}
+In der ersten Datei wird der Cursor auf das erste Auftreten von {Suchmuster}
+gesetzt. Siehe <20>:help search\-pattern<EFBFBD>.
+.TP 
+{Befehl}
+.TP 
+\-c {Befehl}
+{Befehl} wird nach dem Lesen der ersten Datei ausgef<65>hrt. Als {Befehl} wird
+ein Ex\-Befehl erwartet. Sind in {Befehl} Leerzeichen vorhanden, muss alles
+in Anf<6E>hrungszeichen gesetzt werden (h<>ngt von der verwendeten Shell
+ab). Beispiel: vim "+set si" main.c
+.br
+Anmerkung: Sie k<>nnen bis zu 10 <20>+<2B>\- oder "\-c<EFBFBD>\-Befehle verwenden.
+.TP 
+\-S {Datei}
+{Datei} wird nach dem Lesen der ersten Datei ausgef<65>hrt. Dies entspricht <20>\-c
+"source {Datei}"<22>. {Datei} darf nicht mit einem Bindestrich (\-)
+anfangen. Wenn kein Dateiname angegeben wird, wird <20>Session.vim<69> verwendet
+(Funktioniert nur, wenn <20>\-S<EFBFBD> als letzter Parameter steht).
+.TP 
+\-\-cmd {Befehl}
+Wie <20>\-c<EFBFBD>, aber dieser Befehl wird vor allen VimRC\-Dateien ausgef<65>hrt. Sie
+k<EFBFBD>nnen unabh<62>ngig von den <20>\-c<EFBFBD>\-Befehlen bis zu 10 dieser Befehle verwenden.
+.TP 
+\-A
+Falls \fBVim\fP mit Unterst<73>tzung f<>r das Schreiben von rechts nach links und
+arabischer Tastaturbelegung compiliert wurde (ARABIC), startet dieser
+Parameter den Modus f<>rs Arabische (:set arabic). Anderenfalls beendet sich
+\fBVim\fP mit einer Fehlermeldung.
+.TP 
+b
+Bin<EFBFBD>rer Modus: Es werden einige Variablen gesetzt, sodass es m<>glich ist,
+eine bin<69>re oder ausf<73>hrbare Datei zu bearbeiten.
+.TP 
+\-C
+Kompatibel: Setzt die Option 'compatible'. Das macht \fBVim\fP im Verhalten
+sehr <20>hnlich zu Vi, selbst wenn eine VimRC\-Datei existiert.
+.TP 
+\-d
+Startet im diff\-Modus. Es sollten zwei, drei oder vier Dateinamen als
+Parameter <20>bergeben werden. \fBVim\fP <20>ffnet sie alle und zeigt die
+Unterschiede an. Arbeitet wie vimdiff(1).
+.TP 
+\-d {Ger<65>t}
+<EFBFBD>ffnet das {Ger<65>t}, um es als Terminal zu nutzen. Nur f<>r AmigaOS. Beispiel:
+"\-d con:20/30/600/150".
+.TP 
+D
+Debug\-Modus: \fBVim\fP geht in den Debug\-Modus, wenn der erste Befehl in einem
+Skript ausgef<65>hrt wird.
+.TP 
+\-e
+Startet \fBVim\fP im Ex\-Modus, als w<>rde als ausf<73>hrbare Datei <20>ex<65> aufgerufen.
+.TP 
+\-E
+Startet \fBVim\fP im erweiterten Ex\-Modus, als w<>rde die ausf<73>hrbare Datei als
+<EFBFBD>exim<EFBFBD> aufgerufen.
+.TP 
+\-f
+Vordergrund: Bei der GUI\-Version erzeugt \fBVim\fP keinen neuen Prozess und
+l<EFBFBD>st sich nicht von der Shell, in der er aufgerufen wurde. Bei AmigaOS wird
+kein neues Fenster ge<67>ffnet. Dieser Parameter wird benutzt, damit das
+aufrufende Programm auf das Beenden des Bearbeitungssitzung wartet (z.B.:
+mail). Bei AmigaOS funktionieren die Befehle <20>:sh<73> und ":!<21> nicht.
+.TP 
+\-\-nofork
+Vordergrund: Bei der GUI\-Version erzeugt \fBVim\fP keinen neuen Prozess und
+l<EFBFBD>st sich nicht von der Shell, in der er aufgerufen wurde.
+.TP 
+\-F
+Wenn \fBVim\fP mit FKMAP\-Unterst<EFBFBD>tzung f<>r das Schreiben von rechts nach links
+und Farsi\-Tastatur\-Belegung kompiliert wurde, startet Vim im Farsi\-Modus,
+d.h. die Optionen 'fkmap' und 'rightleft' werden gesetzt. Andernfalls bricht
+\fBVim\fP mit einer Fehlermeldung ab.
+.TP 
+\-g
+Falls \fBVim\fP mit GUI\-Unterst<EFBFBD>tzung kompiliert wurde, wird die GUI
+aktiviert. Falls keine GUI\-Unterst<EFBFBD>tzung einkompiliert wurde, wird mit einer
+Fehlermeldung abgebrochen.
+.TP 
+\-h
+Gibt eine kleine Hilfe f<>r die Befehlszeilenparameter aus. Danach beendet
+sich \fBVim.\fP
+.TP 
+\-H
+Hebr<EFBFBD>isch\-Modus, falls \fBVim\fP mit RIGHTLEFT\-Unterst<EFBFBD>tzung f<>r das Schreiben
+von rechts nach links und hebr<62>ischer Tastaturbelegung kompiliert wurde,
+werden die Optionen 'hkmap' und 'rightleft' gesetzt. Andernfalls beendet
+sich \fBVim\fP mit einer Fehlermeldung.
+.TP 
+\-i {VimInfo}
+Wenn eine VimInfo\-Datei verwendet wird: Verwendet statt <20>~/.viminfo<66> die
+angegebene Datei. Es ist auch m<>glich die Verwendung einer VimInfo\-Datei
+durch Angabe des Dateinamen <20>NONE<4E> zu verhindern,
+.TP 
+\-L
+dasselbe wie <20>\-r<EFBFBD>
+.TP 
+\-l
+Lisp\-Modus. Aktiviert die Optionen 'lisp' und 'showmatch'.
+.TP 
+\-m
+Deaktiviert das Ver<65>ndern von Dateien, indem die Option 'write' gel<65>scht
+wird. Der Puffer kann ver<65>ndert werden, nur das Schreiben einer Datei ist
+nicht m<>glich.
+.TP 
+\-M
+Keine Ver<65>nderungen erlaubt: Die Optionen 'modifiable' und 'write' werden
+gel<EFBFBD>scht, so dass <20>nderungen nicht erlaubt sind und Dateien nicht
+geschrieben werden k<>nnen. Man beachte, dass diese Optionen ('modifiable',
+\&'write') dennnoch nachtr<74>glich zum Erlauben von <20>nderungen gesetzt werden
+k<EFBFBD>nnen.
+.TP 
+\-N
+Nicht\-kompatibler Modus: L<>scht die Option 'compatible'. Dies veranlasst
+\fBVim\fP, sich ein wenig besser, aber weniger Vi\-kompatibel zu verhalten,
+selbst wenn es keine VimRC\-Datei gibt.
+.TP 
+\-n
+Verwendet keine Auslagerungsdatei: Eine Wiederherstellung nach einem Absturz
+ist nicht m<>glich. Auf einem langsamen Medium (Diskette) kann diese
+Einstellung n<>tzlich sein. Kann auch mit <20>set uc=0<> erreicht werden; kann
+mit <20>set uc=200<30> aufgehoben werden.
+.TP 
+\-nb
+\fBVim\fP fungiert als Server f<>r NetBeans. Details siehe Dokumentation.
+.TP 
+\-o[N]
+<EFBFBD>ffnet [N] Fenster <20>bereinander. Wenn keine Zahl angegeben wird, <20>ffne ein
+Fenster pro Datei.
+.TP 
+\-O[N]
+<EFBFBD>ffnet [N] Fenster nebeneinander. Wenn keine Zahl angegeben wird, <20>ffne ein
+Fenster pro Datei.
+.TP 
+\-p[N]
+<EFBFBD>ffnet [N] Reiterseiten. Wenn keine Zahl angegeben wird, <20>ffne eine
+Reiterseite pro Datei.
+.TP 
+\-R
+Nur\-Lesen\-Modus: Die Option 'readonly' wird gesetzt. Der Puffer kann noch
+bearbeitet werden, aber es wird verhindert, eine Datei aus Versehen zu
+<EFBFBD>berschreiben. Wenn Sie wirklich eine Datei <20>berschreiben wollen, f<>gen Sie
+dem Ex\-Befehl ein Ausrufezeichen hinzu (wie in <20>:w!<21>). Die Option "\-R<EFBFBD>
+bedingt die Option <20>\-n<EFBFBD> (siehe oben). Die Option 'readonly' kann durch ":set
+noro<EFBFBD> gel<65>scht werden. Siehe <20>:help 'readonly'<27>.
+.TP 
+\-r
+Listet die Auslagerungsdateien und gibt Informationen zu ihrer
+Verwendbarkeit zur Wiederherstellung.
+.TP 
+\-r {Datei}
+Wiederherstellungsmodus: Die Auslagerungsdatei wird zur Wiederherstellung
+verwendet und hat denselben Dateinamen wie die Text\-Datei + <20>.swp<77>. Siehe
+":help recovery<72>.
+.TP 
+\-s
+Der stille Modus: Nur wenn die ausf<73>hrbare Datei als <20>ex<65> aufgerufen wird
+oder vor <20>\-s<EFBFBD> die Option "\-e<EFBFBD> gegeben wird.
+.TP 
+\-s {Eingabeskript}
+Die Datei {Eingabeskript} wird gelesen und ausgef<65>hrt, als w<>rden Sie die
+Zeichen in ihr tippen. Dasselbe kann mit dem Befehl <20>:source!
+{Eingabeskript}<7D> erreicht werden. Wird das Ende der Datei vor dem Beenden
+des Editors erreicht, werden weitere Zeichen von der Tastatur gelesen.
+.TP 
+\-T {Terminal}
+Setzt den Namen des benutzten Terminals. Nur erforderlich, wenn die
+Automatik nicht funktioniert. Sollte ein \fBVim\fP bekanntes Terminal sein:
+(builtin) oder in einer termcap\- oder terminfo\-Datei definiert.
+.TP 
+\-u {VimRC}
+Verwendet zur Initialisierung die Befehle in der Datei {VimRC}. Alle anderen
+Initialisierungen werden <20>bersprungen. Benutzen Sie dies, um eine besondere
+Art von Dateien zu bearbeiten. Dies kann auch benutzt werden, um alle
+Initialisierungen zu <20>berspringen, indem der Name <20>NONE<4E> angegeben wird. F<>r
+weitere Einzelheiten siehe <20>:help initialisation<6F> innerhalb von Vim.
+.TP 
+\-U {GvimRC}
+Benutzt die Befehle in der Datei {GvimRC} f<>r die Initialisierung der
+grafischen Oberfl<66>che. Alle anderen Initialisierungen werden
+<EFBFBD>bersprungen. Dies kann ebenfalls benutzt werden, um alle
+GUI\-Initialisierungen zu <20>berspringen, indem der Name <20>NONE<4E> angegeben
+wird. Siehe <20>:help gui\-init<EFBFBD> innerhalb von Vim f<>r weitere Einzelheiten.
+.TP 
+\-V[N]
+Ausf<EFBFBD>hrlich (verbose): Gibt Meldungen dar<61>ber, welche Befehlsdateien
+eingelesen werden, und <20>ber das Lesen und Schreiben einer VimInfo\-Datei. Die
+optionale Zahl N ist der Wert f<>r 'verbose'. Vorgabe ist 10.
+.TP 
+\-v
+Startet \fBVim\fP im Vi\-Modus, so als w<>rde die ausf<73>hrbare Datei mit <20>vi<76>
+aufgerufen. Dies wirkt sich nur aus, wenn die ausf<73>hrbare Datei als <20>ex<65>
+aufgerufen wird.
+.TP 
+\-w {Ausgabeskript}
+Alle Zeichen, die eingetippt werden, werden in der Datei {Ausgabeskript}
+aufgezeichnet, solange bis Sie \fBVim\fP beenden. Dies ist n<>tzlich, falls Sie
+eine Skript\-Datei zum Benutzen mit <20>vim \-s<EFBFBD> oder ":source!<21> erzeugen
+wollen. Falls die Datei {Ausgabeskript} vorhanden ist, werden die Zeichen
+angeh<EFBFBD>ngt.
+.TP 
+\-W {Ausgabeskript}
+Wie \-w, aber eine bereits vorhandene Datei wird <20>berschrieben.
+.TP 
+\-x
+Benutzt beim Schreiben von Dateien eine Verschl<68>sselung. Fragt nach dem
+Schl<EFBFBD>ssel.
+.TP 
+\-X
+F<EFBFBD>hrt keine Verbindung zum X\-Server durch. Dadurch verk<72>rzt sich die
+Startzeit, aber der Fenstertitel und die Zwischenablage werden nicht
+verwendet.
+.TP 
+\-y
+Startet \fBVim\fP im einfachen Modus, als w<>rde die ausf<73>hrbare Datei mit
+<EFBFBD>evim<EFBFBD> oder <20>eview<65> aufgerufen. \fBVim\fP verh<72>lt sich dann wie ein Editor zum
+Klicken und Tippen.
+.TP 
+\-Z
+Eingeschr<EFBFBD>nkter Modus: Funktioniert, als w<>rde der Name der ausf<73>hrbaren
+Datei mit <20>r<EFBFBD> beginnen.
+.TP 
+\-\-
+Markiert das Ende der Optionen. Argumente, die folgen, werden als Dateinamen
+behandelt. Dies kann benutzt werden, um einen Dateinamen mit <20>\-<EFBFBD> am Anfang
+zu verwenden.
+.TP 
+\-\-echo\-wid
+Nur GTK\-GUI: Schreibe die Fenster\-ID auf die Standardausgabe.
+.TP 
+\-\-help
+Gibt eine Hilfe\-Nachricht aus und beendet, wie <20>\-h<EFBFBD>.
+.TP 
+\-\-literal
+Nimmt die Dateinamen so wie sie sind und vervollst<73>ndigt sie nicht nach
+Metazeichen (*,?). Dies wirkt sich nicht unter Unix aus, wo die Shell die
+Metazeichen expandiert.
+.TP 
+\-\-noplugin
+Lade keine Plugins. Impliziert durch <20>\-u NONE<4E>.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote
+Verbindet mit einem Vim\-Server und l<>sst ihn die in den restlichen
+Argumenten angegeben Dateien editieren. Wenn kein Server gefunden wird,
+f<EFBFBD>hrt dies zu einer Warnmeldung und die Dateien werden im gegenw<6E>rtigen Vim
+zum Bearbeiten ge<67>ffnet.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-expr {Ausdruck}
+Verbindet mit einem Vim\-Server, f<>hrt {Ausdruck} aus und zeigt das Ergebnis
+auf der Standardausgabe an.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-send {Zeichen}
+Verbindet mit einem Vim\-Server und sendet ihm {Zeichen}.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-silent
+Wie <20>\-\-remote<EFBFBD>, aber ohne Warnung, wenn kein Server gefunden wird.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-wait
+Wie <20>\-\-remote<EFBFBD>, aber Vim beendet sich nicht, bis die Dateien bearbeitet
+wurden.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-wait\-silent
+Wie <20>\-\-remote\-wait<EFBFBD>, aber ohne Warnung, wenn kein Server gefunden wird.
+.TP 
+\-\-serverlist
+Listet die Namen aller gefundenen Vim\-Server auf.
+.TP 
+\-\-servername {Name}
+Benutzt {Name} als Server\-Namen. Wird f<>r den gegenw<6E>rtigen Vim benutzt,
+au<EFBFBD>er es wird mit dem Argument <20>\-\-remote<EFBFBD> benutzt, dann ist es der Name des
+zu kontaktierenden Servers.
+.TP 
+\-\-socketid {id}
+Nur GTK\-GUI: Benutzt den GtkPlug\-Mechanismus, um GVim in einem anderen
+Fenster laufen zu lassen.
+.TP 
+\-\-version
+Versionsinformation anzeigen und beenden
+.SH "EINGEBAUTE HILFE"
+Tippen Sie in \fBVim\fP <20>:help<6C>, um zu beginnen. Geben Sie ":help begriff<66> ein,
+um Hilfe <20>ber ein bestimmtes Thema zu bekommen. Zum Beispiel <20>:help ZZ<5A> f<>r
+Hilfe <20>ber den Befehl <20>ZZ<5A>. Benutzen Sie <Tab> und CTRL\-D, um
+Begriffe zu vervollst<73>ndigen (<28>:help cmdline\-completion<EFBFBD>). Tags sind
+vorhanden, um von einem Ort zum anderen zu springen (eine Art
+Hypertext\-Verkn<EFBFBD>pfungen, siehe <20>:help<6C>). Auf diese Weise k<>nnen alle
+Dokumentations\-Dateien aufgerufen werden, zum Beispiel <20>:help syntax.txt<78>.
+.SH DATEIEN
+.TP  15
+/usr/local/lib/vim/doc/*.txt
+Dokumentations\-Dateien f<>r \fBVim\fP. Verwenden Sie <20>:help doc\-file\-list<EFBFBD>, um
+die gesamte Liste zu bekommen.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/doc/tags
+Die <20>Tag<61>\-Datei, die verwendet wird, um Informationen in der Dokumentation
+zu finden.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/syntax.vim
+Die systemweite Einrichtung der Syntaxhervorhebung.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/*.vim
+Syntaxdateien f<>r die verschiedenen Sprachen.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/vimrc
+Systemweite Einstellungsdatei f<>r \fBVim\fP
+.TP 
+~/.vimrc
+Pers<EFBFBD>nliche Einstellungsdatei f<>r \fBVim\fP
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/gvimrc
+Systemweite Einstellungsdatei f<>r GVim
+.TP 
+~/.gvimrc
+Pers<EFBFBD>nliche Einstellungsdatei f<>r GVim
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/optwin.vim
+Das Script, das von dem Befehl <20>:options<6E> verwendet wird, eine sch<63>ne
+M<EFBFBD>glichkeit, um Optionen zu betrachten und zu setzen.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/menu.vim
+Systemweite Einstellungsdatei f<>r das Men<65> von GVim
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/bugreport.vim
+Das Script zum Generieren eines Fehlerberichts. Siehe <20>:help bugs<67>.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/filetype.vim
+Mit diesem Script erkennt Vim den Typ einer Datei anhand ihres
+Dateinamens. Siehe <20>:help 'filetype'<27>.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/scripts.vim
+Mit diesem Script erkennt Vim den Typ einer Datei anhand ihres
+Inhaltes. Siehe <20>:help 'filetype'<27>.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/print/*.ps
+Diese Dateien werden zum Drucken von PostScript verwendet.
+.PP
+F<EFBFBD>r die neuesten Informationen lesen Sie die Vim\-Homepage:
+.br
+<URL:http://www.vim.org/>
+.SH "SIEHE AUCH"
+vimtutor(1)
+.SH AUTOR
+\fBVim\fP wurde gr<67><72>tenteils von Bram Moolenaar erstellt, mit viel Hilfe von
+anderen Leuten. Siehe <20>:help credits<74> in \fBVim.\fP
+.br
+\fBVim\fP basiert auf Stevie, der von Tim Thompson, Tony Andrews und
+G.R. (Fred) Walter geschrieben wurde. Es ist jedoch kaum etwas vom
+urspr<EFBFBD>nglichen Code <20>brig geblieben.
+.SH FEHLER
+Die sind m<>glich. Siehe <20>:help todo<64> f<>r eine Liste bekannter Probleme.
+.PP
+Beachten Sie, dass gewisse Dinge, die manche Leute als Fehler betrachten
+m<EFBFBD>gen, in Wirklichkeit durch zu getreue Nachbildung des Vi\-Verhaltens
+verursacht werden. Und falls Sie denken, dass andere Dinge Fehler sind,
+<EFBFBD>weil Vi es anders tut<75>, sollten Sie einen genaueren Blick auf die Datei
+vi_diff.txt werfen (oder in Vim <20>:help vi_diff.txt<78> tippen). Sehen Sie sich
+auch die Optionen 'compatible' und 'cpoptions' an.
--- a/runtime/doc/vim-de.UTF-8.1
+++ b/runtime/doc/vim-de.UTF-8.1
@@ -0,0 +1,478 @@
+.\"*******************************************************************
+.\"
+.\" This file was generated with po4a. Translate the source file.
+.\"
+.\"*******************************************************************
+.\" Translated by bw1 (2008) and Florian Rehnisch <fm-r@gmx.de> (2012)
+.\" Kudos to the folks on vim-dev and debian-l10n-german
+.TH VIM 1 "2006 Apr 11"  
+.SH BEZEICHNUNG
+vim \- Vi IMproved, ein Text\-Editor für Programmierer
+.SH ÜBERSICHT
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] [Datei …]
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] \-
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] \-t Tag
+.br
+\fBvim\fP [Optionen] \-q [Fehlerdatei]
+.PP
+.br
+\fBex\fP
+.br
+\fBview\fP
+.br
+\fBgvim\fP \fBgview\fP \fBevim\fP \fBeview\fP
+.br
+\fBrvim\fP \fBrview\fP \fBrgvim\fP \fBrgview\fP
+.SH BESCHREIBUNG
+\fBVim\fP ist ein Text\-Editor, der aufwärtskompatibel zu Vi ist. Er kann
+verwendet werden, um alle Arten von Klartext zu bearbeiten. Er ist besonders
+nützlich, um Programme zu bearbeiten.
+.PP
+Vim hat einige Erweiterungen gegenüber Vi, z.B.: Rückgängigmachen in
+mehreren Schritten, mehrere Fenster und Puffer, Syntax\-Hervorhebung,
+Bearbeiten der Befehlszeile, Dateinamenergänzung, eingebaute Hilfe, visuelle
+Auswahl, usw. … Siehe »:help vi_diff.txt« für eine Übersicht der
+Unterschiede zwischen \fBVim\fP und Vi.
+.PP
+Im laufenden \fBVim\fP kann mit dem Befehl »:help« viel Hilfe durch das
+eingebaute Hilfesystem erlangt werden. Siehe den Abschnitt EINGEBAUTE HILFE
+weiter unten.
+.PP
+Meistens wird \fBVim\fP zum Editieren einer einzigen Datei mit dem folgende
+Befehl gestartet:
+.PP
+  vim Datei
+.PP
+Allgemeiner betrachtet, wird \fBVim\fP folgendermaßen gestartet:
+.PP
+  vim [Optionen] [Dateiliste]
+.PP
+Bei einer fehlenden Dateiliste startet der Editor mit einem leeren
+Puffer. Andernfalls werden nach den folgenden vier Möglichkeiten eine oder
+mehrere Dateien bearbeitet:
+.TP  12
+Datei …
+Eine Liste von Dateinamen. Die erste Datei wird in den Puffer geladen und
+zur aktuellen. Der Cursor wird auf der ersten Zeile des Puffers
+platziert. Zu den anderen Dateien kann mit dem Befehl »:next« gelangt
+werden. Falls einer der Dateinamen mit einem Bindestrich beginnt, stellen
+Sie der Dateiliste »\-\-« voran.
+.TP 
+\-
+Die zu bearbeitende Datei wird von der Standardeingabe gelesen. Befehle
+werden von der Standardfehlerausgabe gelesen, die ein Text\-Terminal sein
+sollte.
+.TP 
+\-t {Tag}
+Die zu editierende Datei und die anfängliche Cursor\-Position hängen von
+einem »Tag« ab, einer Art Sprungmarke. {Tag} wird in der Tag\-Datei
+nachgeschlagen, die zugehörige Datei wird zur aktuellen und der zugehörige
+Befehl wird ausgeführt. Dies wird meistens für Programme in der Sprache »C«
+benutzt, wobei {Tag} ein Funktionsname sein könnte. Die Wirkung dieses
+Befehls ist, dass die Datei, die die Funktion enthält, als aktuelle im
+Editor geöffnet und angezeigt wird und der Cursor auf dem Beginn der
+Funktion positioniert wird. Siehe »:help tag\-commands«.
+.TP 
+\-q [Fehlerdatei]
+Startet im QuickFix\-Modus. Die Datei [Fehlerdatei] wird gelesen und der
+erste Fehler wird angezeigt. Falls [Fehlerdatei] ausgelassen wird, wird der
+Dateiname aus der Option 'errorfile' verwendet (bei AmigaOS ist dies
+vorgabemäßig »AztecC.Err«, sowie „errors.err« bei anderen). Weitere Fehler
+können mit dem »:cn«\-Befehl angesprungen werden. Siehe „:help quickfix«.
+.PP
+\fBVim\fP reagiert unterschiedlich auf den Namen, der verwendet wird, um Vim zu
+starten (die ausführbare Datei kann dieselbe sein).
+.TP  10
+vim
+der »normale« Weg, alles ist standardmäßig
+.TP 
+ex
+Startet im Ex\-Modus. Mit dem Befehl »:vi« gelangt man in den normalen
+Modus. Funktioniert auch mit dem Argument »\-e«.
+.TP 
+view
+Startet im Nur\-Lesen\-Modus. Die Datei wird vor dem Überschreiben
+geschützt. Dasselbe wird mit dem Parameter »\-R« erreicht.
+.TP 
+gvim gview
+Die grafische Version: Öffnet ein neues Fenster. Dasselbe wird mit dem
+Parameter »\-g« erreicht.
+.TP 
+evim eview
+Die grafische Version im einfachen Modus: Öffnet ein neues Fenster. Dasselbe
+wird mit dem Parameter »\-y« erreicht.
+.TP 
+rvim rview rgvim rgview
+Wie die obigen, aber mit Beschränkungen: Es ist nicht möglich, Shell\-Befehle
+aufzurufen oder mit Unterbrechung in eine Shell zurückzuspringen. Dasselbe
+wird mit dem Parameter »\-Z« erreicht.
+.SH OPTIONEN
+Die Optionen können in beliebiger Reihenfolge vor oder nach den Dateinamen
+angegeben werden. Optionen ohne Parameter können hinter einem einzigen
+Bindestrich gruppiert werden.
+.TP  12
+[Nummer]
+In der ersten Datei wird der Cursor auf die Zeile [Nummer] gesetzt. Falls
+[Nummer] nicht angegeben wird, wird der Cursor in die letzte Zeile der Datei
+gesetzt.
+.TP 
+/{Suchmuster}
+In der ersten Datei wird der Cursor auf das erste Auftreten von {Suchmuster}
+gesetzt. Siehe »:help search\-pattern«.
+.TP 
+{Befehl}
+.TP 
+\-c {Befehl}
+{Befehl} wird nach dem Lesen der ersten Datei ausgeführt. Als {Befehl} wird
+ein Ex\-Befehl erwartet. Sind in {Befehl} Leerzeichen vorhanden, muss alles
+in Anführungszeichen gesetzt werden (hängt von der verwendeten Shell
+ab). Beispiel: vim "+set si" main.c
+.br
+Anmerkung: Sie können bis zu 10 »+«\- oder „\-c«\-Befehle verwenden.
+.TP 
+\-S {Datei}
+{Datei} wird nach dem Lesen der ersten Datei ausgeführt. Dies entspricht »\-c
+"source {Datei}"«. {Datei} darf nicht mit einem Bindestrich (\-)
+anfangen. Wenn kein Dateiname angegeben wird, wird »Session.vim« verwendet
+(Funktioniert nur, wenn »\-S« als letzter Parameter steht).
+.TP 
+\-\-cmd {Befehl}
+Wie »\-c«, aber dieser Befehl wird vor allen VimRC\-Dateien ausgeführt. Sie
+können unabhängig von den »\-c«\-Befehlen bis zu 10 dieser Befehle verwenden.
+.TP 
+\-A
+Falls \fBVim\fP mit Unterstützung für das Schreiben von rechts nach links und
+arabischer Tastaturbelegung compiliert wurde (ARABIC), startet dieser
+Parameter den Modus fürs Arabische (:set arabic). Anderenfalls beendet sich
+\fBVim\fP mit einer Fehlermeldung.
+.TP 
+b
+Binärer Modus: Es werden einige Variablen gesetzt, sodass es möglich ist,
+eine binäre oder ausführbare Datei zu bearbeiten.
+.TP 
+\-C
+Kompatibel: Setzt die Option 'compatible'. Das macht \fBVim\fP im Verhalten
+sehr ähnlich zu Vi, selbst wenn eine VimRC\-Datei existiert.
+.TP 
+\-d
+Startet im diff\-Modus. Es sollten zwei, drei oder vier Dateinamen als
+Parameter übergeben werden. \fBVim\fP öffnet sie alle und zeigt die
+Unterschiede an. Arbeitet wie vimdiff(1).
+.TP 
+\-d {Gerät}
+Öffnet das {Gerät}, um es als Terminal zu nutzen. Nur für AmigaOS. Beispiel:
+"\-d con:20/30/600/150".
+.TP 
+D
+Debug\-Modus: \fBVim\fP geht in den Debug\-Modus, wenn der erste Befehl in einem
+Skript ausgeführt wird.
+.TP 
+\-e
+Startet \fBVim\fP im Ex\-Modus, als würde als ausführbare Datei »ex« aufgerufen.
+.TP 
+\-E
+Startet \fBVim\fP im erweiterten Ex\-Modus, als würde die ausführbare Datei als
+»exim« aufgerufen.
+.TP 
+\-f
+Vordergrund: Bei der GUI\-Version erzeugt \fBVim\fP keinen neuen Prozess und
+löst sich nicht von der Shell, in der er aufgerufen wurde. Bei AmigaOS wird
+kein neues Fenster geöffnet. Dieser Parameter wird benutzt, damit das
+aufrufende Programm auf das Beenden des Bearbeitungssitzung wartet (z.B.:
+mail). Bei AmigaOS funktionieren die Befehle »:sh« und „:!« nicht.
+.TP 
+\-\-nofork
+Vordergrund: Bei der GUI\-Version erzeugt \fBVim\fP keinen neuen Prozess und
+löst sich nicht von der Shell, in der er aufgerufen wurde.
+.TP 
+\-F
+Wenn \fBVim\fP mit FKMAP\-Unterstützung für das Schreiben von rechts nach links
+und Farsi\-Tastatur\-Belegung kompiliert wurde, startet Vim im Farsi\-Modus,
+d.h. die Optionen 'fkmap' und 'rightleft' werden gesetzt. Andernfalls bricht
+\fBVim\fP mit einer Fehlermeldung ab.
+.TP 
+\-g
+Falls \fBVim\fP mit GUI\-Unterstützung kompiliert wurde, wird die GUI
+aktiviert. Falls keine GUI\-Unterstützung einkompiliert wurde, wird mit einer
+Fehlermeldung abgebrochen.
+.TP 
+\-h
+Gibt eine kleine Hilfe für die Befehlszeilenparameter aus. Danach beendet
+sich \fBVim.\fP
+.TP 
+\-H
+Hebräisch\-Modus, falls \fBVim\fP mit RIGHTLEFT\-Unterstützung für das Schreiben
+von rechts nach links und hebräischer Tastaturbelegung kompiliert wurde,
+werden die Optionen 'hkmap' und 'rightleft' gesetzt. Andernfalls beendet
+sich \fBVim\fP mit einer Fehlermeldung.
+.TP 
+\-i {VimInfo}
+Wenn eine VimInfo\-Datei verwendet wird: Verwendet statt »~/.viminfo« die
+angegebene Datei. Es ist auch möglich die Verwendung einer VimInfo\-Datei
+durch Angabe des Dateinamen »NONE« zu verhindern,
+.TP 
+\-L
+dasselbe wie »\-r«
+.TP 
+\-l
+Lisp\-Modus. Aktiviert die Optionen 'lisp' und 'showmatch'.
+.TP 
+\-m
+Deaktiviert das Verändern von Dateien, indem die Option 'write' gelöscht
+wird. Der Puffer kann verändert werden, nur das Schreiben einer Datei ist
+nicht möglich.
+.TP 
+\-M
+Keine Veränderungen erlaubt: Die Optionen 'modifiable' und 'write' werden
+gelöscht, so dass Änderungen nicht erlaubt sind und Dateien nicht
+geschrieben werden können. Man beachte, dass diese Optionen ('modifiable',
+\&'write') dennnoch nachträglich zum Erlauben von Änderungen gesetzt werden
+können.
+.TP 
+\-N
+Nicht\-kompatibler Modus: Löscht die Option 'compatible'. Dies veranlasst
+\fBVim\fP, sich ein wenig besser, aber weniger Vi\-kompatibel zu verhalten,
+selbst wenn es keine VimRC\-Datei gibt.
+.TP 
+\-n
+Verwendet keine Auslagerungsdatei: Eine Wiederherstellung nach einem Absturz
+ist nicht möglich. Auf einem langsamen Medium (Diskette) kann diese
+Einstellung nützlich sein. Kann auch mit »set uc=0« erreicht werden; kann
+mit »set uc=200« aufgehoben werden.
+.TP 
+\-nb
+\fBVim\fP fungiert als Server für NetBeans. Details siehe Dokumentation.
+.TP 
+\-o[N]
+Öffnet [N] Fenster übereinander. Wenn keine Zahl angegeben wird, öffne ein
+Fenster pro Datei.
+.TP 
+\-O[N]
+Öffnet [N] Fenster nebeneinander. Wenn keine Zahl angegeben wird, öffne ein
+Fenster pro Datei.
+.TP 
+\-p[N]
+Öffnet [N] Reiterseiten. Wenn keine Zahl angegeben wird, öffne eine
+Reiterseite pro Datei.
+.TP 
+\-R
+Nur\-Lesen\-Modus: Die Option 'readonly' wird gesetzt. Der Puffer kann noch
+bearbeitet werden, aber es wird verhindert, eine Datei aus Versehen zu
+überschreiben. Wenn Sie wirklich eine Datei überschreiben wollen, fügen Sie
+dem Ex\-Befehl ein Ausrufezeichen hinzu (wie in »:w!«). Die Option „\-R«
+bedingt die Option »\-n« (siehe oben). Die Option 'readonly' kann durch „:set
+noro« gelöscht werden. Siehe »:help 'readonly'«.
+.TP 
+\-r
+Listet die Auslagerungsdateien und gibt Informationen zu ihrer
+Verwendbarkeit zur Wiederherstellung.
+.TP 
+\-r {Datei}
+Wiederherstellungsmodus: Die Auslagerungsdatei wird zur Wiederherstellung
+verwendet und hat denselben Dateinamen wie die Text\-Datei + ».swp«. Siehe
+„:help recovery«.
+.TP 
+\-s
+Der stille Modus: Nur wenn die ausführbare Datei als »ex« aufgerufen wird
+oder vor »\-s« die Option „\-e« gegeben wird.
+.TP 
+\-s {Eingabeskript}
+Die Datei {Eingabeskript} wird gelesen und ausgeführt, als würden Sie die
+Zeichen in ihr tippen. Dasselbe kann mit dem Befehl »:source!
+{Eingabeskript}« erreicht werden. Wird das Ende der Datei vor dem Beenden
+des Editors erreicht, werden weitere Zeichen von der Tastatur gelesen.
+.TP 
+\-T {Terminal}
+Setzt den Namen des benutzten Terminals. Nur erforderlich, wenn die
+Automatik nicht funktioniert. Sollte ein \fBVim\fP bekanntes Terminal sein:
+(builtin) oder in einer termcap\- oder terminfo\-Datei definiert.
+.TP 
+\-u {VimRC}
+Verwendet zur Initialisierung die Befehle in der Datei {VimRC}. Alle anderen
+Initialisierungen werden übersprungen. Benutzen Sie dies, um eine besondere
+Art von Dateien zu bearbeiten. Dies kann auch benutzt werden, um alle
+Initialisierungen zu überspringen, indem der Name »NONE« angegeben wird. Für
+weitere Einzelheiten siehe »:help initialisation« innerhalb von Vim.
+.TP 
+\-U {GvimRC}
+Benutzt die Befehle in der Datei {GvimRC} für die Initialisierung der
+grafischen Oberfläche. Alle anderen Initialisierungen werden
+übersprungen. Dies kann ebenfalls benutzt werden, um alle
+GUI\-Initialisierungen zu überspringen, indem der Name »NONE« angegeben
+wird. Siehe »:help gui\-init« innerhalb von Vim für weitere Einzelheiten.
+.TP 
+\-V[N]
+Ausführlich (verbose): Gibt Meldungen darüber, welche Befehlsdateien
+eingelesen werden, und über das Lesen und Schreiben einer VimInfo\-Datei. Die
+optionale Zahl N ist der Wert für 'verbose'. Vorgabe ist 10.
+.TP 
+\-v
+Startet \fBVim\fP im Vi\-Modus, so als würde die ausführbare Datei mit »vi«
+aufgerufen. Dies wirkt sich nur aus, wenn die ausführbare Datei als »ex«
+aufgerufen wird.
+.TP 
+\-w {Ausgabeskript}
+Alle Zeichen, die eingetippt werden, werden in der Datei {Ausgabeskript}
+aufgezeichnet, solange bis Sie \fBVim\fP beenden. Dies ist nützlich, falls Sie
+eine Skript\-Datei zum Benutzen mit »vim \-s« oder „:source!« erzeugen
+wollen. Falls die Datei {Ausgabeskript} vorhanden ist, werden die Zeichen
+angehängt.
+.TP 
+\-W {Ausgabeskript}
+Wie \-w, aber eine bereits vorhandene Datei wird überschrieben.
+.TP 
+\-x
+Benutzt beim Schreiben von Dateien eine Verschlüsselung. Fragt nach dem
+Schlüssel.
+.TP 
+\-X
+Führt keine Verbindung zum X\-Server durch. Dadurch verkürzt sich die
+Startzeit, aber der Fenstertitel und die Zwischenablage werden nicht
+verwendet.
+.TP 
+\-y
+Startet \fBVim\fP im einfachen Modus, als würde die ausführbare Datei mit
+»evim« oder »eview« aufgerufen. \fBVim\fP verhält sich dann wie ein Editor zum
+Klicken und Tippen.
+.TP 
+\-Z
+Eingeschränkter Modus: Funktioniert, als würde der Name der ausführbaren
+Datei mit »r« beginnen.
+.TP 
+\-\-
+Markiert das Ende der Optionen. Argumente, die folgen, werden als Dateinamen
+behandelt. Dies kann benutzt werden, um einen Dateinamen mit »\-« am Anfang
+zu verwenden.
+.TP 
+\-\-echo\-wid
+Nur GTK\-GUI: Schreibe die Fenster\-ID auf die Standardausgabe.
+.TP 
+\-\-help
+Gibt eine Hilfe\-Nachricht aus und beendet, wie »\-h«.
+.TP 
+\-\-literal
+Nimmt die Dateinamen so wie sie sind und vervollständigt sie nicht nach
+Metazeichen (*,?). Dies wirkt sich nicht unter Unix aus, wo die Shell die
+Metazeichen expandiert.
+.TP 
+\-\-noplugin
+Lade keine Plugins. Impliziert durch »\-u NONE«.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote
+Verbindet mit einem Vim\-Server und lässt ihn die in den restlichen
+Argumenten angegeben Dateien editieren. Wenn kein Server gefunden wird,
+führt dies zu einer Warnmeldung und die Dateien werden im gegenwärtigen Vim
+zum Bearbeiten geöffnet.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-expr {Ausdruck}
+Verbindet mit einem Vim\-Server, führt {Ausdruck} aus und zeigt das Ergebnis
+auf der Standardausgabe an.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-send {Zeichen}
+Verbindet mit einem Vim\-Server und sendet ihm {Zeichen}.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-silent
+Wie »\-\-remote«, aber ohne Warnung, wenn kein Server gefunden wird.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-wait
+Wie »\-\-remote«, aber Vim beendet sich nicht, bis die Dateien bearbeitet
+wurden.
+.TP 
+\-\-remote\-wait\-silent
+Wie »\-\-remote\-wait«, aber ohne Warnung, wenn kein Server gefunden wird.
+.TP 
+\-\-serverlist
+Listet die Namen aller gefundenen Vim\-Server auf.
+.TP 
+\-\-servername {Name}
+Benutzt {Name} als Server\-Namen. Wird für den gegenwärtigen Vim benutzt,
+außer es wird mit dem Argument »\-\-remote« benutzt, dann ist es der Name des
+zu kontaktierenden Servers.
+.TP 
+\-\-socketid {id}
+Nur GTK\-GUI: Benutzt den GtkPlug\-Mechanismus, um GVim in einem anderen
+Fenster laufen zu lassen.
+.TP 
+\-\-version
+Versionsinformation anzeigen und beenden
+.SH "EINGEBAUTE HILFE"
+Tippen Sie in \fBVim\fP »:help«, um zu beginnen. Geben Sie „:help begriff« ein,
+um Hilfe über ein bestimmtes Thema zu bekommen. Zum Beispiel »:help ZZ« für
+Hilfe über den Befehl »ZZ«. Benutzen Sie <Tab> und CTRL\-D, um
+Begriffe zu vervollständigen (»:help cmdline\-completion«). Tags sind
+vorhanden, um von einem Ort zum anderen zu springen (eine Art
+Hypertext\-Verknüpfungen, siehe »:help«). Auf diese Weise können alle
+Dokumentations\-Dateien aufgerufen werden, zum Beispiel »:help syntax.txt«.
+.SH DATEIEN
+.TP  15
+/usr/local/lib/vim/doc/*.txt
+Dokumentations\-Dateien für \fBVim\fP. Verwenden Sie »:help doc\-file\-list«, um
+die gesamte Liste zu bekommen.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/doc/tags
+Die »Tag«\-Datei, die verwendet wird, um Informationen in der Dokumentation
+zu finden.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/syntax.vim
+Die systemweite Einrichtung der Syntaxhervorhebung.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/*.vim
+Syntaxdateien für die verschiedenen Sprachen.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/vimrc
+Systemweite Einstellungsdatei für \fBVim\fP
+.TP 
+~/.vimrc
+Persönliche Einstellungsdatei für \fBVim\fP
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/gvimrc
+Systemweite Einstellungsdatei für GVim
+.TP 
+~/.gvimrc
+Persönliche Einstellungsdatei für GVim
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/optwin.vim
+Das Script, das von dem Befehl »:options« verwendet wird, eine schöne
+Möglichkeit, um Optionen zu betrachten und zu setzen.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/menu.vim
+Systemweite Einstellungsdatei für das Menü von GVim
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/bugreport.vim
+Das Script zum Generieren eines Fehlerberichts. Siehe »:help bugs«.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/filetype.vim
+Mit diesem Script erkennt Vim den Typ einer Datei anhand ihres
+Dateinamens. Siehe »:help 'filetype'«.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/scripts.vim
+Mit diesem Script erkennt Vim den Typ einer Datei anhand ihres
+Inhaltes. Siehe »:help 'filetype'«.
+.TP 
+/usr/local/lib/vim/print/*.ps
+Diese Dateien werden zum Drucken von PostScript verwendet.
+.PP
+Für die neuesten Informationen lesen Sie die Vim\-Homepage:
+.br
+<URL:http://www.vim.org/>
+.SH "SIEHE AUCH"
+vimtutor(1)
+.SH AUTOR
+\fBVim\fP wurde größtenteils von Bram Moolenaar erstellt, mit viel Hilfe von
+anderen Leuten. Siehe »:help credits« in \fBVim.\fP
+.br
+\fBVim\fP basiert auf Stevie, der von Tim Thompson, Tony Andrews und
+G.R. (Fred) Walter geschrieben wurde. Es ist jedoch kaum etwas vom
+ursprünglichen Code übrig geblieben.
+.SH FEHLER
+Die sind möglich. Siehe »:help todo« für eine Liste bekannter Probleme.
+.PP
+Beachten Sie, dass gewisse Dinge, die manche Leute als Fehler betrachten
+mögen, in Wirklichkeit durch zu getreue Nachbildung des Vi\-Verhaltens
+verursacht werden. Und falls Sie denken, dass andere Dinge Fehler sind,
+»weil Vi es anders tut«, sollten Sie einen genaueren Blick auf die Datei
+vi_diff.txt werfen (oder in Vim »:help vi_diff.txt« tippen). Sehen Sie sich
+auch die Optionen 'compatible' und 'cpoptions' an.
--- a/runtime/doc/vim-fr.1
+++ b/runtime/doc/vim-fr.1
@@ -586,3 +586,4 @@ Cette page de manuel a
 .br
 Cette page de manuel a <20>t<EFBFBD> mise <20> jour par David Blanchet.
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2006-04-10.
+Mise <20> jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pell<6C> <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>
--- a/runtime/doc/vim-fr.UTF-8.1
+++ b/runtime/doc/vim-fr.UTF-8.1
@@ -586,3 +586,4 @@ Cette page de manuel a été traduite par Richard Hitier.
 .br
 Cette page de manuel a été mise à jour par David Blanchet.
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2006-04-10.
+Mise à jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pellé <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>
--- a/runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.1
+++ b/runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.1
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ d
 .B Vim
 avec deux (ou trois ou quatre) fichiers.
 Chaque fichier est ouvert dans sa propre fen<65>tre.
-Les diff<66>rences entres ces fichiers sont mises en surbrillance.
+Les diff<66>rences entre ces fichiers sont mises en surbrillance.
 C'est un outil tr<74>s pratique pour visualiser et reporter les
 changements entre deux versions d'un m<>me fichier.
 .PP
@@ -51,3 +51,4 @@ Voir ":help credits" dans
 .SH TRADUCTION
 Cette page de manuel a <20>t<EFBFBD> traduite par David Blanchet
 <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03-12.
+Mise <20> jour 2012-05-06, Dominique Pell<6C> <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>
--- a/Show More
+++ b/Show More